Home

MC9000-G Product Reference Guide

1. 9 21 o oid IA ERUREHERE ERU RREPCRHM AESTATE 9 22 Writing Mode 9 23 Loos MO rra rr ES dees AIRES PR TX YTTEE PEE 9 23 ECHO WAU f aras 9 24 a na aca by WAP TEDCPP ENNIO A 9 25 Tips for WorkinginPocketErcel 9 26 NETO Laud d 5 or ALAGANG BKA KGG CER e e pa ad 9 27 setting Up An Account 9 27 Working with Contacts ea ace e ce EU bee EO n RES RI E rkiek 9 28 Ai AAA AI 9 29 Windows Media Player 9 31 pa AMA 9 32 Getting Books on the Device 9 32 do MA A 9 32 o MM A 9 33 Using Reader Features 9 34 co AAA 9 35 Contents xi Xil MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Pocket Internet Ekplorer 9 36 a AA 9 36 A 9 36 Creating Mobile Favorites 9 36 saving Memory on the Mobile Computer 9 37 Using AvantGo Channels 9 37 Using Pocket Internet Ekplorer 9 38 Browsing the Web 9 39 qun CAMP IEA 9 40 Copy Pictures to the Device Aaa 9 40 ds R
2. 3 30 Battery POWeT oooooooocoo errereen 3 30 Contents wii sc AA APA PA 3 32 BEER APA PAA 3 33 Eoee i rta Hh x ten Oh HERA rra CRURA AP 3 34 zr germ 3 34 ROOL es 3 35 HIE eas an ee ky Ge a An 3 36 INE CAP Ea AA REET E 3 36 Alarms o 3 38 Contrast Monochrome Devices Only 3 40 CLA a ee AA AA BA LEG ee E er eee 3 41 Moo os ao XE ERES ERES P rado 3 41 POISE DUBIE ABR Keene od OE enc c ed o ard 3 42 Runing ONG iae aso gat 19440955403 ea dion da R ER d dd 3 43 o AA 3 44 Battery JAA o AA PAA APA PRA AAP EET 3 45 POON Sonne od 48 ons beat A 3 46 dui o A 3 47 HO FOWO rara dedo OU ad FU REACH ee 3 48 Bluetooth VEISIODB conri x br RR CER LA anode a 3 49 FE DO RG ni ooo cap oe nde be HER ESI whe ek YE 3 50 Remove Programs 3 53 EOM IA EPUM RSS dE DARANGAN RU d ACERO RR 3 54 o Lu uix exea EORR RO KAN ERA ACD AOE Ce E OUR oak OOO o TL nrarcnss ap eden AA AA Aa 3 56 bono mI 3 58 LO LL esed AA ob hg wa ee ds nn ee ee sees 3 59 Wireless Ethernet 0 0 0 ccc RR RRRRRRM HI 3 59 viii MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Chapter 4 Communications fnis errors AA 4 3 Installing Communication Software 4 3 Installing ActiveSync 0 RR 4 3 OA PA rancia riadas 4 5 Seria
3. 6 11 Deleting a Bonded Device 6 12 ReceivingIncomingBeams 6 14 AcceptingaBond 6 15 eG IMAMA ON AA AA 6 17 Sending an Appointment or Task 6 17 Sending a Contact 6 19 AA 6 21 Bluetooth Communications 6 23 Contents IX x MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Dial up to the Network Dial Automatically from an Application Bluetooth LAN Access Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point Automatic Connection Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port PEN iwan boe Ear Pdl E HERE ER eee XP EAR Wed ee ees Chapter 7 AirBEAM Smart A AA AIrBEAM Package Builder AirBEAM Smart Client AirBEAM License Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client Forbes HH TA iaa edad nessa dbi d he Ear Ade ici bdo dnt s TA TT O A TORRE A CR ERROR CRECEN RUS TRE uiua cut oe cok eee ee Kees dee ee eee deeb
4. 2 4 Using the Transcriber iiis 248 Writing on the Screen 2 48 Converting Writing to Tekt 2 49 pi TEE a sq Po ode deter wb ses E S E d eases acne RS DEC FON La ds huh nk rra EE doe aod ooa 2 52 Selecting Writing TM T as mo Dina endis ob Oi ca eques saco dopr ex a bed Eo Ra Oed 8 Kho d eae Oe selecting a Drawing 2 53 RecordingaMessage 2 54 Using My Tekt 2299 Entering Information Using Keypads 2 99 EnteringData 2 56 Finding Information yas irse pc 2 56 ci 2 5 a AS 2 5 Imaging 2 57 AimingtheImager 2 58 Operational Modes 2 58 BED NOOD UNN eias cra dock TAWAD ies ira 2 58 Scanning Considerations TA 2 58 Scanning Bar Codes T E 2 59 PN Me arriva d Reading RHD AAA 2 61 Sean LED NACIO GB eee one ened cee en ene ee neous 2 62 Resetting the Mobile Computer 2 62 Performing a Warm Boot 2 62 Content
5. 3 36 3 40 DTE E EE T charging spare batteries 1 11 charging batteries 1 10 charging spare batteries 1 11 charging the main battery 1 11 NB cleaning mobile computer TITLE cT 13 3 clear type fonts 3 54 clearing RFID tags buses dudes cd cold boot 1 15 1 18 2 6 2 8 2 10 2 12 a MANA 2 14 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 22 TE 2 24 2 26 2 28 2 31 2 62 2 63 tor rabo 3 20 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 IN 3 IN 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Up 3 48 3 55 5 45 6 4 12 29 B 19 D sege C 23 data capture command a UNO MUTU ere eer 2 34 adjusting the distance 2 81 ICONS A rre E E A 2 35 2 36 imager operational modes command DAC NONG sarria 2 36 decode mode 2 58 communication setup image capture mode 2 58 Activeoyne oni MOSTPL ausser ees 4 11 imaging 2 57 Activesync on mobile computer 4 9 poro METTE 2 62 8 4 serial communication ia ii 4 10 laser scanning PAT USB communication setup 4 10 one dimentional bar codes 2 57 communication software RFID oaoa 2 58 MobileDox wo o 3 9 9 9 3 3 3 3 c3 9 3 3 3 3 s 3 3 c3 3 i 4 1 3 scan angle A BAD
6. LLL ILL IL dL LL LL ft IL LL LL LL Pot tt tt lLtlge s LI T TI I 1 d j L ro pem See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values E 15 F 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal wud de N ulum i EBEN AO O O A O CO A ee LL I Lal o pp pro je L LLL LLL C Ll lo sme es L LL ILLE pop oseepo IL LLL LL LL LL ILLE EL cL tt te o L F1 O A f peo See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps E 17 Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Jeur28g anjeA 119SV Jeur2eq Spo YA ON IT CO D C co M See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values F 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal wud de N ulum i IHA See Table 2 7 on p
7. 0 E t3 a a m e Tr e a ze ER 5 A BKT CU HG Na 000 g o m s a e Ee 5 0 0000 LJ m 0000 a 18 o a J SU 3 3 y 3 J ya NG VA a NG NW o a BR 1 a II 2g o ya z 1 3 A 4 a e o E K a Ng z E m N J Y Ya j VJ l a J mn NI Ti E E e MS N o T N o o S d C e a Figure 2 4 3270 Emulator Keypad et The 3270 emulator keypad is only used when the mobile computer is running the 3270 emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the 32 0 emulation software the 3270 keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad 2 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 4 3270 Emulator Descriptions ey en Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the registry Create a registry file with the follo
8. 10 24 10 31 Installation 10 22 magnetic stripe reading 10 24 power connection 10 23 10 28 10 31 serial connection 10 22 10 24 10 26 10 29 multi media card 1 6 10 5 10 9 KAPA AAO 3 19 N native reS C 23 INR EE crei 2 34 negative image C 19 next file sequence C 26 notes applicador rara R RECO xs 9 13 a aa te RRS RR ERE RESET ARD 3 6 0 open SEW errar ron xs 4 23 5 16 operating environment mobile computer D 3 operating mode 0c eee 5 7 optimizing battery life 3 47 optimizing display performance 3 46 jr 5 4 owner information 3 17 TTS irse DU P partitions OSU arpa rd canes 12 31 PAPA 12 28 AA PAA 12 30 rr pote rotas 12 31 splash screen o 12 30 parts of the mobile computer cds 1 3 1 4 sana AA APAPAP 3 6 password hint DT cn TR pabasa passwords 3 6 3 20 pdd layer version WA A A d 1 1 A 5 4 5 26 pin outs CTE a ators PA cand ED wenn E Auc pa D 10 y A D 9 gr c MM 9 25 Pocket Internet Explorer browsing web nba Ea KAWAB Aha MANG 9 39 channels m TUR D vis SO favorite INKS o ooo oo 9 36 mobile favorites 9 36 9 39 SS
9. 9 40 DEO Pe coss kdo ero nO REOR ede KAL ede Ded An KENA 9 40 oet Pictura as Background error 9 40 ee AAA 9 41 View SlideshowofPictures 9 41 Chapter 10 Accessories NODE A 10 5 AS PC PR O 10 5 Boon PA 10 5 Miscellaneous 05020024 ead ied p RELAX AA tended TERI rarkia ben 10 5 Snap on Modules sarcs ques x dye EE rd 10 6 Keypads A 10 7 Replacing the Keypad 10 7 Multi Media Card MMC Secure Device SD Card 10 9 single Sol serial USB Cradle ii es egeret RA CERE deves 10 11 EODD nog boned aad ees bys toast ans III PIENE ed dx yess RTI 10 12 Battery Charging Indicators 10 13 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 10 14 AAP APAPAP AAP eer PPO 10 15 Battery Charging Indicators 10 16 FOUR SIUE Charme DOE GIRO uis earned wh d Edad RRRERTQRVA Pad rep ERA 10 17 Daria GG KAG dina TTD 10 18 Battery UI MO atras ar PES ra ER REL Ra 10 18 Four Slot spare Battery Charger 10 19 a TI TON TTE TO EL TE E D T 10 20 Contents xiii Battery Charging Indicators MAGAT PT rrr 10 20 Magnetic Stripe Reader VOCE pees Jeane oreie eo 10 21 Attaching and Removing 10 22 A SA A et Battery Charging Indicators ccccecee
10. Defining Script Properties Creating the Script for the Hex Image Opening a New or Existing Script PRO TOLL CH aede oir Gs dci aod eed events eR a Copying Components to the Script Ie aa qucseqd quiete Vicbed d atten rd acte KK PAG LEA Building the Image RI Sending the HekKImage TENT Ha IPL Error Detection LIGNO a Splash IIIA Splash screen FUNG IAA i i50 AAA UA WA ato ewan senate ERR ERIS A Working wit FF Pas cus eic di cence RegMerge dll CopyFiles NAA raO Wi Downloading Partitions to the Mobile Computer j Q e 12 31 Partition Update vs File Update 12 31 Upgrade Reguirements 12 32 Chapter 13 Maintenance amp Troubleshooting OUR A 13 3 Maintaining the Mobile Computer 13 3 TOU DIG SDODUN EL od a a3 bord OE OE BG airada ad 13 4 o AAA 13 4 Bluetooth Connection 13 9 Four slot Charge Only BAONG a a sese cr EC Pen 13 11 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle 13
11. 1 20 Chapter 2 Operating Gia cae dto EXPE eared P EURO PAPA MAP AAP SE IPIE POR S 2 4 dca KR Tees 2 4 CO EDD ce DA we TP IRI da pi p Ere es 2 5 43 Key Keypad 2 9 D ROV REDI La saute d dcc Rap d riri hanes ped RO ra dob b 2 13 Sr Emulator ROS A 2 17 ESO PIRE EDU BO Lire ar yop RARA 2 21 VI Emulator Keypad 2 25 Keypad Special Functions 2 29 Lon herono BLEU ng oc ce ore PAA AA ER mg 2 31 Usno a ee PA AA 2 32 nth AA AA AA 2 33 Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar 2 34 SUIS ir AA KG 2 35 ki ia idad abad rates 2 36 SpeakerIcon 2 37 ENIM Db EA APR AA 2 38 INI WI ICON IAA KHA de hoe dc Ond 2 39 OC ui io bast ses U BAE WO UA MIE aad 2 40 Instant Message Icon 2 41 EN IGI a dice ro Cm 2 42 Multiple Notification Icon TOP FTT TET POTES 2 42 ol A 2 43 Using Pop up Menus 244 Notifications ooo 2 45 Entering Information 2 45 Entering Information Using the InputPanel 2 45 Using the Soft Keyboard 246 Using the Block Recognizer ao ea prada 2 47 Using the Letter Recognizer
12. 7 Click OK Communications 4 21 Using ActiveSync 1 Review the configuration of the cradle using the MobileDox Cradle Manager a AWIN server must be present on your network Ensure that the WINS Address provided in the TCP IP Settings tab matches the IP address of the WIN server on your network b Ensure that the Use NAT check box is not selected in the Port Settings tab 2 Insert the mobile computer into the cradle The mobile computer displays a succession of dialog boxes appear indicating the status of the connection Also the ActiveSync icon on the host computer s system tray turns green to indicate that the host computer and the mobile computer are communicating Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network The MC9010 G and MC9050 G can connect to the Internet across a wireless network To set up a wireless connection 1 Tapthe Mobile Companion icon on the task tray The Mobile Companion menu appears ER Mobile Companion 4 a2 3 05 E Wednesday October 15 2003 Tap here ka set owner information TTE sl E Mobile Status Companion Menu WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Mobile Options Companion Icon Figure 4 18 Mobile Companion Menu 4 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 Tap Find WLANs The Mobile Companion window appears Ei Network t qf oa ok Available WLAN Networks LI Figure 4 19 Mobile Companion Window 3 The mobile computer tries to locat
13. ANN Power Supply Figure 10 9 Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Power Connection Battery Charging Indicators The mobile computer s amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the status of the battery charging in the mobile computer See Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charging status indications he battery usually charges in less than four hours Accessories 10 19 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger his section describes how to set up and use the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Figure 10 4 to charge up to four MC9000 G spare batteries opare Battery opare Battery Charging Well opare Battery Charging LEDs 4 Figure 10 10 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 10 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Setup DC Cable Power Supply Figure 10 11 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Power Connection Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 1 Connect the charger to a power source as shown in Figure 10 11 2 Insert the battery into a spare battery charging slot and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact Battery Charging Indicators An amber LED is provided on each battery charging well see Figure 10 10 on page 10 19 See Table 10 2 for charging status indications The battery usually charges in less than four hours Table 10 2 Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators LED No spare battery in slot sp
14. C 2 5 Asie eli CEP 2 62 RDbarcodes 0 5 reading RFID tags 2 58 2 61 C 34 Ha fF C 41 See data capture 2 57 screen CAMION Ia 1 16 Symbol splash window 1 15 scripts ENDE ie rss aldo ERAI on 12 9 o PET 12 10 AA PR EE E 10 9 SDK See SNDK for eVC4 1 6 secure device card 10 9 Ne dooce phere nasyeuseeos IA 5 32 selecting a drawing 2 53 selecting DIOUFGITIB usada danse a 2 43 selecting RFID tags C 34 o AA 2 52 selecting writing 2 52 serial cradle oooooooooo 1 6 10 5 service information oooooooo oo XXIV setting o A E 3 6 SONO OIE M 1 18 setting the devicename 3 28 setting time 1 18 seting UME POG aseo vare cs p e pd ALE dra 1 17 setting up a partnership INMI aces Lagar rab baw DES 4 5 KON AN about daa 3 7 3 27 ASIA rara ns a dO backlight 3 7 3 30 BENE eens Sane APP NBA ONE bluetooth AA PAP ed BITS ana 35311 Kapal kaa A AI connections 3 10 contrast diia aa a SR memory 0 cece eee 38 3 41 menus sith ak E a AO owner Information A ee Kan A S A a OA radio power 3 8 3 48 regional 3 8 3 50 EMOYE DIODLO
15. YA O a D c o a b O Q pu RS S c E N S Es O o ymbol S The Enterprise Mobility Company MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Product Reference Guide 72 65703 07 Revision A November 2004 symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company 2003 2004 by Symbol Technologies Inc All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from Symbol This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as Is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis Symbol grants to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent of Symbol No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed progr
16. B See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values F 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued cama DIDI 14 Hila See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Keypad Maps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal n mw 105 um E 11 E 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal N lt x EBEN pf Up T po tT te LL lisa L ft te popups Ll Te ql mepe IL LL LLL LL LL LL ILL LL cL L Pp pp passo Pp pop p po OI tt O O O O fete fas See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps F 13 Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued sde y 3383S eydiy HIUS NENA sde eye1s eydiy YUS NON sde Z eyes eydiy yius III de dej 1 aes eydiy HyS Ps
17. Note The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during programming can damage the tag and render it unreadable 13 7 13 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued mim cm Mm The mobile computer cannot Tag is damaged Try another tag erase RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is locked Try another tag User is too far from tag Move to within two feet of tag based on tag type Note The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during programing can damage tag and render it unreadable The mobile computer cannot lock Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is already locked Try another tag User is too far from tag Move to within two feet of tag based on tag type Note The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the antenna Moving closer than 1 foot during programing can damage tag and render it unreadable The mobile computer cannot kill Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID tags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is not locked Lock tag first User is too far from tag Move to within two feet of tag based on tag type Note The minimum write distance is 1 foot from the anten
18. Start Menu To change the items that appear in the Start menu 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Menus icon Start Menu tab 9 Settings et 42409 5 Checked items appear in the Start menu Others appear in Programs v eh ActiveSync 1E Calculator Calendar Ig cerdisp F Contacts B2File Explorer CG Games LIG Jawbreaker HII Solitaire Inbox E Figure 3 8 Menus Window Start Menu Tab 2 select the programs that you want to appear in the Start menu 3 lapok You can create subfolders and shortcuts to appear under Start menu In ActiveSync on the host computer click Explore Double click My Pocket PC double click Windows double click Start Menu and then create the folders and shortcuts that you want 3 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG New Menu To enable the Mew menu Tap Start Settings Personal tab Menus icon New Menu tab 9 settings e 4 4n0 gt C Turn an Mew button menu Checked items appear in the Mew button menu Appointment Contact Excel Workbook Message Note Task Word Document Start Menu Mew Menu Figure 3 9 Menus Window New Menu Tab 1 Select the Turn on the New button menu check box 2 Select the items to appear on the menu An arrow appears next to New in the command bar of certain programs such as Pocket Word Pocket Excel Contacts Calendar and Tasks You can tap this arrow and then tap a new
19. shift z x c v b n m F ruj V eltel Ej Figure 10 29 My Connection Window Phone Number CO Depending on the location when dialing additional numbers may need to be dialed e g a 9 prefix is often required if dialing from work a country code is needed if dialing internationally To avoid creating new modem connections for each situation tap use dialing rules to define frequently used dialing locations 10 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 6 If necessary enter the user name password and domain 3 Settings 7 m2 1 05 My Connection User name Password TF provided by ISP or network administrator 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Ej Figure 10 30 My Connection Window User Information Settings 7 Tap Advanced to edit the Extra dial string modem commands text box to set country parameters to operate the modem with other country telephone networks Eg settings e 46438 ok Advanced Baud rate 19200 Y Wait For dial tone before dialing Wait For credit card o sec Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if not connected in sec 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tab a w e r t vju i Jo D T iCAP a s d f G h j k T shift z x c v bjnjm 7 icuj JA te gt Figure 10 31 Advanced Window
20. 17 pap AD ME Mew Edit View Format Tools Figure 9 19 Using Pocket Excel If a workbook contains sensitive information you can protect it with a password Open the workbook tap Edit Password Every time you open the workbook you must enter the password so choose one easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess 9 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Tips for Working in Pocket Excel When working in large worksheets in Pocket Excel View in full screen mode to see as much of the worksheet as possible Tap View Full Screen To exit full screen mode tap Restore show and hide window elements Tap View then the elements you want to show or hide Freeze panes on a worksheet First select the cell where you want to freeze panes lap View Freeze Panes You may want to freeze the top and leftmost panes in a worksheet to keep row and column labels visible as you scroll through a sheet oplit panes to view different areas of a large worksheet Tap View Split Drag the split bar to where you want it To remove the split tap View Remove Split show and hide rows and columns To hide a row or column select a cell in that row or column Tap Format Rowor Column Hide To show a hidden row or column tap Tools Go To then type a reference that is in the hidden row or column Tap Format Row or Column Unhide For more information on using Pocket Excel tap Start Help Applicati
21. An IP address for a network gateway or router A mobile computer may be part of a subnet as specified by its IP address and Netmask It can send packets directly to any node on the same subnet If the destination node is on a different subnet then the mobile computer sends the packet to the gateway first The gateway determines how to route the packet to the destination subnet This field is an option used by networks that require gateways See Cold Boot A set of random frequencies designed to minimize interference with other sets of random frequencies A hopping sequence determines the pattern with which a station that uses frequency hopping changes its communications frequency See Frequency Hopping Hertz A unit of frequency equal to one cycle per second A computer that serves other mobile computers in a network providing such services as computation database access supervisory programs and network control Intelligent drive electronics Refers to the solid state hard drive type International Electrotechnical Commission This international agency regulates laser safety by specifying various laser operation classes based on power output during operation IEC 825 Class 1 IEEE Address Interleaved 2 of 5 IOCTL IP imaging scanning Intercharacter Gap Interleaved Bar Code Interleaved 2 of 5 Internet Protocol Address 1 0 Ports GL 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
22. An area within a scanner s field of view in which specular reflection may prevent a successful decode To recognize a bar code symbology e g UPC EAN and then analyze the content of the specific bar code scanned A decoding scheme that converts pulse widths into data representation of the letters or numbers encoded within a bar code symbol Decryption is the decoding and unscrambling of received encrypted data Also see Encryption and Key The range between minimum and maximum distances at which a scanner can read a symbol with a certain minimum element width The Symbol Device Configuration Package provides the Product Reference Guide PRG flash partitions Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and the associated TCM scripts With this package hex images that represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the mobile computer Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Software that automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network Similar to BOOTP but also permits the leasing of an IP address It eliminates having to manually assign permanent IP addresses DHCP software typically runs in servers and is also found in network devices such as routers that allow multiple users access to the Internet DHCP Server Discrete Code Discrete 2 of 5 DNS Server Domain Name DOS DRAM DTE EAN Electronic Product Code Element Encoded Area ENO RS 232 Encryption Gl
23. N u a Ll o eo m oa e P vw DO Wan eg s DOH B CO CO co co CEN m ee ww ue NIO S8 97 sw m m v g O An BRK aa Ya ma m a 4S AAS 5 6 ARAS m n m cn 1 27 37 2 637 C3 Foo v CoCr EE BINI OI WY 2 Figure 2 6 VT Emulator Keypad he VT emulator configuration is only used when the mobile computer is running the VT emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the VI emulation software the VI keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad 2 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 6 VT Emulator Descriptions DN 0 Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the registry Create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKeyOverride dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile c
24. Partition images for selected partitions can be created by TCM All partition images suitable for use by IPL are in hex file format for transfer by TCM from the development computer to the mobile computer Upgrade Requirements Upgrade requirements e The hex files to be downloaded on development computer e A connection from the host computer and the mobile computer either serial or wireless e TCM on development computer to download the files Once these requirements are satisfied the mobile computer can be upgraded by invoking IPL and navigating the menus See Sending the Hex Image on page 12 12 for procedures on downloading a hex file to the mobile computer Vviaintenance DUDIESINOOUNG Contents Introduction 13 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 13 3 Introduction his chapter includes instructions on cleaning and storing the mobile computer and provides troubleshooting solutions for potential problems during mobile computer operating Maintaining the Mobile Computer For trouble free service observe the following tips when using the mobile computer e Take care not to scratch the screen of the mobile computer When working with the mobile computer use the supplied stylus or plastic tipped pens intended for use with a touch sensitive screen Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the mobile comp
25. Table 3 6 Wakeup Conditions Power Off When the mobile computer goes into Trigger button is pressed sleep mode by pressing the Power button these acions wake tho Any Key Any key on the keypad is pressed mobile computer up Touch Panel Touch screen is tapped 3 56 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 3 6 Wakeup Conditions Continued Auto Off When the mobile computer goes into Trigger button is pressed sleep mode by an automatic power off function these actions wake the PIS a AG eC DERE Pauls prege mobile computer up Touch Panel Touch screen is tapped System The System tab displays mobile computer system data 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon System tab AF Symbol Settings r m2 3 01 ok DEVICE ID in GUID Format O00E0013 30F5 7 106 Fe800 00506F 7 460E2 13000E00FS3D087 1 F80000506F7 460E2 OEM Mame IPL Version SYMBOL MC90006 1 9 1903 OEM Version PocketPC 3 0 55DKE 4 2 PlatFarm ID PlatFarm 127 Figure 3 51 Symbol Setting Window System Tab 2 Inthe System tab you can view the system data listed in Table 3 7 Table 3 7 System Tab Data tl opm im DEVICE ID in 128 bit unique identifier guaranteed GUID is a Microsoft defined format GUID format across all mobile computers with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs Settings 3 5 7 Table 3 7 System Tab Data tl Rm DEVICE ID in 128 bit unique iden
26. ff h Figure B 29 Printer Settings Window Tap each item listed to select the appropriate settings where applicable Scroll through the device values to select the appropriate value Demo Program B 25 Communication Settings select Comm Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use when communicating with other devices ES CtlPanel Example 4 2 3 24 Dx 115200 Default E a pop pag Figure B 30 Communication Settings Window Tap Portto select the appropriate communication settings to be used by ActiveSync Scroll through the communication settings to select the appropriate value B 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Display Settings select Display Settings on the Control Panel to adjust display backlight features ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 11 51 e Display Settings Backlight API Version pe ejes File Help E Figure B 31 Display Settings Window e Tap Intensity to toggle the backlight intensity between low medium high and super As you change the value the display provides a sample of each intensity level e Tap Backlight to turn the backlight on and off Demo Program B 27 Audio Settings oelect Audio Settings on the Control Panel to specify the beeper volume and view the version numbers for the Audio and Notify APIs ES CtiPanel Example 7 m2 12 08 x Audio Settings Beeper Volume API Version 01 03 Notify API v
27. Accessories Commands The tables that follow summarize the AT commands result codes and S Registers for the MDM 3000 lt string gt represents a letter number or symbol to be entered lt value gt represents a number to be entered Possible values are listed below the command Table 10 5 AT Command Table Country Description Specific Dial D lt string gt So DIMF digits 0 9 a The star digit tone dialing only Pi The gate digit tone dialing only DTMF digits A B C D Re dial last number 4 Pulse dialing Tone dialing Wait for dial tone Modem waits for dial tone before dialing digits following W Wait for silence Modem waits for at least 5 seconds of silence in the call progress frequency band before continuing with next dial string parameter Wait for credit card dialing tone before continuing with the dial string Return to command state Modem goes off hook and allows entering additional AT commands Use H to go back to on hook L O lt space gt Ignored Might be used to format the dial string Off hook and attempt to answer a call Disconnect Hang UP Return to On Line Data Mode O value so Enters on line data mode without a retrain Enters on line data mode with a retrain Dial pause Modem pauses for a time specified by S8 before dialing the digits following 10 45 10 46 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 1
28. Invalid data in HEX file The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains invalid data Ensure the file is in proper Symbol HEX file format with valid HEX data Exceeded max size The download file is too large to fit into the space allocated for it Either make the file smaller or increase the space allocated for it by altering the partition Partition is not valid on this device The downloaded file specifies a partition entry that does not exist on the device Only download files that are valid for this device or change the partition table so that the new file is valid on the device Wrong destination code A specific partition was chosen from the Main Menu not Auto Select but the file selected for download was for another partition Ensure that the partition selected from the Main Menu matches the file selected for download File type does not support IPL Auto Monitor Power Micro and Partition Table cannot be select loaded with Auto Select Select the appropriate area and try again Non contiguous record found A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file Timed Out No data IPL was waiting for data from the source device but timed out before receiving any Check the source device connectivity and retry Fail Buffer Overrun The serial port device could not keep up with incoming data Retry the serial download with a lower baud Partition Table not Valid
29. KKXXKXXXXKXXXXKXKKXKXKKXKXXXXKXXXXKXXKXKXKKXKXXKXXXXXXKXXXKXKKXKXKXXKXXX int GetBA WCHAR pp BT ADDR pba Bump pointer through any leading spaces while pp for inti20 1 4 i pp if liswxdigit pp return FALSE int c pp if c gt a 6 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG c c a 0xa else if c gt A c c A xa elsec c 0 if le lt 0 c gt 16 return FALSE pba pba 16 c j for 12 0 1 8 i pp if iswxdigit pp return FALSE int c PP if c gt a c c a 0xa else if c gt A c c A xa else c c 0 if lc lt 0 c gt 16 return FALSE pba pba 16 c j if pp I2 amp amp pp 0 return FALSE else return TRUE Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 43 Bluetooth Printing The mobile computer supports Bluetooth printers that support a serial port profile Printing to a Bluetooth printer requires a print enabled application to be installed on the mobile computer 6 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents 7 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG AIrBEAM Smart 7 3 Introduction The AirBEAM Smart product allows specially designed software packages to be transferred between a host server and Symbol wireless handheld devices Before transfer AirBEAM Smart c
30. Perform a warm boot first This restarts the mobile computer and saves all stored records and entries If the mobile computer still does not respond perform a cold boot Performing a Warm Boot Hold down the Power button for approximately five seconds As soon as the mobile computer starts to perform a warm boot release the Power button Operating 2 63 Performing a Cold Boot A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries that are not saved in flash memory Application and Platform folders or a memory card Never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not solve the problem during a reset Performing a cold boot restores formats preferences and other Do not hold down any key button or the trigger other than the Power button N settings to the default settings CAUTION CO Any data previously synchronized with a computer can be restored during the next ActiveSync operation See Chapter 4 Communications for detailed ActiveSync instructions To perform a cold boot 1 Press the primary battery release on the mobile computer see Figure 1 3 on page 1 8 and Figure 1 4 on page 1 9 to partially eject the battery from the mobile computer 2 While the battery is partially released press and hold the Power button and push the battery to fully re insert it in the mobile computer One audible click can be heard as the battery is fully inserted 3 Continue to hold the Power button for
31. Read Tag 83Times Back to Global Scroll Figure C 27 RFID Locate Tag Window 2 Entera valid Tag D in the text box below the magnifying glass e an 8 byte hex string for 64 bits e a12 byte hex string for 96 bits To pre fill the text box with a valid Tag ID select a tag in the main ags window and tap EJ 3 Pull the trigger to locate the tag The mobile computer beeps when the tag is found The faster the beep the closer the mobile computer is to the located tag Figure C 27 shows Tag ID 80 00 80 04 23 23 84 33 was read 83 times since the trigger was pulled 4 Tap Back to Global Scroll to return to the main Tags window C 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Program Tag This option can be used to program RFID tags 1 Tap in the main Jags window or tap Mode Program Tag Ey e PEPE Bok All tags in view will be programmed Enter ID below 64 bits Or Tag ID 96 bits Hex string Password Status Message test box Figure C 28 RFID Program Tag Window 2 Inthe text box below the tag icon enter an 8 byte 64 bits or 12 byte 96 bits hex string to be programmed into the tag This string can contain any number from 0 9 and a letter from A F Each byte must consist of 2 characters Each byte should be separated by a space character For example if the tag should contain 80012390AAFD3617 type 80 01 23 90 AA FD 36 17 as shown in Figure C 28 3 Apassword is required
32. UDP Visible Laser Diode VLD A mobile computer emulation protocol commonly used on the Internet and TCP IP based networks It allows a user at a mobile computer or desk top computer to log onto a remote device and run a program see Mobile Computer A program under DOS that ends its foreground execution to remain resident in memory to service hardware software interrupts providing background operation lt remains in memory and may provide services on behalf of other DOS programs A terminal emulation emulates a character based mainframe session on a remote non mainframe mobile computer including all display features commands and function keys The MC9000 G Series and MC906R G RFID supports Terminal Emulations in 3270 5250 and VT220 Trivial File Transfer Protocol A version of the TCP IP FIP File Transfer Protocol protocol that has no directory or password capability It is the protocol used for upgrading firmware downloading software and remote booting of diskless devices Allowable deviation from the nominal bar or space width See TCP IP See TFTP see Terminate and Stay Resident Universal Product Code A relatively complex numeric symbology Each character consists of two bars and two spaces each of which is any of four widths The standard symbology for retail food packages in the United States User Datagram Protocol A protocol within the IP protocol suite that is used in place of TCP when a reliable de
33. shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Figure 6 45 Enter Dial Up Number 12 Enter any string of numbers 6 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG ES 13 14 13 16 17 18 An actual telephone number is not required however the Bluetooth AP must support connections as Bluetooth modem Tap Next ES Settings Pe ff 4 46 My Connection User name Password Domain Figure 6 46 My Connection Window In the User name text box enter the user name for this connection In the Password text box enter the password for this connection In the Domain text box enter the domain for this connection if required Tap Finish Tap the Connection icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen An X indicates that the mobile computer is not connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 37 19 The Connectivity dialog box appears with the AP connection just created Tap the phone number to start connecting er PRE zon o Connectivity EF AP via Bluetooth 555 1212 B E Settings d Figure 6 47 Connecting to a Bluetooth AP Multiple connections may be listed Tap on the phone number of the AP connection 20 Depending on the AP and connection settings entering a passkey and or a password may be required 6 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 21 If a password is required and it was not saved the Network Log On scr
34. 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab About icon Version tab ex BEE 0 Microsoft Pocket PC version 4 20 1081 Build 13100 1996 2003 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved This computer program is protected by 11 5 and international copyright laws Processor ARM XScale Memory 60 81 MB Expansion slot Not in use Owner Figure 3 20 About Window Version Tab 2 Tap ok 3 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Device ID The Device ID tab allows you to customize the name and description of the mobile computer 1 Tap Start Settings System tab About icon Device ID tab 9 settings et 4212 05 ok Your device uses this information ko identify itself to other computers Enter a name that starts with a letter and contains the characters 4 2 or 0 9 Device name Symbol MIST Figure 3 21 About Window Device ID Tab 2 Inthe Device name field enter a name for the mobile computer Ensure that you do not use spaces In the Description field enter a description for the mobile computer Tap ok Settings 3 29 Copyrights The Copyrights tab allows you to view any relevant copyright information Portions of this software are based on MESA Mosaic NCSA Mosaici TM was developed by the National Center For Supercomputing Applications at the University of Illinois at Urbana Champaign Distributed under a licensing agreement with Spyglass Inc Contains s
35. 12 Left to Scan Figure 8 2 Rapid Deployment Window 8 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3 Scan the appropriate bar code s to complete the configuration and or download For information about scanning with the mobile computer see Data Capture on page 2 57 a APDF417 bar code 2 D bar code can contain all download data in a single bar code In this case only one bar code may be required to scan b Multi part linear bar codes 1 D bar codes can require scanning several bar codes Bar codes can be scanned in any order The text box under Bar codes left to scan shows the remaining bar codes to scan see Figure 8 2 4 After all appropriate bar codes are scanned successfully the mobile computer connects to the server and the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays while network settings are configured E Rapid Deployment 4 ETE MEok Configuring network settings Please wait Figure 8 3 Rapid Deployment Window Configuring If the mobile computer cannot connect to the server it continues to retry until the user cancels exits the application If failure to connect to the server persists see the MSP Administrator 5 When configuration is complete a The Today screen displays see Figure 1 11 on page 1 18 b Anew Mobile Companion profile is created on the mobile computer from the data encoded in the bar code s scanned See Mobile Companion on page 5 4 for more informatio
36. 2 6 2 8 2 10 2 12 pri es 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 27 esses 2 24 2 26 2 28 2 31 2 62 2 63 Livechesebcwakuss PAN S d dol did dd porra 998 3 55 5 45 6 4 B 19 WET 4 ska rares ern 2 31 2 62 3 20 3 30 ME PPT 3 33 3 48 3 55 6 4 se A C 15 BSSID 5 4 ON waa E o ESAMI PIE xxiii button settings 3 11 Index buttons power 1 12 2 31 C Cable Adapter Module 1 6 10 6 cables 0000 1 6 10 6 auto charge cable 1 6 10 6 DEX cable 1 6 10 6 printer cable 1 6 10 6 USB charger 1 6 10 6 calendar application 9 4 creating appointments 9 4 meeting requests 9 6 SUmrmarv SCIEBIT cocrosinra src rs e O calibrating screen A A A Te 1 6 10 6 10 26 installation o o o 10 27 USB COMBCUON aa aasd dard 10 22 10 26 CM NNI APAPAP C 19 capabilities ACQUISITION C 4 ile T C 4 image capture C4 A video viewfinder 0 4 capabilities RFID imager C 14 certificates installing 5 12 changing profiles 9 31 changing the dale uaecsssauseseicie uas 3 36 3 40 changing the time
37. AH PERTERRITI ade ah oe ET 3 38 Contrast Monochrome Devices Only 3 40 Memory nnn e les 3 41 ID oe dag ch hohe hae hk es eS ee be nk ee ee ANZIA 3 41 AO rare sierra APA PAA PAA 3 42 da A 3 43 An 3 44 A A OH ECCE ERE AA TA es 3 44 AS 3 45 o AA IA bob ee oe eed ae bee eae tea es 3 46 Optimizing Battery Life 3 47 Settings 3 3 SA 3 48 DI AAA 3 49 us KIA E o HOS AA AA AS 3 53 SOR Lis Lienzereiaereedberdeeewha4bPbe RNGA dad A Rau aa RA dores ke KURA abd ad a koa 3 54 Symbol Settings 0 0 RR RR RR e es 3 55 AU resi oe be enw HH IPC 3 55 DI bas oe obs o Ai ge op eae iaa 3 56 Ki ica oo veto og ae ae AA EG eee 3 58 E A APA PRA APA AA AA E ETE 3 59 Wireless Ethernet 0 0 0 ccc RR III 3 59 3 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Settings 3 5 Introduction This chapter provides basic instructions for customizing the mobile computer by adjusting settings Adjusting Settings To view available options for the mobile computer settings tap Start Settings You can adjust settings in either the Personal tab or the System tab Personal Tab 9 settings PP O os m Buttons Input Menus ean e Owner Password Sounds Ex Information Notifications amp Personal System Connections Figure 3 1 Settings Personal Tab Table 3 1 lists the applications available in the Personal tab
38. Advanced Window TCP IP and Servers Tabs 28 Tap Finish 29 Tap the Connection icon in the navigation bar at the top of the screen An X indicates that the mobile computer is not connected 6 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 30 The Connectivity dialog box appears with the dial up connection just created Verify the phone number then tap the phone number Figure 6 37 Connecting to a Bluetooth Phone Multiple connections may be listed Tap on the phone number of the connection to dial 31 Depending on the phone and connection settings entering a passkey and or a password may be required before the phone starts to dial Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 31 32 f the dial up password was not saved the Network Log On screen appears E Logon to Server ar aff 1 49 Network Log On Resource My Connection C Save password 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T caPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F ead CES Figure 6 38 Network Log On Window 33 Enter the Password and tap ok 34 he device begins dialing er aft 4 20 T Connecting to AP via Bluetaoth L Using Bluetooth Phone Dialing 555 1717 Settings Figure 6 39 Dialing the Bluetooth Phone 6 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Dial Automatically from an Application After a dial up connection is set up the Connection Manager
39. Extra Dial String Modem Commands The modem defaults to operation with US telephone networks country code B5 To operate the modem with other country telephone networks a country code must be entered The modem adjusts its operating parameters to comply with the telephone network in the country specified See Modem Country Setup on page 10 40 for the appropriate syntax and a list of country codes 8 lap ok to exit the Advanced window 9 Tap Finish Accessories 10 39 Connecting the Modem To start the connection 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections 2 Inthe Connections window tap Manage existing connections e 421209 D Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection Manage existing connections My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VEN server connection Set up mv proxy server Figure 10 32 My Connections Window 3 Tap and hold the connection name then select Connect from the menu that appears The modem attempts to connect To create a connection tap New Tap and hold on an existing connection For more Connecting Ea My Connection options Using Hayes Compatible an COMI Dialing 5555555 A Settings ide Delete General 1231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 D Tabd w e r t y u i o p CAP a sjd f g h k T shift z x cjv b n m cuja j detel Figure 10 33 Creating a Connec
40. It is used to test and debug a network by sending out a packet and waiting for a response Measurement of the contrast brightness difference between the bars and spaces of a symbol A minimum PCS value is needed for a bar code symbol to be scannable PCS RL RD RL where RL is the reflectance factor of the background and RD the reflectance factor of the dark bars The state in which a scanner is configured for parameter values See Scanning Mode A clear space containing no dark marks which precedes the start character of a bar code symbol and follows the stop character A standard keyboard commonly used on North American and some European PC keyboards QWERTY refers to the arrangement of keys on the left side of the third row of keys See RFID Random Access Memory Data in RAM can be accessed in random order and quickly written and read The Rapid Deployment RD Client facilitates software downloads to a mobile device from a Mobility Services Platform MSP Console s FIP server Reflectance Resolution RF RFID RFID Reader ROM ROM DOS Router RS 232 Scan Area Scanner Scanning Mode Scanning Sequence Glossary GL 15 Amount of light returned from an illuminated surface The narrowest element dimension which is distinguished by a particular reading device or printed with a particular device or method Radio Frequency Radio Frequency Identification is a system for tagging an
41. Reader 3 0 or higher SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations The SMDK for eVC4 contains the components listed in Table 11 1 Table 11 1 SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations Components Directory Location API Help file and Readme Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1 1 for eVC4 file sample applications for Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit v1 1 for eVC4 Samples evc quick start development Header files with API Program Files Windows CE Tools wce420 Pocket PC 2003 Include armv4 prototypes and structures Import Library files Program Files Windows CE Toolswce420 Pocket PC 2003 Lib armv4 otart Menu Documents and Settings All Users Start Menu Programs Readme Help samples WEB Updates The header files and lib files are time and date stamped so they can be easily identified in the armv4 directories The date is the date on which the software release was assembled and the time is the version of the release For example a time of 1 00 signifies version 1 0 Software Installation on Development PC 11 5 SMDK for NET Installation Requirements In order to install the SMDK for NET the following additional components must first be installed on the development PC e Remove any SMDK for NET Beta 1 or Beta 2 packages prior to installation e Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 SMDK for NET Contents and Locations The SMDK for NET contains the components listed in Table 11 2 Table 11 2 SMDK fo
42. Return to RFID Demo Decode Code128 Len 11 E Figure C 9 Symbol Image Capture Scan Window 2 Select a focal focus length from the Focus drop down list Near enables a close focal length Far enables a distant focal length 3 Aim the exit window at the bar code Tap NN or press and release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful decode he scanned data appears on the mobile computer s display until another bar code Is scanned or another file is opened from the Fi e menu 5 Tap Return to RFID Demo to return to the Series 9000 Demo window see Figure C 1 on page 3 After a bar code Is scanned e The bar code data can be saved to a file for editing Editing the data has no effect other than changing the data displayed in the window e The status of the scanned bar code displays in the text box on the bottom of the screen e g Decode Code 128 etc C 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Capture The Capture option starts the Image Acquisition process when the trigger is pressed by enabling image capture and displaying a video image on the mobile computer s display The settings defined on the Capture window can also be defined in the AcqCap tab Advanced Settings AcqCap tab See Table C 1 on page C 15 for AcqCap field descriptions eu To acquire images of documents and signatures 1 Tap Demo Capture to display the Capture window 7 E Symbol Ima
43. The size of flash memory is different than that described in the partition table Retry the download with the correct partition table file Invalid file format 34 The file format is invalid Only Symbol HEX files are supported by IPL Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 27 Creating a Splash Screen The source bitmap files used to create the default splash screens for the mobile computer are supplied with the DCP for MC9000w These files can be modified using any of the standard windows image editors allowing customization for particular customers To create a custom splash screen perform the following steps 1 Formobile computers with monochrome screens open the Splashmono bmp file supplied with the DCP for MC9000w using an image editor 2 For mobile computers with color screens open the Splashcolor bmp file supplied with the DCP for MC9000w using an image editor 3 Modify the bitmap file and save 4 Create a splash partition using the steps shown in the Building the Image on page 12 11 plash Screen Format If the default files are not used to create the new splash screens be sure to preserve the image format The formats are as follows Table 12 5 Splash Screen Format Monochrome 240x296 4 bits per pixel Color 240x296 8 bits per pixel 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE Is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel See Sending the Hex Image on page 12 12 for i
44. Tim woodgroyebank c Block Tap and hold to display a pop Delete Contact up menu of actions Properties Tools Chats Figure 9 20 MSN Messenger Contacts To see others online without being seen tap Tools My Status Appear Offline You appear offline but remain on the blocked contact s list eu To unblock a contact tap and hold the contact then tap Unblock on the pop up menu Applications 9 29 Chatting with Contacts Tap a contact name to open a chat window Enter the message in the text entry area at the bottom of the screen or tap My Textto enter a preset message and tap Send To invite another contact to a multi user chat tap ools Invite and tap the contact you want to invite ES MSN Messenger uz 1 56 fok You are chatting with Adam Figure 9 21 Sending a Message To switch back to the main window without closing a chat tap Contacts To revert back to the chat window tap Chats and select the person you were chatting with 9 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To know if the contact you are chatting with is responding look for the message under the text entry area Ey MSN Messenger m 1 57 ok You are chatting with Adam Kim Akers says View full chat Hi Can you meek at 2 007 Adam is typing a message View the status of the chat Te kana shift z x c v b n m uad A E EA Tools Chats My Text A E Figure 9 22 Receiving a Message Fo
45. Troubleshooting provides information to help you take proper care of the mobile computer and solve problems that may come up XXIII Chapter A Block Recognizer describes how to using the Block Recognizer to write characters Chapter B Demo Program provides an overview of the mobile computer demo program applications such as scanning imager setup diagnostic utilities and file management Chapter C RFID Demo Program provides an overview of the MC906R G RFID mobile computer s demo program applications RFID and image capture Chapter D Specifications includes a table listing the technical specifications for the mobile computer Chapter E Keypad Maps includes tables listing key functionality for each keypad Notational Conventions The following conventions are used in this document Mobile computer refers to any Symbol MC9000 G or MC906R G RFID terminal MC9000 G Series refers to all non RFID configurations of the mobile computer MC906R G RFID refers to all RFID configurations of the mobile computer User refers to anyone using an application on the mobile computer You refers to the End User System Administrator or Technical Support person using this manual as a reference to install configure operate maintain and troubleshoot the mobile computer Italics are used to highlight the following e chapters and sections in this and related documents e dialog box window and screen names e drop down list and
46. Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs and its accessories The MC9000 G mobile computer includes the following variations eu MC9010 Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated imager 802 11 Spectrum249 wireless technology to perform local area network LAN communication memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM 28 key 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome touch panel display Rapid Deployment MC9050 Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated imager 802 11b Spectrum249 wireless technology to perform local area network LAN communication memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM 28 key 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display Rapid Deployment MC9060 Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs 1 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated laser scanner or 1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated imager 802 11b Spectrum249 wireless technology to perform local area network LAN communica
47. along with a count of how many times the selected tag was read displays in the ags window oelected tag Number of bits 64 or 96 in 8000800428254 139 read a total of 46 times File Mode z Figure C 24 RFID Main Tags Window Selected Tag Clearing the Display To clear the tag list in the mobile computer s display tap a Saving Tag Data A list of read tags can be saved on the mobile computer The application saves the tag list to the My Documents folder and names the file RFIDTaglist csv The file is a csv format comma separated text file This file format can be read by MS Excel or other applications that support csv The sample file contains the following information Time Stamp lag ID Tag Type Read Count 2004 09 17115 34 53 05 00 H22EEDDAEBFCCEDEE C1 10 2004 09 17T15 34 53 05 00 H8000800545234227 C1 10 2004 09 17T15 34 57 05 00 H8000800428254124 C1 15 C 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG The Time Stamp format Is Year month date Hour Minute seconds TimezoneHourDifferential GMT TimezoneMinutesDifferntial The Tag ID format is HTagData H indicates the data is in hex The Tag Type format is CX where X is the tag class Currently the unit supports class 1 tags The file can not be displayed on the mobile computer with the factory supplied software The file is intended to be downloaded to a host and displayed using an application that can read com
48. batteries For additional information about the UBC2000 see the UBC 2000 Universal Battery Charger Product Guide p n 70 33188 xx Battery Figure 10 21 UBC Adapter Inserting and Removing a Battery Insert the battery into the battery well with the charging contacts facing down over charging pins and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact To remove the battery press the battery release and lift battery out of the well Accessories 10 31 Setup DC Cable AC Line Cord Power Supply Figure 10 22 UBC Adapter Power Connection Battery Charging Indicators To charge a spare battery using the UBC adapter connect the power supply to the UBC see Figure 10 22 on page 10 37 then insert the spare battery The spare battery begins charging automatically The UBC charge LEDs see Figure 10 23 show the status of the battery charging in the adapter Table 10 3 shows battery charging status Indications 10 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG he battery usually charges in three hours lll power zamob nf gt as Bl READY or STANDBY or FAULT Green FlashingYellow Solid Yellow Bl CHARGING SolidYellow Figure 10 23 UBC Adapter LEDs Table 10 3 UBC Adapter Charge LED Status Indications wb mimm Description WA POWER Green Power is connected to the UBC Adapter READY or Green Charging complete STANDBY or Flashing The battery was deeply disch
49. computer can use 1MB 2MB or both If Both 1MB and 2MB Support is selected the mobile computer defaults to a 1 Mbps data rate if a 2 Mbps data rate cannot be established Password opectrum24 FH settings has a password protection feature that can be turned on and off from the WLAN Adapter tab When the Spectrum24 FH program is initially launched the password is off default 5 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To create a new password for the Spectrum24 FH pages 1 Tap Password from the WLAN Adapter tab ae Symbol 5pectrum2 Yi 4 8 28 ok Current Password New Password Confirm Mew Password Figure 5 34 Spectrum 24 FH Password Window Enter the case sensitive password 10 characters maximum in the New Password field Enter the password in the Confirm New Password field Tap OK The new password is required the next time Spectrum24 FH is accessed pu ses Ce a To change an existing password Tap Password from the WLAN Adapter tab Enter the current password in the Current Password field 1 2 3 Entera new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password fields 4 Tap OK To disable an existing password 1 Tap Password from the WLAN Adapter tab 2 Enter the current password in the Current Password field and leave the New Password and Contirm New Password fields blank 3 Tap OK Spectrum24 Configuration 5 45 Configuring the S24 DS 11
50. e Accessories The mobile computer s snap on accessories provide charging capability when used with one of the accessory charging cables For detailed snap on setup and charging procedures see e CAM on page 10 26 e MSR on page 10 2 e Chargers The mobile computer s spare battery charging accessories are used to charge batteries that are removed from the mobile computer For detailed spare battery charging accessories setup and charging procedures see Getting Started 1 11 e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle on page 10 77 e Four Slot Spare Battery Charger on page 10 19 e Universal Battery Charger UBC on page 10 30 To achieve the best battery life in mobile computers with multiple radios turn off the radios that are not being used This can be accomplished via the setDevicePower API refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers or via the Control Panel application tap Start 9000 Demo Ctl Panel icon eu Charging the Main Battery You can charge the main battery in the mobile computer using a cradle the CAM with a charging cable or the MSR with the appropriate power supply 1 Ensure the accessory used to charge the main battery is connected to the appropriate power source see Chapter 10 Accessories for setup information 2 Insert the mobile computer into a cradle or attach the appropriate snap on module 3 The mobile computer starts to charge automatically The amber charge LED in the Indicator LED Bar
51. e Charges the mobile computer s battery when used with the appropriate power supply Attaching and Removing To attach snap the MSR onto the bottom of the mobile computer Latch Grip one on each side Figure 10 13 Attaching the MSR Accessories 10 23 To remove squeeze the latch grips and pull the MSR from the mobile computer Remove the MSR from the bottom of the mobile computer before using a cradle for charging and communication EU Setup Into Cigarette Lighter P LL La AC Power Supply y lo Device Serial USB Port Figure 10 15 MSR Serial USB Connection 10 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Battery Charging Indicators To charge the mobile computer s battery through the MSR connect the power supply to the MSR see Figure 10 14 on page 10 23 then attach the MSR to the mobile computer The mobile computer begins charging automatically Batteries must be charged within the 32 to 104 F 0 to 440 C ambient temperature range eu The mobile computers amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the status of the battery charging in the mobile computer See Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charging status indications The battery usually charges in less than four hours if the mobile computer is not in use Serial USB Connection The MSR can connect to and communicate with a serial USB device such as a printer or
52. one of the following Use the serial cable to connect to a COM port on the back of this desktop computer and click Next Use the USB cable to connect to the USB port on the back of this desktop computer ActiveSyne will automatically detect the device connection fou can also connect your mobile device using infrared IR For more information click Help mg _ Cancel Hep Figure 4 1 Get Connected Window 2 Connect the mobile computer to the host computer using the appropriate Serial connection see Chapter 10 Accessories 3 On the host computer select Next in the Get Connected window 4 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 The host computer and the mobile computer attempt to synchronize The New Partnership window appears New Partnership Set Up a Partnership This wizard helps you establish a partnership between your mobile device and this computer You can setup either a standard partnership to synchronize data between your device and this computer or a quest partnership to simply transfer data between your device and this computer What kind of partnership would you like to establish between your device and this computer want to synchronize data between my device and this computer keeping data such as e mail and calendar items up to date in both places C Guest partnership want to only copy and move information between my device a
53. sde p 3383S eydiy NON sde a3exs eyd y NENA sde Z e3e3S eud y NENA dej 1 33835 eyd y 9J8 S 1 NeJ3 app 1 Len ppp Ill lio ap pp mem IL O O OO O O OO O O O O dl IL O O O O O O OO O O O O dl PAL e ab Z CO gt gt ab O O cc u e ab co c LL O y O M N ab O CO CE i O ika N Ea ab ab c E 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued EBEN 8 AU ft te I Ll eee IL ft te fet eee po fT ts ts jea eee Pp pr je ee CE CA See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal wud de N ulum i Keypad Maps Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps E E e N lt x N Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal li Default State Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued DL LLL EE UI III CT E fe 4 ii wl Uli m im oL pp po 1L T j lj Moe e oL LIIT LL o ese 1L Lol Ll opo o ee je
54. see Chapter12 Configuring the Mobile Computer for instructions on using TCM CO The sample application programs included in the 9000 Demo are provided for the purpose of demonstration and are to be used as is Although each program was thoroughly tested there always exists the possibility of coding errors The source code for each sample application is provided in the SMDK for eVC4 to allow a jump start into mobile application development In the unlikely event a coding error is found in one of the sample applications having access to the source code allows the customer to fix the error he following options are available via the demo program e est Apps Self Test tests the functionality of various features on the mobile computer e g display scanner touch panel etc Notify tests the green decode function shift control comm LEDs and beeper functionality Keyboard displays key codes when keys are pressed on the keypad Display shows examples of the shades monochrome displays and colors color displays displayed in the touch panel Memory sample memory usage and allocation MSR 9000 sample magnetic stripe reader application MSR Cameo sample magnetic stripe reader application Printing sample printing application e Scan sample scanning application for Visual C C e files sample file management utility e Sounds plays and tests wav files e mages sample image editor e Ctl Pa
55. stops even if the trigger is still held after a specified period of time Timed Hold trigger can be released but it remains active for the specified period of time and Trigger on off controlled by the trigger Aim Duration sets the duration in milliseconds 0 60 000 in increments of 100 for timed aim modes lap to select the duration Aim Mode sets the aiming mode to use Only None no aiming S ab slab aiming and Dot dot aiming are supported Beam Width sets the laser beam width Tap to toggle between Normal and Narrow Raster Mode is not supported Beam Timer sets the maximum amount of time that the laser remains on 0 60 000 in increments of 100 A value of 0 means infinite time out Control LED is not supported LED Level is not supported Class 1 Sup is not supported Redundancy sets the read direction for the bar code redundancy Tap to toggle between None and Bidirectional reads in both directions B 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e inear Sec sets the number of times a bar code is re read to confirm an accurate decode Tap to toggle between Short Redun two times redundancy based on redundancy flags and code length Short Codabar two times redundancy if short bar code or CODABAR All codes 2 two times redundancy for all bar codes Long 2 Short 3 two times redundancy for long bar codes three times for short bar codes and A codes 3 three times redundancy f
56. tap the question mark under to the writing area Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing such as the Notes program and the Notes tab in Calendar Contacts and Tasks you can use the stylus to write directly on the screen Operating 2 49 To write on the screen tap the Pen button to switch to writing mode Lines appear on the screen to guide you New Edit Tools Tap the Pen button and use the stylus like a pen Figure 2 26 Writing on the Screen some programs that accept writing do not have the Pen button Refer to the documentation for that program to find out how to switch to writing mode Converting Writing to Text To convert the writing to text tap Tools Recognize 2 50 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To convert certain words select them before tapping Recognize on the Tools menu or tap and hold the selected words then tap Recognize on the pop up menu If a word is not recognized it is left as writing Recognize Alternates Cut Copy Paste Clear M Meum E Select the text you want to convert and tap The writing is Recognize on the pop up menu turned into text Figure 2 27 Writing on the Screen If the conversion is incorrect select different words from a list of alternates or return to the original writing Tap and hold the incorrect word only On the pop up menu tap A ternates A list of alternate Operating 2 51 words a
57. the system prompts the user for username and password after the system is suspended and subsequently resumed If disabled the system prompts for a username and password only if the user s credentials are not in the registry eo 1 22 Authentication EAP Mode Authentication Encryption IP col gt Ej Figure 5 5 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab LEAP 5 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 5 4 Authentication Tab Fields LEAP LEAP select this option to enable LEAP authentication LEAP is founded on mutual see Figure 5 5 authentication The AP and the mobile computer attempting to connect to it require authentication before access to the network is permitted 4 1 22 Authentication TES Install View Certificates Mode Authentication Encryption 1P col gt Ej Figure 5 6 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab EAP TLS Spectrum24 Configuration 5 11 9 Network Ped LET Authentication EAP Install View Certificates Made Authentication Encryption IP Col gt E PEAP Authentication Figure 5 7 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab PEAP Table 5 5 Authentication Tab Fields EAP TLS and PEAP EAP TLS EAP TLS is an authentication scheme through IEEE 802 1x It authenticates users and see Figure 5 6 ensures only valid users can connect to the network It also restricts unauthorized us
58. to the Windows or other volatile partition during a cold boot During a cold boot CopyFiles looks for files with a CPY extension in the root of the Platform and Application FFS partitions Platform first and then Application These files are text files containing the source and destination for the desired files to be copied separated by gt The following example from the file application cpy is contained on the demo application partition included in the DCP for MC9000w It can also be obtained from the symbol web site at http devzone symbol com Files are copied to the Windows folder from the Flash File System using copy files cpy in the following order Wlatform Application Example Application scansamp2 exe gt Windows Scansamp2 exe This line directs CopyFiles to copy the Scansamp2 exe application from the Application folder to the Windows folder Non FFS Partitions Non FFS Partitions include additional software and data pre loaded on the mobile computer that can be upgraded Unlike FFS Partitions these partitions are not visible when the operating system is running They also contain system information Non FFS partitions include the following e Windows CE The complete Windows CE operating system is stored on Flash devices If necessary the entire OS image may be downloaded to the mobile computer using files provided by Symbol The current OS partition on the mobile computer is included as part of the TCM instal
59. 0 1 About Backlight Certificates Use eConnect for Docking Events When Docked Th Launch ActiveSync 9 Establish TCP IP Connection Clock eConnect Memory O Launch Application amp 0 Power Regional Remove Settings Programs ES lth Personal System Serial Port Baud Rate LIEB bd C Query cradle for DNS domain Bypass RF connection if present Figure 4 13 Settings Windows 10 Confirm that the Serial Port Baud Rate value is set to USB If it is not set to USB then use the drop down menu and tap USB 11 Tap ok to exit the Settings eConnect window and tap X to exit the Settings window Host Computer Configuration The host computer must be setup with the appropriate communication software and connection settings Follow the steps below using Microsoft ActiveSync software on both the mobile computer and the host computer To configure the host computer 1 Download and install ActiveSync See nstalling ActiveSync on page 4 3 2 Configure the connection settings The host computer must be configured for TCP IP network communications a Click the ActiveSync icon b Click on File Connection settings c Inthe Connection settings dialog box select the A low Network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer option Other options may be selected for example Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port 3 Click OK 4 16 MC9000 G w
60. 2 53 Selecting a iss aos etn Cr ER era a Rd A a 2 53 MAANA MS 2 54 Using My Text 2 55 Entering Information Using Keypads 2 55 Sibal Ann 2 56 Finding Information a 2 56 Ei AAA 2 57 A a GAGANA RERO oO eR KIA AKDA 2 57 yo o Wa NPA PAPA PAPAG 2 57 Amina Me AA AAA 2 58 Operational c TE 2 58 sal P n CR SIME D mr 2 58 scanning Considerations suunnan aaea aaaeeeaei 2 58 Operating 2 3 SL Bar DOOR AAA 2 59 SIMI DER Lavora sei odeb ure E E EMEU eens oes 2 61 Reading RFU ASA 2 61 OP eG DEDICAN EEE T di e Eb AA AA AA 2 62 Resetting the Mobile Computer 2 0000 RR 2 62 Fermi Wam BO oii eaae ex sae EIER CER ERE NU RE SUO I ic ae n e E CE RO OR E 2 62 EST A arrienda id aer trepa 2 63 2 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Introduction his chapter explains the physical buttons and controls on the mobile computer how to use the mobile computer including instructions for powering on and resetting the mobile computer using the stylus and a headset entering information and scanning Keypads The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular keypad configurations 28 key keypad 43 key keypad 53 key keypad 32 0 Emulator 5250 Emulator VT Emulator The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications see Keypads on page 10 7 for installation and removal procedures eu For detai
61. 3 File Demo Advanced Help Brightness Focus Exposure j AE Aim Gain Ab lamp E Figure C 5 Symbol Image Capture Capture Window 2 lap File Delete The Open window displays ie Symbol Image Cap e m2 12 13 Folder All Folders bd Type JPEG ipa E Image0007 mr Figure C 6 Symbol Image Capture Open Window 3 From the Folder drop down list select the folder that contains the image to delete 4 From the ype drop down list select the type of file to delete RFID Demo Program C 9 5 select the file to delete from the list The File Delete dialog displays File Delete Are YOU sure you want to delete the file dy Documents mage0007 jpg E Figure C 7 Symbol Image Capture File Delete Dialog 6 Tap Yes to delete the file Exiting Imager lap File Exitto exit the Imager sample application Demo Menu Tap the Demo menu to select an image capture option Simple Scan or Capture Simple The Simple image capture option provides a basic image capture method for acquiring images or scanning Tap Demo Simple to display the Simple window Ea Symbol Image Cap 4r ASE e File Demo Advanced Help Figure C 8 Symbol Image Capture Simple Window C 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To acquire an image JE CO Tap or press the trigger to enable the imager The imager is enabled when a video image appears on the mobile co
62. 3 2 Settings System Tab Table 3 2 lists the applications available in the System tab Table 3 2 System Tab Applications Customize when and for how long the backlight should stay on See Backlight on page 3 30 for more information View and modify digital certificates which are used by some applications for establishing trust for secure communications See Certificates on page 3 34 for more information Change date time and time zone information See Clock on page 3 36 for more information 3 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 3 2 System Tab Applications Continued KA Adjust the contrast on the display monochrome displays only See Contrast Monochrome d P Devices Only on page 3 40 for more information Contrast Adjust the allocation of storage and program memory See Memory on page 3 41 for more information View battery status and change power management options See Power on page 3 44 for more information Turn the power on and off for the 802 11b and Bluetooth radios where applicable See Radio Power on page 3 48 for more information View Bluetooth version information where applicable See Bluetooth Versions on page 3 49 for Radio Power more information Change how numbers currencies dates and times are displayed See Regional Settings on page 3 50 for more information Regional Settings Remove loaded programs from RAM See Remove Programs on
63. 3 5 for backlight settings 3 Tap ok Table 3 5 External Power Backlight Settings Status Conditions of light On Off Default Cold Boot On External Select the Turn off backlight if device is not used for Check Box is not selected Power check box to turn off the backlight after a certain Default time is one minute period of time has passed unused Period of time can be selected from the list Available timings are 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 7 min 8 min 9 min and 10 min Select the Turn on backlight when a button is Check Box is selected pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn on the backlight when a key is pressed or the screen is tapped Settings 3 33 Brightness To set the screen s brightness level 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Backlight icon Brightness tab 9 settings e 4 10 06 Backlight Brightness level Select one relevent level Turn off backlight 2 Bright Battery Power External Power Power Brightness Adjust power settings to conserve power E Figure 3 25 Backlight Window Brightness Tab 2 Select the Turn off backlight check box to cancel the touch screen s backlight feature Or Use the stylus to drag the brightness control to the desired brightness level 3 lapok When you perform a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the default settings The settings are maintained after a warm boot 3 34
64. 5 17 Table 5 6 Encryption Tab Fields Continued emm emp select WEP for the adapter to use the WEP keys for encryption The window displays several radio buttons and edit buttons to configure the WEP keys Select 40 bit or 128 bit key lengths 128 bit is the default WEP keys are manually entered in the edit boxes Only the required number of edit boxes for a key length is displayed 10 Hex digit value for 40 bit keys 26 Hex digit values for 128 bit keys Use the Key radio buttons to configure the four WEP keys The adapter uses the selected key Tap ResetKeys to set the encryption key to the default values Note The default Hex digit keys are visible any time they are used As a security precaution after setting the key values for the network the digits are replaced with asterisks within the Encryption key fields If the associated access point is using an optional Passkey the active adapter WLAN profile is required to use one as well The Passkey is a plain text representation of the WEP keys displayed in the Encryption property window The Passkey provides an easy way to enter WEP key data without having to remember the entire 40 bit 10 character or 128 bit 26 character Hex digit string Tap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 4 to 32 character string to be used as the WEP algorithm Click OK The access point transforms the Passkey string into a set of four WEP keys using MD5 algorithms and di
65. ASAP 2 Blo BF UZ Tap to highlight selected text pee eat Ta Pen Space Tap to select formatting options such button button as pen weight and line color Figure 9 17 Writing on the Screen in Pocket Word If you cross three ruled lines in a single stylus stroke the writing becomes a drawing and can be edited and manipulated as described in the following section Written words are converted to graphics metafiles when a Pocket Word document is converted to a Word document on the host computer Drawing Mode In drawing mode use the stylus to draw on the screen Gridlines appear as a guide When you lift the stylus after the first stroke a drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing Every subsequent 9 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG stroke within or touching the drawing box becomes part of the drawing For more information see Drawing on the Screen on page 2 53 select Shape on the pop up menu to convert objects to proper shapes Resize an object by dragging the selection handles PALI 4B Messe see EBT Tap to select formatting options such as line weight fill color and line color Tap an arrow to see choices Pen button Figure 9 18 Drawing on the Screen in Pocket Word Recording Mode In recording mode you may embed a recording into the document Recordings are saved as wav files For more information see Recording a Message on page 2 54 For
66. Accessories Contents B 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Ii era Raed A eos GERI IPAE ERE PELA EK UY EDS BEA Kh ET ITE REA B 15 hic c MERETUR TTE TET B 15 A AAA Od WOR EE edd eG AA bakes B 17 PUBL IAA nade eee RA ee ne eRe een E ER EXPIRES ER B 18 e ad cog hain wha bad he S ee woe ne be og wee ede bra dh ct EET B 18 Mut B 19 Ki AA PP AA eS ere ee O ee er ree B 19 Battery 0 ene e ees B 20 ded oats Sa kaso TORTE B 21 DIO SON IAA anew e E B 22 NA A MERECE B 22 PO AAA B 23 Pe EEE BKA NAA et KUA MAA MI ae WEL bees yin seed EA B 24 CU 65 4 ha we AA Se EORR CoD do EI ERROR EO B 25 Ma I AA PA APAN AA B 26 Audio Settings B 27 see GP AA B 28 at BR AA AA ANO PA B 29 lico AAA B 30 EIS ans obec CA APA ee NAWA oe ok ee oe Oe es ee es B 31 HL Lo eee ook ou SN A B 31 Re ee vee ev ewe AS B 33 p MCP w B 33 ju A B 34 Demo Program B 3 Introduction The 9000 Demo program illustrates how to use some of the mobile computer s many applications If the demo program is not already running on the mobile computer it can be launched from the Application folder Start Programs File Explorer Application folder The demo program files reside in the Application partition on the mobile computer If this partition was not loaded to the device it can be obtained from the Symbol Web site and loaded using TCM
67. Block Recognizer A 3 Introduction Using the Block Recognizer you can write characters directly on the mobile computer screen with the stylus These characters are translated into typed text Use Block Recognizer to enter text for example to write a note or to fill in fields in a dialog box Figure A 2 provides examples of how to write characters in lowercase The Block Recognizer input panel is divided into two writing areas Letters written in the left area labeled abc create lowercase letters Use the right area labeled 123 for writing numbers symbols special characters and punctuation The block recognizer supports the graffiti method of entering text New Edit Tools d Figure A 1 Using Block Recognizer A 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG The following chart illustrates some of the characters you can write the dot on each character is the starting point for writing Letter rea Humber Punctuation Area g ud d d H 5 9 O NE E NN L LI L LI LII te LT I gg Jl Iry ze A RI EL 1 ndi E is pem DATE le c dE RE Si 83 jv SA on rw Pelo EA LL a jc AC 63 LL LLL AL AR space back space Figure A 2 Character Chart For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer with Block Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area 10
68. Figure 6 2 Connectivity Dialog Box 2 Tap Turn on flight mode to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter off 6 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Mode tab 2 Select the On radio button or the Discoverable radio button to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter on e n On mode the mobile computer is connectable allowing it to locate and connect to bonded Bluetooth devices within range 30 feet 10 meters In this mode the mobile computer can detect other devices without allowing other devices to detect the mobile computer e n Discoverable mode the mobile computer can be seen and connected to by other devices allowing all Bluetooth devices within range 30 feet 10 meters to detect the mobile computer and attempt to beam information to it and or establish a bond In this mode other Bluetooth devices can detect the mobile computer whether or not a bond was created however in order to receive a beam form another device it must be accepted on the mobile computer Or 1 Tap on the navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the Connectivity dialog box gt aff 11 15 Turn off fight mode Tap to turn Bluetooth on and off 1233456 PC connection Settings Figure 6 3 Connectivity Dialog Box 2 Tap Turn off flight mode to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter on Bluetooth Wireless Technolo
69. Firmware Version 3 91 58 Hardware Version 3 0 Country USA Current Status Profile Mame 123456 E55 ID 123456 Encryption Mode WEP Authentication None Performance Best Signal Info IP Status Ping APs E Figure 5 20 Mobile Companion Info Tab eo The Version and Current Status information on this window may differ from the actual screen on the mobile computer 5 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 5 10 Info Fields en Version Information Displays Mobile Companion software driver firmware and hardware versions as well as country information This data is consistent for the mobile computer regardless of which mobile computer profile is the current profile Current Status Displays the mobile computer s current Profile Name ESSID and Encryption mode Mobile computer performance is displayed using a verbal indicator of signal strength Mobile computer operating information differs depending on which profile was enabled as the current profile 3 Select the P Status tab to view the mobile computer s network address information Unlike the P Config tab in Finding WLANS the P Status tab is view only with no user configurable data fields IP Tvpe IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway DAS WINS MAC Address Hast Name Signal info IP Status Ping aes E Figure 5 21 Mobile Companion IP Status Tab Spectrum24 Configuration 5 25 Table 5 11
70. Here are a few tips to help you get the most of the battery e Use external power whenever possible especially when e Using the backlight e Connecting to a host computer e Using accessories e Set the mobile computer to turn off when idle While on battery power the mobile computer automatically turns off or suspends operation if you dont touch the keyboard or use the stylus for three minutes Maximize battery life by shortening this time e Turn off sounds you don t need By default the mobile computer produces sounds in response to a number of events such as warnings appointments and key presses To optimize battery life turn off any sounds you don t need See Sounds amp Notifications on page 3 23 for instructions When batteries are low a battery icon appears in the Navigation bar See Status Icons on page 2 35 for more information CO 3 48 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Radio Power Use the Radio Power window to turn the power on and off for the 802 11b Bluetooth and WWAN radios where applicable eo Available radio power options are based on the configuration of the mobile computer Any changes made in this window do NOT persist after a cold boot Changes do persist after a warm boot To turn radio power on and off 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab Radio Power icon q xs Radio Power Settings O 802 11b Radio Power On Unchecking this removes power From the ra
71. IP Status Fields e IP Type If DHCP was selected from the P Config tab leased IP address and network address data displays for the mobile computer If Static was selected the values displayed were input manually in the P Config tab on page 5 19 IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 727 oubnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 259 255 2550 Gateway The gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet e mail delivery Most Internet service requires DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web
72. Indicators To charge the mobile computer s battery through the CAM connect the power supply to the CAM see Figure 10 19 on page 10 28 then attach the CAM to the mobile computer The mobile computer begins charging automatically Batteries must be charged within the 32 to 104 F 0 to 440 C ambient temperature range eu The mobile computer s amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the status of the battery charging in the mobile computer See Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charging status indications The battery usually charges in less than four hours if the mobile computer is not in use Serial USB Connection The CAM can connect to and communicate with a serial USB device such as a printer or host computer through its serial port See Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 for the host computer communication setup procedure To connect the CAM to a serial USB device connect one end of the serial device cable into the serial port on the CAM and the other end into the serial USB port on the device 10 29 10 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter This section describes how to use the UBC adapter to charge a spare battery The UBC can be used with a power supply as a standalone spare battery charger or it can be used with the four station UBC2000 to provide charging to simultaneously charge up to four spare
73. MO PRE IA 9 21 POP UP MENUS 2 44 12 71 2s bane PT 5 5 5 39 power button 1 12 2 31 power management 3 44 power saving mode BODEN LL Leu ene pude PAA KANG dens 5 21 manual ae ene NEA TUER 5 21 Power Saving Modes mm powermode esos heed E printer Cable 1 6 10 6 Index profile Create NEW 5 31 delete 5 31 edit occ 5 31 PU GN E BG cache ER ER DAC Nus OU profile roaming oooooo 9229 profiles WL BUE AREA HAHAA T pat ea eats 5 5 programming an RFID tag C 40 programs flash file system 12 28 E A Ea e A 3 3 A 2 43 stop running programs 3 43 0 quick release holster 1 6 R radio link rate 5 43 radio power P LER PS PT 3 48 radio signal transmission strength m radio transmission power 5 20 rapid deployment client 8 3 v me 8 3 Reader A eee eee ae eee NANG 9 32 reading RFID TAGS IAA 2 61 C 34 recording 0e 2 54 3 14 recording settings d14 regional settings 3 50 currency TP tataa TOT 3 5 DAS e ITWA UKA 3 52 A Amare D UME II
74. Mail Sweden Support se symbol com If you purchased your Symbol product from a Symbol Business Partner contact that Business Partner for service For the latest version of this guide go to http www symbol com manuals xxviii MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents 1 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG AO Ts and BOB ua aoc sede ide Sd VE e RE EREREA ERE TEE EERERIPRREAX R EG AES DER dia oy vomeEPFSTeU APR A DE CHO EP EE Configuring the Mobile Computer RR RRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRRII Getting Started 1 3 Introduction This chapter lists the accessories for the mobile computer and explains how to install and charge the batteries replace the strap and start the mobile computer for the first time Indicator LED Bar Touch Screen Microphone Keypad Headphone Jack Exit Window Scan Button Power Trigger strap stylus Figure 1 1 MC9000 G 1 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Figure 1 2 MC906R G RFID Getting Started 1 5 Unpacking the Mobile Computer Carefully remove all protective material from around the mobile computer and save the shipping container for later storage and shipping Verify that you received all equipment listed below mobile computer lithium ion battery strap attached to the mobile computer stylus in the strap stylus silo Regulatory Guide Quick Start Guide pos
75. Mb Radio Using a Registry File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the mobile computer using registry reg files There are two registry files Spectrum24DS reg contains the global registry settings for Mobile Companion and S24Profiles reg contains the profile specific and operating registry settings for Mobile Companion A sample S24Profiles reg file is provided as part of the DCP for MC9000w Edit the file using a text editor Refer to notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified save this text file as S24Profiles reg Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the mobile computer Once this file is loaded onto the mobile computer these settings are restored after a cold boot Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry File Default settings for the Spectrum24 radio card can be set on the mobile computer using registry reg files There is one registry file FHDOTNET reg that contains the global registry settings profile specific and operating registry settings for Network Interface Card Task Tray Applet NICTT A sample FHDOTNET reg file is provided as part of the DCP for MC9000w Edit the file using a text editor Refer to notes in the sample file for the key information that can be modified oave this text file as FHDOTNET reg in order to override the existing reg file on the mobile computer Use ActiveSync to copy this file to the Platform folder on the m
76. Press and release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful image capture The captured image appears on the mobile computer s display until the mobile computer is enabled to capture another image or another image is opened from the Fi e menu 7 Tap File Save to save any edits made in this mode Otherwise image edits are discarded upon exit or when a new file is opened See Saving Captured Images Saving Captured Images The default location to save an acquired image is My Documents Acquired images are named ImageXXXX where XXXX a four digit number incremented sequentially The default file save path and file name can be changed in the Misc tab Advanced Settings Misc tab Acquired images can also be saved by selecting Save from the File menu and renamed using the File Explorer C 14 eMC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Advanced Menu Tap the Advanced menu to select image editing modes Settings Crop or Edit Settings Capabilities Tap Advanced Settings to display the Imager capabilities AcqCap ImgCap VFCap DevCap Version Misc Scan 1 and Scan 2 tabs On each of the eight tabs image capture options can be set Imager capabilities are used to set device information and status for using the Imager as well as to control device behavior Some capabilities are read only and cannot currently be changed However on each tab the following options can be set e fixed vers
77. Software for Pocket PCs PRG Setup Connecting to the Mobile Computer Phone cord Figure 10 25 Modem Module Connection Mobile Computer Do not connect the modem s 15 pin connector into a VGA port of a host JN computer CAUTION Using the Correct Telephone Line Type Use a standard analog phone line as in most households In an office use a line connected to a fax machine or modem In a hotel request a room with a standard phone line or data port If necessary check with the local phone company or administrator to make sure you are using the right type of line before sending data Accessories 10 35 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Male 15 pin connector one port Figure 10 26 Modem Module Connection Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Do not connect the modem s 15 pin connector into a VGA port of a host MN computer CAUTION co If using a phone connect the cord from the phone to the Phone port on the modem 10 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Modem LED Indicators 4p m WAWA Modem is not properly connected to the mobile computer modem is not receiving power Modem is connected to the mobile computer and is receiving power solid Amber Mobile computer is communicating with the host computer Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem eo To edit an existing modem connection using Manage existing connections see Changing the Initia
78. Symbol Device Configuration PackagesWIC9000wW1 0 ocripts used to Program FilesiSymbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000w v1 O TCM Scripts customize flash partitions Terminal Configuration Program Files symbol TCM Manager TCM Tools ex Keyboard Program Files Symbol Device Configurations package MC9000w v1 0 Tools kbtool remap if any start Menu Documents and Settings All Users Start Menu Programs Readme PRG TCM WEB Updates The SMDK for eVC4 SMDK for NET and DCP for MC9000w are available from the Symbol Developers Zone web site http devzone symbol com Installing Other Development Software Developing applications for the mobile computer may require installing other development software such as application development environments on the development PC Follow the installation instructions provided with this software Contents NTrANIIOCTIAN IUU Uv U TUT SN AVAST TF o3 oc on o3 o3 onn CH HAKA 3 Gy oA amp Gov cOa 3 03 c3 G2o0 0 03 a TO TSE HO 03 nc rr ce wwe NO Y j tA rtinn f 1 Il inc he Mobile JILI 122 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG IA TT 12 28 Apio A E a OR ERES DEG ed ERR Rd 12 28 HUE Be ARA DIRE bod by p Edel dol eh ek RR 12 29 bili TM Ere 12 30 Non FFS Partitions iilis RR RR ten eens 12 30 Downloading Partitions to the Mobile Computer 12
79. Tap Options to display the PC Synchronization Options window EO ActiveSync Er aff 2 34 ok PC Synchronization Options When cradled Enable PC sync using this connection LISB bd When syncing remotely a Maintain connection O Disconnect when done Figure 4 10 PC Synchronization Options Window 4 Select the Enable PC sync using this connection check box Select the connection e g serial COM port USB for synchronization from the drop down list The default connection for synchronization is USB 6 Select the Maintain connection radio button Communications 4 11 7 Tap ok to exit the PC Synchronization Options window and tap ok to exit the PC Synchronization window 8 Ensure that ActiveSync is installed on the host computer and a partnership was created See Installing ActiveSync on page 4 3 and Setting up a Partnership on page 4 5 Setting Up a Connection on the Host Computer 1 Select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync on the host computer if it is not already running The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears 4 Microsoft ActiveSync E ioj x File View Tools Help etails Explore Options 9 O Sync Stop Pocket PC2003 Hot connected Information Type Status G Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 11 ActiveSync Not Connected CO Every mobile computer should have a unique device name Never try to synchronize more than one mobile computer to the same name See Device ID o
80. Window 6 Ensure the Bluetooth AP is discoverable lap New The mobile computer searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them in the list ES Settings a m2 1 59 Select a Bluetooth device Searching complete 0002c7109edc Figure 6 43 Select Bluetooth Device Window Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 35 7 Inthe list select the appropriate Bluetooth AP and then tap Next PET PRU Enter Device Bluetooth PIN amp Enter 4 Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with 0002c71c9e4c The same PIN must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer to PIN requests PAN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w ejr t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Figure 6 44 Enter Bluetooth Device PIN Window 8 Inthe Device PIN text box enter the PIN between 1 and 16 characters the AP is set to and tap Next The mobile computer sends the PIN request to the AP 9 Inthe Name text box edit the name of the AP if desired 10 Tap Finish 11 In the My Connections list tap the phone and then Next er aff 12 33 AP via BLuetooth de Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line or credit card Po IF you travel ar change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p CaPla sjd fjojh j k 1
81. activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk 2 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 6 VT Emulator Descriptions Continued DN IN Executes a selected item or function The default behavior of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes ER a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications work properly RETURN create a registry file with the following entry HKEY LOCAL MACHINEYHARDWAREDEVICEMAPKEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps Co For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Keypad Special Functions The keypad special functions are color coded on the keypads For example on the 53 key keypad the display backlight icon is blue indicating that the blue function key must be selected first to access the displ
82. ae ed ree 2 59 companion programs A 2 59 Media A 9 31 scanning 2 59 8 5 MICTOSOTE BEBE iia 9 32 two dimentional bar codes 2 57 MSN Messenger 9 21 A 3 36 3 40 Pocket Excel 9 29 date setting 1 18 Pocket DUI sae paces dene Rd EUIS 9 21 DCP for MC9000w xxiv 1 6 5 45 11 3 vilem ciis EM BG 11 6 12 3 12 10 12 27 CUA AI ua argen aka ce E den 9 12 29 12 30 VETERI el qb Peak anes FA eai dowd 9 3 O EEEE C 26 EDDIE ssbb rox PAP MAP ES 2 29 default gateway 5 19 5 42 cs MM nm B 17 demo program conventions NON cc EE B 37 psum AA venceuns XXIII control panel B 19 SU IET AMAS 5 7 about LLL B 18 cradles audio settings B 27 four slot charge only 1 6 10 5 10 17 battery B 20 Iur SIBEEDBIUBE ia 10 14 Bluetooth settings B 22 four slot Ethernet USB 1 6 10 5 communication settings B 25 serial A EET E AA OA Mung 1 6 date and time nasa B 22 o gina ase sa swansea seie tes 10 5 main window B 17 SIBI SIO esca E E 10 11 10 35 persist B 19 LED AAA agas sa 10 13 10 20 power settings B 21 spare battery charger OTRO 10 18 printer settings B 24 po
83. and data rates of other networked clients within the Ad Hoc peer to peer network When in Ad Hoc operating mode the Peers tab view displays instead of the APs tab Spectrum24 Configuration 5 5 Table 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions Continued Description WLAN Profiles Displays the current profiles and allows the user to add edit and delete profiles See Changing Profiles on page 5 31 for more information Find WLANs Options Finding WLANs Displays a list of Spectrum24 networks APs and networked peers available to the mobile computer for association The networks are listed by their ESSID To the right of each network is a signal strength icon Networks with a signal strength of Good three green bars out of five or better should be considered for connection Tap a network and tap Connect to interoperate with the AP representing that network Once connected the Mode Authentication Encryption IP Config and Power tab views display the ESSID security settings network address information and power consumption level set for that network See Finding WLANs on page 5 5 for more information Displays settings for system sounds AP and mobile computer association capabilities profile roaming options as well as the password protecting the Mobile Companion utility See Setting Options on page 5 28 for more information A completed profile is a set of mobile computer configuration settings that can be used in d
84. and image capture 3 Tap Return To RFID Demo to return to the main RFID Tags window C 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents JUL n 2 2 x 0c c5 cr ocn on n n c3 c 503 Hr 03 3 3 3 3 83 3 3 3 3 3 9 9 3 A 3 3 B3 9 93 A B 3 3 33 93 HN HN 3 3 3 3 3 3 D 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Specifications D 3 Technical Specifications he following tables summarize the mobile computer s intended operating environment and general technical hardware specifications Table D 1 Environmental Parameters Operating Temperature MC9000 G Series MC906R G RFID color and monochrome units 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 450 C Note Batteries must be charged within the 32 to 104 F 0 to 440 C ambient temperature range otorage Temperature 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C color and monochrome units Electrostatic Discharge ESD 15 kVDC air 8 kVDC contact Drop to Concrete MC9000 G Series MC906R G RFID color and monochrome units 6 1 8 meters at 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C IP64 electronic enclosure Table D 2 Technical Hardware Specifications Dimensions MC9000 G Series 9 2 in Lx 3 6 in W x 7 6 in H 233 7 mm L x 91 4 mm W x 193 mm H MC906R G RFID 10 75 in L x 7 7 in H Maximum width antenna area 4 7 in Minimum width keyboard area 2 5 in 273 05 mm L x 195 58 mm H antenna area 119 38 mm W
85. ao Application C ConnMgr E GACLOG TXT amp C My Documents amp C Platform amp C profiles amp C Program Files Figure B 15 InkWiz Example Window Demo Program B 15 Sounds To access the Sounds demo tap the Sounds icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a sample audio application The toolbar on the bottom of the window allows the user to open play record and save sample wav files ES AudioSamp Exam r ff 12 15 XO Audio Status Audio Progress po Pia DL ka Figure B 16 AudioSamp Example Window Images To access the Images demo tap the mages icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a sample image application The toolbar on the bottom of the window allows the user to edit images ES ImageViewer EEE e se PE 2n Figure B 17 ImageViewer Example Window B 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table B 1 ImageViewer Toolbar Tap an arrow and drag stylus on image to accomplish the following e Up Arrow expands image from bottom to top or pans up based upon re scale or pan mode Down Arrow expands image from top to bottom or pans down based upon re scale or pan mode Left Arrow shrinks image from right to left or pans left based upon re scale or pan mode Right Arrow expands image from left to right or pans right based upon re scale or pan mode Tap an icon and use stylus to crop the image as follows 1 Fits image to screen maint
86. appt bone 2 35 SAUS ICONS A E E status Mobile Companion eese D 4 5 24 DE ea ios para 1 5 1 14 attaching 14 GUS Lea reser e kon E SU A m SUMAN arrest esas ee suspend na 1 8 2 31 6 4 symbol Mobility Developer Kit foreVC4 XXIv 1 6 11 3 11 4 B 30 symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET KKV 1 6 11 3 11 5 Symbol settings 9 9 3 55 symbol support Center o KK T task tray ICONS 4 cise caw riores rra 200 tasks application 9 10 summary screen 9 12 IN 11 IN 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG TCM TEA AAP PP AA 6 22 building hex image 12 3 12 11 12 12 VFCap C 4 DEB OD SUBIT raros rs 12 9 ESTIMEN ENIM OR C 20 defining properties 12 8 volume 2 30 error messages 12 22 UU ai resta Prod ka 3 23 hex image download 12 12 vt emulator keypad oooooooo 2 25 SAVING SCUDE econ RR 12 10 GN kaa KNYA ALAB GN BARANGKA YR ONSA 12 4 W technical specifications mobile computer D 3 technical specifications modem module D 8 nak bla Na A 3 36 3 40 AA aa a TG HU RNC EET TTE TE 3 36 3 40 a po ia Inc time setting 1 18 IA edi ii dius db nie TKIP NNNM Do aaa PA TK
87. bar code is decoded RFID MC906R G RFID Only While the trigger is pressed on MC906R G mobile computers with RFID technology the mobile computer interrogates all of the RFID tags within the radio frequency RF field of view The mobile computer captures data from each new tag found When the trigger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags In addition RFID tag data can be stored on the mobile computer Using the MC906R G RFID sample application tags that are read display in the main RFID Tags window see Figure C 24 on page C 35 Scanning Considerations Typically scanning is a simple matter of aim scan decode and a few quick trial efforts master It However two important considerations can be used to optimize any scanning performance Operating 2 59 e Range Any scanning device decodes well over a particular working range minimum and maximum distances from the bar code This range varies according to bar code density and scanning device optics scanning within range brings quick and constant decodes scanning too close or too far away prevents decodes Move the scanner closer and further away to find the right working range for the bar codes being scanned However the situation is complicated by the availability of various integrated scanning modules The best way to specify the appropriate working range per bar code density is through a chart called a decode zone for each scan module A decode zone simply p
88. beam select a device Infrared 3 OO02c7 icde4r amp Searching Align ports Tap to send Figure 6 22 Contacts Window Beam eo If the mobile computer is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the mobile computer In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on 9 On the Contacts window tap Tap to send to the Bluetooth device receiving the contact Tap Pending to cancel 6 The mobile computer processes and sends the file s Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 21 Sending a File 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device is set up to receive a file 2 Tap Start Programs File Explorer icon to search for a file to send 3 Tap and hold the file s to send In the pop up menu select Beam File ES File Explorer Padi PEST X H Business new Word file 17 2 01 APAR Cut Copy Rename Delete Send via E mail Beam File Figure 6 23 File Explorer Window 4 The mobile computer begins to search for Bluetooth devices within range e 6417 New Word file 1 psw To beam select a device A Infrared Align ports 3 Dnn2czicgedc Tap to send amp Searching Figure 6 24 File Window Beam 6 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG CO If the mobile computer is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in d
89. below e AC line cord country specific and power supply charges the mobile computer e Auto charge cable charges the mobile computer using a vehicle s cigarette lighter e DEX cable connects the mobile computer to a vending machine e Serial cable adds serial communication capabilities e USB cable adds USB communication capabilities e Printer cable adds printer communication capabilities Accessories 10 7 Keypads The mobile computer has interchangeable modular keypads The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications the mobile computer with the keypad detached Follow proper Electro Static Discharge ESD precautions to avoid damaging the MMC and SD card Proper CAUTION ESD precautions include but are not limited to working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer is on and do not operate Replacing the Keypad 1 Suspend the mobile computer 2 Remove the two keypad screws Slide the keypad down and lift up Screws Multi Media Card Holder Figure 10 1 Removing the Keypad Do not apply more than 4 in lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws CAUTION 10 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3 Replace the keypad and re attach using the two screws 4 Perform a cold boot PEO ucaddonaca
90. by the trigger e Aim Duration sets the duration in milliseconds 0 60 000 in increments of 100 for timed aim modes lap to select the duration e Aim Mode sets the aiming mode to use Only None no aiming and Aeticle reticle aiming are supported e Beam limer sets the maximum amount of time that the laser remains on 0 60 000 in increments of 100 A value of 0 means infinite time out Demo Program B 29 Pointer Timer is not supported Image Capture Timeout is not supported Image Compress Timeout is not supported Linear Sec sets the number of times a bar code is re read to confirm an accurate decode Tap to toggle between Short Redun two times redundancy based on redundancy flags and code length Short Codabar two times redundancy if short bar code or CODABAR All codes 2 two times redundancy for all bar codes Long 2 Short 3 two times redundancy for long bar codes three times for short bar codes and A codes 3 three times redundancy for all bar codes Focus Mode sets the focus mode to use Fixed mode is currently the only focus mode supported Focus Position sets the fixed focus position to use Tap to toggle between Far focus position is 9 inches and Near focus position is 5 inches Laser Scanner Parameters Reader Type displays the type of bar code reader used Imager type scan engine or laser type scan engine Aim Type sets the type of aiming to use Tap to toggle between Timed Release activation
91. data e og Onto turn on the log feature When this feature is turned on the display splits into two sections upper and lower The lower section displays all communication to the RFID radio module including tag data e Log Offto turn off the log feature Log Off is the default e og Fileto create and save a log file The log file is saved in the root directory on the mobile computer to a file named RXTXLog txt This file can be used to track errors reading RFID tags Reboot Tap File Rebootto issue a warm reboot command to the RFID radio module et Reboot only if the mobile computer fails to respond Exit lap File Exitto exit the RFID sample application Mode Menu Tap the Mode menu to use the Inventory method to read tags locate a tag program a tag or scan a bar code Mode menu options offer all of the operations available by tapping an icon on the main ags window menu bar Inventory Tap Mode Inventory to start reading tags using the nventory method Using this method the application performs as if the trigger is pulled lag read attempts continue until the nventory menu option is tapped again RFID Demo Program C 39 Locate Tag his option is used to find a specific tag 1 Tap in the main ags window or tap Mode Locate Tag ES cemini_Rrip e PG EE ok Enter TagID to find below or select tag from main page 64 bits or Tag ID 80 00 80 n4 23 23 84 33 96 bits Hex strin gi Reading
92. ee Misc 2 Tab PSU iia ade oe synchronizing with the Server Manual Synchronization AA Automatic Synchronization AirBEAM Staging Chapter 8 Rapid Deployment Client EE DOE x eink hh eke oe eek oe AUR Fete ERE een loe E Rapid Deployment Window a Scamming BB Barbade ocak oe aad doc HORE CR AOPROCUROUEER VER Ee e ON Chapter 9 Applications Intp AAA 9 3 E A 9 4 Creating Appointments 9 4 Using the Summary SB i a kaha KAKA KA e OD rai 9 6 Creating Meeting Reguests 9 6 E e 9 7 Using the Summary Screen 9 9 teen aes ee oe ea taa ET e CIPRO EE II RE 9 10 Using the Summary Screen IA eee 9 12 Vd ETT TERT TETTE aa 9 13 EA en ee et ee AAA ee ee eer eS eee ee ST Nds 9 15 synchronizing E mail Messages 9 15 Connecting Directly to an E mail Server 9 15 setting Up an E mail Service 9 16 Using the Message List 9 17 Creating E mail Messages 9 19 Managing E mail Messages and Folders 9 20 Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server 9 20 d dcmrlnpM
93. enable the imager The imager is enabled when a video image appears on the mobile computer s display 3 Aim the exit window at the image to capture 4 While the exit window is aimed at the image to capture adjust the Contrast by moving the slide bar with the stylus to lighten and darken the image to capture C 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 While the exit window is aimed at the image to capture tap and to zoom in and out on the image to capture 6 Press and release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful image capture The captured image appears on the mobile computer s display until the mobile computer is enabled to capture another image or another image is opened from the File menu Tap Reset to return settings to their default values t Tap File Save to save any edits made in this mode Otherwise image edits are discarded upon exit or when a new file is opened Help Menu Tap the Help menu to view hardware and software information and to set defaults About Tap Help Aboutto view software and hardware version information for the Imager sample application on the mobile computer 3 Gemini RFID ero s The Enterprise Mobility Company Version Copyright c 2003 2004 L Symbol Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Image APT Version MOD Layer Version POD Layer Version Hardware version JPEG Library Version Figure C 21 Sym
94. folder to the Windows directory correct A Hardware Error message Antenna malfunction or Reboot computer If problem persists contact the appears when attempting to disconnection symbol Support Center read or program an RFID tag Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued mum Gas Sm The mobile computer cannot read Tag is damaged Try another tag Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader User is too far from tag Move to within 10 feet or closer of tag based on tag type Note For a successful tag read the allowable read distance from the front of the mobile computers scan exit window to the tag is 2 ft 10 ft 061 m to 3 1 m oee Figure 2 36 on page 2 61 Reader is in a multi path Multi path is a radio phenomena caused by radio Interference zone waves reflecting from other surfaces such as concrete floors or metal shelving that causes interference when the reader is at certain distances from the tag Moving the reader up or down or moving closer or further from the tag eliminates this interference In general reader motion enhances tag reading abilities The mobile computer cannot Tag is damaged Try another tag RFID taas proram ags Tag type is not supported by Try an appropriate tag type reader Tag is locked Try another tag User is to far from tag Move to within two feet of tag based on tag type
95. host computer through its serial port See Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 for the host computer communication setup procedure To connect the MSR to a serial USB device connect one end of the serial device cable into the serial port on the MSR and the other end into the serial USB port on the device Using the MSR The MSR9000 sample application is designed to work with the MSR This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs see MSR 9000 on page B 10 The MSR does not need to be attached to the power supply to read magnetic stripes Co To use the MSR 1 Attach the MSR to the mobile computer see Attaching and Removing on page 10 22 2 Power on the mobile computer 3 Tap Start 9000 Demo Test Apps MSR 9000 or MSR Cameo to start the sample application Accessories 10 25 4 Swipe the magnetic stripe card through the MSR ensuring the magnetic stripe on the card faces the mobile computer The card may be swiped in either direction from left to right or from right to left For best results gently press down on the card while swiping to ensure contact with the bottom of the reader Figure 10 16 Magnetic Stripe Card Swiping 10 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Cable Adapter Module This section describes how to set up and use the snap on CAM with the mobile computer The CAM snaps on to the bottom of the mobile computer and can be easily remo
96. i used by the Image Capture driver This DLL provides JPEG JPEG Library Version TIFF lt BMP format conversion for imaging applications Misc Tap the Misc tab to define and or control where and how the image is saved File Name Prefix File Save Path My Documents Next File Sequence Debug Flag Figure C 16 Symbol Image Capture Misc Tab C 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 6 Misc Fields Pa i n Images are automatically saved on the device when they are acquired The default name assigned to each acquired image contains a prefix and suffix File Name Prefix The default File Name Prefix is the 5 character word mage The File Save Path is the location to save images when images are acquired The default location to save images on the File Save Path device in My Documents Images are automatically saved on the device when they are acquired The default name assigned to each image contains a prefix and suffix The Next File Sequence Number is a 4 digit suffix incremented sequentially that is added to the File Name Prefix Next File Sequence Image Used for debugging purposes Debugging features will be enabled by setting this flag to an appropriate value The current default value is 0 Debug Flag This feature is not currently supported RFID Demo Program C 27 Scan 1 Tap the Scan 1 tab to define the bar code types to support for scanning Bar cod
97. information about F6 F7 keys see the keypad s description table in Chapter Operating eu Keypad Maps E 49 Table E 7 3270 Key Functions Keyclicks On Off Quiet Mode On Off Mobile Computer Configuration Host Profiles Message Recall Free Cursor Mode Close Session Previous Session Next Session View Mode On Off Scroll Left Scroll Right Scroll Down Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt D gt Brightness color Contrast monochrome Func l Brightness color F 50 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 8 3270 Emulator Keys Table E 8 3270 Emulator Keys Continued Keypad Maps E 51 E 52 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 9 3270 Character Map COEN C o po laws p pee pee FO pee ECKEN b e DON CO EAN pole le pls pole a Keypad Maps E 53 Table E 9 3270 Character Map Continued COEN DN koa DON EI COM IN CON EN CON zi po loma CN NENC NN po lao Pie CON Po loma F 54 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 9 3270 Character Map Continued COEN ko eem C p o memo p pee KU sma pole pls C pole pole a PA le C Keypad Maps E 55 Table E 9 3270 Character Map Continued LN NN Rom Km AA IN moe F 56 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software f
98. information about using the Today screen Figure 1 11 Today Screen Setting Time and Date When the mobile computer is powered on for the first time and after a cold boot tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon to use the clock control panel applet to set the time zone time and date a Par HES Dok GMT 5 Eastern US YA 4 16 22 PM EE 5 16 2003 GMT Berlin Rome 10 10 22 PM EE 5 16 2003 mms Figure 1 12 Setting Time and Date Getting Started 1 19 o See Clock on page 3 36 for details about setting time and date Checking Battery Status To check whether the main battery or backup battery in the mobile computer is charged tap Start Settings System tab Power icon to display the Battery Status window 3 e 46435 Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining Backup battery Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 1 13 Battery Status Screen To save battery power set the mobile computer to turn off after a specified number of minutes See Power on page 3 44 to set power management options 1 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Configuring the Mobile Computer see the following chapters to configure the mobile computer To customize the mobile computer settings see Chapter 3 Settings To set up ActiveSync to synchronize the mobile computer with the host computer see Chap
99. it a new IP address Communications 4 17 To set the IP address 1 Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on the host computer 2 Click File Set IP Address of Unlisted Device The Set IP Address window appears Set IP Address Use this option to set the IF address of an unlisted device This can be used as follows The device must be on the local subnet Enter the MAC address of the device Enter the desired IP address to assign to the device Refresh the list when complete MAC Address Desired IP Address Cancel Figure 4 14 Set IP Address Window 3 Enter the appropriate MAC Address and IP address 4 Click OK 4 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Modifying Cradle Settings 1 Launch the MobileDox Cradle Manager on the host computer 2 Select the name of the cradle you want to configure from the list 3 Click Device Modify Settings 4 Use the General Settings tab to modify the identification settings of the cradle Status General Settings TCPAP Settings Port Settings m Identification Device Name Custom String r Security Require Admin Privileges to Modify Settings Figure 4 15 Cradle Settings Window General Settings Tab Table 4 1 Cradle Settings General Settings Fields es c NN Device Name Atext string used to describe the MobileDox device Any 15 character string may be entered Custom String A text string
100. keyboard area 63 5 mm W D 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table D 2 Technical Hardware Specifications Continued Weight including battery MC9000 G Series 27 oz 765 5 g MC906R G RFID 35 4 oz 1 003 6 g Display Transflective color TFI LCD 65K colors 240 W x 320 L QVGA size Monochrome TFI LCD 16 shades 240 W x 320 L QVGA size Touch Panel Polycarbonate analog resistive touch s Memory MC9000 G Series 64MB RAM 64MB ROM 128MB RAM 64MB ROM MC906R G RFID 64MB RAM 64MB ROM Interface RS 232 max 115 2 kbps min 1200 bps USB v1 1 Client Keypad Options 53 key standard Optional Keypads 28 key 43 key 3270 Emulator 5250 Emulator e VI Emulator Specifications D 5 Table D 2 Technical Hardware Specifications Continued Tag Type EPC Class 1 Tag read range Max 10 feet from front of scan exit window Min 2 feet Tag write range Max 2 feet from front of scan exit window Min 1 foot Scanning 1 D Decode Capability 1 D Laser Scan Engine Code 39 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar Code 11 Discrete 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 EAN 8 EAN 13 MSI UPCA UPCE UPC EAN supplementals Coupon Code Trioptic 39 Webcode D 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table D 2 Technical Hardware Specifications Continued Imaging Decode Capability 1 D 2 D Imager Engine Code 39 Code 128 Code 93 Codabar Code 11 Inter
101. laser beam This laser type Is a compact source of coherent light oee Liquid Crystal Display A semiconductor diode LED Light Emitting Diode used as an indicator often in digital displays The semiconductor uses applied voltage to produce light of a certain frequency determined by the semiconductor s particular chemical composition A display that uses liquid crystal sealed between two glass plates The crystals are excited by precise electrical charges causing them to reflect light outside according to their bias They use little electricity and react relatively quickly They require external light to reflect their information to the user See LED Spectrum249 devices like other Ethernet devices have unique hardware encoded MAC also called IEEE addresses MAC addresses determine the device sending or receiving data The MAC address is a 48 bit number written as six hexadecimal bytes separated by colons Mobile Computer 1 mil 2 1 thousandth of an inch A condition which occurs when the data output of a reader or interface controller does not agree with the data encoded within a bar code symbol In this text mobile computer refers to the Symbol Series 9000 wireless portable computer It can be set up to run as a stand alone device or it can be set up to communicate with a network using wireless radio technology Network Control Unit A non routable LAN protocol that is an extension to NetBIOS Used for IBM s O
102. lights to show the charge status See Table 1 1 for charging indications The main battery usually fully charges in less than four hours Table 1 1 Mobile Computer LED Charge Indicators wb im Off Mobile computer not in cradle CAM MSR mobile computer not placed correctly charger is not powered Fast Blinking Amber Error in charging check placement of the mobile computer Slow Blinking Amber Mobile computer is charging solid Amber Charging complete Note When the battery is initially inserted in the mobile computer the amber LED flashes once if the battery power is low or the battery is not fully inserted Charging Spare Batteries The mobile computer has three accessories that can be used to charge spare batteries e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle e Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 1 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG UBC Adapter To charge a spare battery ls Ensure the accessory used to charge the spare battery is connected to the appropriate power source see Chapter 10 Accessories for setup information Insert the spare battery into the accessory s spare battery charging slot with the charging contacts facing down over the charging pins and gently press down on the battery to ensure proper contact The battery starts to charge automatically The amber charge LED on the accessory lights to show the charge status See Chapter 10 Accessories for charging indications for t
103. lo lo E Figure C 19 Symbol Image Capture Crop Window 2 Press the trigger to enable the imager The imager is enabled when a video image appears on the mobile computer s display 3 Aim the exit window at the image to capture While the exit window is aimed at the image to capture use the stylus on the mobile computer s display to drag a rectangle to crop the image The image can also be cropped by entering numeric values in the boxes under Crop Rect X Y W H 5 While the exit window is aimed at the image to capture select a crop style from the Crop Style drop down list 6 Pressand release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful image capture RFID Demo Program C 29 The captured image appears on the mobile computer s display until the mobile computer is enabled to capture another image or another image is opened from the File menu Tap Reset to return settings to their default values Tap File Save to save any edits made in this mode Otherwise image edits are discarded upon exit or when a new file is opened CO Edit The Edit option allows images to be edited on the mobile computers display through the viewfinder prior to capturing an image Ensure the ViewFinder option is enabled in the VFCap tab Advanced Settings VFCap tab to allow the image to appear on the mobile computer s display To edit an image Figure C 20 Symbol Image Capture Edit Window 2 Pressthe trigger to
104. mobile computer can be configured for a wireless Ethernet connection 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Wireless Ethernet icon The Configure Network Adapters window appears T 3 settings e 42958 gt Configure Network Adapters My network card connects ko Tap an adapter to modify settings 802 116 Wireless LAN L2TP NDISWAN Miniport AsyncMac NDISWAN Miniport PPTP NDISwW AN Miniport Figure 3 53 Configure Network Adapters Window 2 n the My network card connects to drop down list select the appropriate connection 3 60 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3 Inthe lap an adapter to modify settings list select the adapter to modify The IP address window displays Ey settings e 421000 ok B2 11b Wireless LAN 8i Use server assigned IP address O Use specific IP address IP address Mot connected E Figure 3 54 Wireless Ethernet IP Address Window 4 nthe P address window select the appropriate radio button e to Use a server assigned IP address Or e to Use a specific IP address If Use a specific IP address is selected enter the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway as needed 5 Tap the Name Servers tab The Name Servers window appears Ey settings e 421000 ok L TP NDISW AN Miniport Mame server addresses may be automatically assigned if DHCP is enabled on this adapter atoms wins altwins IP Address Ma
105. of the display rectangle This is the rectangle in the window defined by the Window Handle where the viewfinder image is displayed If the current value is set to a value that is larger then the window the viewfinder is not visible The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Y Coordinate Specifies in pixels the Y coordinate of the display rectangle This is the rectangle in the window defined by the Window Handle where the viewfinder image will be displayed If the current value is set to a value that is larger then the window the viewfinder is not visible The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Width Specifies in pixels the width of the display rectangle This is the rectangle in the window defined by the Window Handle where the viewfinder image will be displayed If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses the full window width The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Height Specifies in pixels the height of the display rectangle This is the rectangle in the window defined by the Window Handle where the viewfinder image is displayed If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses the full window height The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 DevCap RFID Demo Program C 23 Tap the De
106. pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning Bits transmitted or received Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The pattern of 0 and 1 values within the byte determines its meaning See Bits Per Second On an addressable boundary eight adjacent binary digits 0 and 1 combined in a pattern to represent a specific character or numeric value Bits are numbered from the right 0 through 7 with bit 0 the low order bit One byte in memory is used to store one ASCII character A protocol for remote booting of diskless devices Assigns an IP address to a machine and may specify a boot file The client sends a bootp request as a broadcast to the bootp server port 67 and the bootp server responds using the bootp client port 68 The bootp server must have a table of all devices associated MAC addresses and IP addresses The process a computer goes through when it starts During boot up the computer can run self diagnostic tests and configure hardware and software Code Division Multiple Access is a cellular technology originally know as IS 95 Center for Devices and Radiological Health A federal agency responsible for regulating laser product safety This agency specifies various laser operation classes based on power output during operation This is the lowest power CDRH laser classification This class is considered intrin
107. phone lines and synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer Multimedia Card MMC Provides secondary non volatile storage single Slot Serial USB Cradle Charges the mobile computer main battery and a spare battery It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through either a serial or a USB connection software e Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for eMbedded Visual C v4 0 SMDK for eVC4 available at http www symbol com mc9000 g e Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET SMDK for NET available at http www symbol com mc9000 g e Device Configuration Package for MC9000w DCP for MC9000w available at http www symbol com mc9000 g Getting Started 1 7 Spare lithium ion battery Stylus performs pen functions Universal Battery Charger Adapter Adapts the UBC for use with the Series 9000 batteries Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide Use for wall mounting applications Getting Started In order to start using the mobile computer for the first time install the main battery charge the main battery and backup battery start the mobile computer configure the mobile computer The main battery can be charged before or after it is installed Use one of the spare battery chargers to charge the main battery out of the mobile computer or one of the cradles to charge the main battery installed in the mobile computer Installing and Removing the Main Battery Instal
108. replace the faulty battery During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer removed from cradle during communications Replace mobile computer in cradle and retransmit Incorrect cable configuration oee the System Administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 13 15 13 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Cable Adapter Module Table 13 7 Troubleshooting The Cable Adapter Module Symptom Possible Cause Action Mobile computer Mobile computer was removed Ensure CAM is receiving power Ensure mobile computer battery is not charging from CAM or CAM was unplugged is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging from AC power too soon under Start Settings System Power If a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully Detach and re attach the CAM to the mobile computer attached to the CAM ensuring it is firmly connected During data Mobile computer detached from Re attach mobile computer to CAM and retransmit com
109. retrieved from this directory during the package synchronization process The FIP user name that is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process Password The FIP password that corresponds to the FTP user specified in the User field The specified password is used during the login phase of the package synchronization process eo No inadvertent trailing spaces should be entered on the Server tab a Information entered in these fields are case and space sensitive AirBEAM Smart 7 7 Misc 1 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Server Misc 1 Misc 2 RAM Management Suppress Separator TFTP C WNMS WAL GM Auto load This drop down list is used to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client is to be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted The selections are Disable the AirBEAM Smart Client is not invoked automatically during the boot sequence Interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The Synchronization Dialog box appears and the user is required to press the OK button when the process is complete Non interactive the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically The Synchronization Dialog box is displayed but the user is not required to ta
110. scan button to acquire the image displayed Menus Use the menus to set options and save capture and view images File Use the File menu to save capture and view an image or exit the Imagersample application B 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Save As oave the currently loaded image file in bitmap file format To save an acquired image 1 Tap ImagerSample File Save As The Save Image file window appears ES ImagerSample gt aff 12 35 Marne SaveFilel Folder Mone Type LE 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T taPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F pad 1 Hi Ele Figure B 36 ImagerSample Save As Window 2 Enter the name of the image to save in the Name text box 3 Select the folder in which you want to save the image from the Fo der drop down list 4 he default type of file to save is bmp 5 select the location in which to save the file from the Location drop down list 6 Tap OK to save the image CO If no folder is selected the default folder to save acquired images is My Documents Capture When the window displays a real time video image tap File Captureto acquire the image displayed Viewer When the window displays a a recently captured image tap File Viewerto display a real time video Image Demo Program B 35 Exit Tap File Exitto exit the ImagerSample application Options Use the Options men
111. select the input method 3 Make any additional desired changes to the settings 4 Tap ok Settings 3 13 Word Completion To adjust how suggested words pop up in a window above the input panel 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Word Completion tab e 409 Suggested words pop up in a window above the input panel Tap to accept Suggest words when entering text Suggest after entering letters Suggest word s Add a space after suggested word Replace text as you type Input Method Word Completion Options _ IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen E Figure 3 6 Input Window Word Completion Tab 2 Make the desired changes to the settings 3 lapok 314 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Options To adjust the options for writing and recording 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Options tab e 42409 These options apply when writing or recording is supported Voice recording Format Default zoom level For writing Default zoom level For typing Capitalize First letter of sentence Scroll upon reaching the last line Input Method Word Completion Options IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen E Figure 3 7 Input Window Options tab 2 Make the desired changes to the settings 3 Tap ok Settings 3 15 Menus Use Menus window to change the items that appear in the Start menu
112. sites cannot be located or e mail delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations MAC Address An IEEE 48 bit address the mobile computer is assigned at the factory that uniquely identifies the adapter at the physical layer Displays the name of the mobile computer 5 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 1 Tap Renew to refresh the information displayed through a DHCP request within the P Status tab 2 Select the Ping tab to send and receive ICMP ping packets across the network to the specified IP address EJ Mobile Companion r f 1 41 m Start Test Size AP OO AD FB 42 64 C4 Test Statistics Total Tx 0 Total Rx O Retries O Avg Mbps O D 94 Signal Level RT Time ms 100 Min O Max O Avg O o i 2 55 1i Signal Info IF Status Ping APS E Figure 5 22 Mobile Companion Ping Tab Select or enter a target device IP address from the P drop down list select the size of the packet transmission from the Size drop down list Tap Start Test to begin the ping test Tap Stop Test to terminate the ping test The average mega bits per second signal strength data rate currently in use test statistics and round trip RT times are displayed for each test The associated AP MAC address is also displayed The signal
113. sounds 1 Tap Start Settings Personaltab Sounds amp Notifications icon Volume tab aia Sounds amp Notifications System volume Silent E AR Loud I 1 1 1 1 1 Enable sounds for Events warnings system events Programs Motifications alarms reminders Screen taps O Soft Loud Hardware buttons 3 Soft S Loud volume Notifications au E Figure 3 16 Sounds amp Notifications Window Volume Tab 2 Usethe slide bar to change the system volume 3 Select the desired Enable Sound options t Turning off sounds saves power and prolongs battery life 4 lap ok 3 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Notifications On the Notifications tab you can customize how you are notified about different events 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Sounds amp Notifications icon Notifications tab 9 settings et 4 an2 Sounds amp Notifications LI Pay sound Figure 3 17 Sounds amp Notifications Window Notifications Tab select the event name from the Select an event list drop down list oelect the Play sound check box to enable the sound notification oelect a sound from the drop down list Tap ok E m DS Settings 3 25 Today Use the Today window to customize the Today screen Appearance To change the appearance of the oday screen 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Today icon Appearance tab E settings e 42402 ok To c
114. standard 10Base T Ethernet cable e synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer With customized or third party software it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer with corporate databases e Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer Setup t The Ethernet cradle must be connected to a power source and to an Ethernet Hub when applicable e d Co pa va AC Line Cor Power Supply Figure 10 7 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Power Connection 10 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Battery Charging Indicators The mobile computer s amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the status of the battery charging in the mobile computer See Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charging status indications he battery usually charges in less than four hours Accessories 10 17 Four Slot Charge Only Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a Four Slot Charge Only cradle Figure 10 8 with the mobile computer 9 qee Power Port Figure 10 8 Four Slot Charge Only Cradle 10 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG The Four Slot Charge Only cradle has the following attributes e Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer e Simultaneously charges up to four batteries in the mobile computer Setup DC Cable AC Line Cord
115. strength level and the data transmission rate are displayed in real time bar graphs px UL ge O Spectrum24 Configuration 5 27 7 Select the APs tab to view APs with the same ESSID as the mobile computers profile T Mobile Companion e f 1 41 IT id II or iin known Access Points a O10 AD F8 42 62 14 Signal Info IP Status Ping 4Ps E Figure 5 23 Mobile Companion APs Tab The associated AP displays a radio wave radiating from its antenna to indicate its associated status Tapping on the icon displays a menu with Set Mandatory and Set Roaming options oelecting the Set Mandatory item prohibits the mobile computer from associating with a different AP The letter M displays on top of the icon when the Set Mandatory option is selected oelecting Set Roaming allows the mobile computer to roam to any AP with a better signal These settings are temporary and never saved to the registry Tap Refresh to update the list of the APs with the same ESSID A signal strength value of 32 Is the highest possible The APs tab only displays when Infrastructure is selected as the mobile computer operating mode from the Mode tab 5 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 8 If the mobile computer is in Ad Hoc mode select the Peers tab to display the BSSID or MAC addresses of the other mobile computers in the network their operating mode PSP or CAM their transmit rate their supported dat
116. tap the tabs to see each setting screen e 46409 ES e 46409 QD Suggested words pop up in a window above These options apply when writing or Input method the input panel Tap ta accept recording is supported C Large keys amA Suggest words when entering kext Voice recording Format a S Hayo ajr jal 8 000 Hz 8 Bit Mono 8 KB s Suggest after entering letter s I5 Use gestures For the Following keys and E SNNT EE Suggest words Default zoom level Far writing 200 7 Add a space after suggested word Default zoom level For typing 100 eb Space H Shift key P d 100 Replace text as you type Capitalize First letter of sentence Backspace ri Enter scroll upon reaching the last line Input Method Word Completion Options _ Input Method Word Completion Options Input Method Word Completion Options IF stylus taps became inaccurate align the IF stylus taps became inaccurate align the IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen touch screen touch screen E E Figure 2 21 Input Panel Options Using the Soft Keyboard To type with the Soft Keyboard 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Keyboard Operating 2 47 2 On the Soft Keyboard tap the keys with the stylus Tap here if this is the right word Figure 2 22 Soft Keyboard Using the Block Recognizer To use the Block Recognizer 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Bloc
117. technology inquiry when high rate 802 11b operation is required Discovering Bluetooth Device s Follow the steps below to discover and create bonds with other Bluetooth devices The mobile computer can receive information from discovered devices without creating a bond However once bonded an exchange of information between the mobile computer and a bonded device occurs automatically when the Bluetooth radio in turned on Bonding with Discovered Device s A bond is a relationship created between the mobile computer and another Bluetooth device in order to exchange information in a secure manner Creating a bond involves entering the same PIN on the 6 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG two devices to bond Once a bond is created and the Bluetooth radios are turned on the devices recognize the bond and are able to exchange information without re entering a PIN To bond with a discovered Bluetooth device 1 Ensure that the Bluetooth device being looked for is in discoverable mode 2 Ensure that the two devices are within 30 feet 10 meters of one another 3 Tap Start Settings Connections tab E settings PEE EX o 7 Beam Bluetooth Connections Br Wireless Ethernet Personal system Connections E Figure 6 4 Settings Window Connections Tab 4 Tap Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab Ei settings e 46156 Bluetooth To create a new bond tap Mew Tap and hol
118. the Modem Module Continued Symptom Dial out fails Possible Cause Location setting is incorrect Incorrect server phone number Pulse dialing not supported for country Dialtone detection not supported The following error message appears Trouble Connecting There is no answer at the number dialed Verify the phone The Connection Manager routes are Incorrect Action Verify Dialing Locations Verify Dialing Patterns are correct for the current location For example enter G in the For local calls dial field to dial directly or 9 G if the telephone system requires dialing 9 first to access an outside line Verify the connection phone number in the Connecting window Use a connection within a tone dialing system The service you subscribe to e g a remote answering service may use a different type of dialtone Disable dialtone detection on the modem by entering the initialization string ATXO in the Extra dial string modem commands text box of the Modem Settings window The modem may be required to be powered before opening the port for dial out Tap Start Settings System Symbol Settings Settings ExternalbVoltPower and select ActiveOn Warm boot the mobile computer and confirm the connection settings 13 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents A 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG
119. the Password until a Warm Boot 5 33 Prevent Password Lache uus qute qtia arde an 5 34 E A II EP 5 34 Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access 5 35 AEGIS Security Client 5 35 Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios 5 36 y PASO Ng PAA A 5 38 EN OS TB eer RIO ars EE PA APR 5 39 Ei Na LA MMC 5 4 WA WA r E 5 42 WLAN Adapter lab 5 43 Configuring the S24 DS 11 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 5 45 Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 5 45 Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology hinc ak AA APA MASALA UTANI SUA ZA KANA 6 3 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode OnandOff 6 3 Bluetooth Power States 6 4 RO reir ia ati pagans eee es 6 4 WarmbBoot 6 4 IM rr daria bo Ov bakes be T 6 4 ERO ou a ria Ao ria PR 6 4 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Off 6 5 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On 6 6 Adaptive Frequency HOpping 6 7 Discovering Bluetooth Device s a 6 7 Bonding with Discovered Devicefs 6 7 Renaming a Bonded Device
120. the screen The target will continue to move until the screen is aligned Figure 1 8 Align Screen To re calibrate the screen at anytime press FUNC Esc on the mobile computer to launch the calibration screen application eu Getting Started 1 17 2 Follow the directions on the screen which lead you through a simple exercise illustrating how to use the stylus and pop up menus pop up menus pop up menus Use pop up menus to reschedule Use pop up menus to reschedule the following appointment the following appointment You can use your stylus two ways Single tap Tap and hold Tap and hold the 9 A M dental Now tap and hold 11 A M and appointment and then tap Cut on then tap Paste on the pop up the pop up menu menu Copy Appointment Paste v Buy stamps O Call Andy A Reschedule dental anot Create Copy ES pe le Select All Cut Copy When you tap and hold an item Paste with your stylus a pop up menu containing a list of actions appears Figure 1 9 Using Pop up Menus Delete Delete 3 Use the drop down list to set your time zone and tap Next Select your time zone Time zone GMT 5 Eastern US GMT 5 Eastern US Figure 1 10 Setting Time Zone 4 Tap the Complete screen to complete the initial setup 1 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 The Today screen appears See Today Screen on page 2 33 for
121. the wall mount bracket for use with two single slot cradles or two four slot battery chargers 1 Placethe slide on the bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the left or right two screw holes on the bracket 2 secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slide s pan head screw holes Accessories 10 53 Pan head screw holes Insert screws from below Figure 10 42 Attaching Two Shelf Slides Four Slot Cradle To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with a four slot cradle 1 Place a slide on the left hand bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the left two screw holes on the bracket 2 secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slide s pan head screw holes 3 Place a slide on the right hand bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the right two screw holes on the bracket 4 Secure the second slide to the bracket as described in Step 2 Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket Install the cradle or charger onto the bracket inserting the brackets slide into the grooves on the bottom of the cradle charger and sliding the cradle charger into the desired position 10 54 MC9000 G with Windows
122. this determination is made the information content is decoded The dark element in a printed bar code symbol A pattern of variable width bars and spaces which represents numeric or alphanumeric data in machine readable form The general format of a bar code symbol consists of a leading margin start character data or message character check character if any stop character and trailing margin Within this framework each recognizable symbology uses its own unique format See Symbology The number of characters represented per unit of measurement e g characters per inch The dimension of a bar measured perpendicular to the bar width Thickness of a bar measured from the edge closest to the symbol start character to the trailing edge of the same bar A measure of the data flow or number of signaling events occurring per second When one bit is the standard event this is a measure of bits per second bps For example a baud rate of 50 means transmission of 50 bits of data per second GL 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG BIOS Bit Bits per Second bps Bit bps Byte BOOTP boot or boot up CDMA CDRH CDRH Class 1 Basic Input Output System A collection of ROM based code with a standard API used to interface with standard PC hardware Binary digit One bit is the basic unit of binary information Generally eight consecutive bits compose one byte of data The
123. to read tags C 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Reading Tags When the mobile computer s the trigger is pressed the mobile computer interrogates all of the tags within the radio frequency RF field of view For each new tag found the mobile computer beeps once and displays a tag icon in the main RFID ag window If the same tag is found again the mobile computer does not beep When the trigger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags The total number of unique tags found displays in the ag window To read tags 1 Tap Start 9000 Demo RFID icon 2 Ensure that the mobile computer is within the RF field of view 3 Setthe RFID signal power Use the Attenuation slide bar see Figure C 23 on page C 32 to set a value in a range between 0 full power and 255 low power Press the mobile computer s trigger 5 For each new tag found a beep sounds one time the Indicator LED flashes green and a tag icon displays in the ag window 6 Release the trigger Selecting Tags The ag window can display up to 20 tags If more than 20 tags are found the application allows the user to page forward and backward through the list of icons representing the tags found To select a tag to view the tag s data 1 Tap Start 9000 Demo RFID icon 2 Read a tag see Reading Tags 3 Selecta tag icon in the Jags window RFID Demo Program C 35 4 The data contained in the tag
124. uniform system packets broadcast by the AP to keep the network synchronized missed by the mobile computer The fewer the missed beacons the better the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized by an excess of missed AP beacons If the LED is Red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of missed beacons and improve the signal Spectrum24 Configuration 5 23 Table 5 9 Signal Fields Continued s Txmit Retries Transmit Displays the number of data packets retransmitted by the mobile computer The Retries fewer transmit retries the stronger the signal As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to reduce the amount of transmit retries and improve the signal Displays the Relative Signal Strength Indicator RSSI of the signal transmitted between the AP and mobile computer As long as the LED to the right of the graph is green the AP association is not jeopardized If the LED is red an association with a different AP could be warranted to improve the signal 2 Select the nfo tab to view the mobile computer s current software and driver revision data as well as the operating parameters of the current profile E Mobile Companion 4m m2 1 39 version Information Software Version 3 9 2 40 Driver Version 3 9 58 172
125. verify the telephone lines are functioning If the remote modem does not answer the call and emit answering tones contact the remote System Administrator Install a charged battery in the MC9000 or use an external DC power adapter to recharge the battery ActiveSync fails A partnership was not established with the host computer Establish a partnership with the host computer see Chapter 4 Communications Host computer is not selected in the ActiveSync window on the mobile computer select a host computer in the ActiveSync window and perform setup see Chapter 4 Communications Modem RAS connection not allowed by host computer Mobile computer or modem was disconnected from the telephone line while ActiveSync was in progress oynchronization occurred but the session is configured to close immediately after synchronization is complete Select RAS connection in the host computer File Connection Settings window Refer to the ReadMe files located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the host computer Disconnect the modem cable for 30 seconds to hang up the local telephone connection Close any open windows on the mobile computer and any modem connections Verify the setting of the When manually synchronizing disconnect when complete checkbox by tapping Start ActiveSync Tools Options Schedule tab Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 13 19 Table 13 9 Troubleshooting
126. 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja jV te Figure 6 17 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 6 Tap Finish 7 The bond is created and the mobile computer can now exchange information with the other device Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 17 Beaming Information The mobile computer can beam information such as an appointment in Calendar a task in Tasks a contact card in Contacts or a file in File Explorer To beam information to another device Sending an Appointment or Task 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device Is set up to receive an appointment or task 2 Tap Start Today to display the Today screen 3 Monday December 08 2003 FS Tap here to set owner information Figure 6 18 Today Screen 3 Onthe Today screen tap either an appointment or a task to beam 6 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 Tap and hold the appointment or task to send In the pop up menu select Beam Appointment Task ETE T E rg et 4290 35 KO Dec 08 03 sr wTFS Ha All Tasks Priority Tap here to add a new task MM Call John E reate Copy O 4 MEETING Delete Task Beam Task UR ive Calendar Copy Paste Delete Appointment Beam Appointment NG Tools BOS H New Tools Calendar Appointment Window Task Window Figure 6 19 Appointment Task Windows 5 he mobile computer begins to search for Bl
127. 0 34 Connections Window 3 If entering AT commands for an existing connection select Manage existing connections in the Connections window 10 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 On the Modem tab select the radio button of the item to edit and tap Edit To create a connection tap Mew Tap and hold an an existing connection For more options Figure 10 35 New Connection Window 5 Tap Next until the User Information Settings window appears 6 Tap Advanced 9 settings 47 mf2 1 05 My Connection User name Password If provided by ISP or network administrator 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tabjd w e r jt v u i jo b T LAP a s d f g h T k T Shift z x c v bjnim 7 Cajal jV derel Ej Figure 10 36 My Connection Window User Information Settings Accessories 10 43 7 Enter AT commands in the Extra dial string modem commands text box See Basic AT Command Syntax on page 10 43 E settings PP Advanced Baud rate 19200 bi Wait For dial tone before dialing wait Far credit card o SEC Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if not connected in sec 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tabu w e r t v uji jo D 1 ICAP a s d f ga h j k T shift z x cj v b n m Z cia i te gt Figure 10 37 Advanced Window Extra Dial String Modem Commands 8 lap ok to exit the Advanced window 9 Tap Finish Basic AT Co
128. 0 40 E LL oai dre deiade bs st radi dada dete a idi papi EE PE E ees 10 41 Changing the Initialization SING ca oct ces Ka ma iris red Rx ee 10 41 Basic AT Command Syntak 10 43 PINGS ASA 10 45 Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide 10 50 Installing the Wall Mount Ba 10 51 Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket 10 51 Accessories 10 3 One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger 10 51 Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers 10 52 FOE SO AS criteria trevi teens 10 53 Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket 10 53 10 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Accessories 10 5 Introduction series 9000 accessories provide a wide variety of product support capabilities Accessories include cradles keypads Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR and Cable Adapter Module CAM snap ons four slot spare battery charger headphone Multimedia Card MMC Secure Device SD card Universal Battery Charger UBC adapter wall mounting bracket and shelf slide Keypads Optional keypads include the interchangeable modular application specific keypads listed below The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized appli
129. 0 5 AT Command Table Continued Description Specific NO a PT Ona mn Da ncaa Ro CC DN MM NN ma OO OI CEC Baa A CO NN MS Modulation Selection MS lt carrier gt ws puma KAC 000000 0 om CS A om qm A wm fama wm fa om smn COA E AA 12000 9600 7200 4800 or 2400 NENNEN NENNEN MO Enable Disable Line Quality Monitor and Auto Retrain or Fall back Fall forward E lt value gt Disable line quality monitor and auto re train Enable line quality monitor and auto re train Enable line quality monitor and fallback fall forward default Accessories Table 10 5 AT Command Table Continued Country Description Specific BS CCITT or Bell B lt value gt wq oelect CCITT operation at 300 or 1200 bauds BEEN Oo a Selects Bell operation at 300 or 1200 bauds amp L Leased Line Operation amp L lt value gt ae Requests dial up operation Dial up operation continues Table 10 6 S Register T Ls e ICO RC x memes we as MAN E wm s lbas wm en NEL es x S6 Wai Time before Blind Wait Time before Blind Dialing or Dial Tone or Dial Tone 2 E E EL Time for ama 1 EARS Silence or Dial Tone EM Pause Time for Dial Delay Modifier 0 255 HEM NEN Lost Carrier to Hangup 1 255 0 18 Delay E 50 255 S RN Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent 10 47 10 48 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2
130. 0 emulator configuration is only used when the mobile computer IS running the 5250 emulation software When the mobile computer is not running the 5250 emulation software the 5250 keypad functions are the same as a 53 key keypad CU 2 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 5 5250 Emulator Descriptions WAA AA in WA Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the registry Create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKey Override dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Moves left and right from one item to another Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic
131. 00 01 27 IPL Version 01 09 a aff pasa Figure B 20 System Versions Window Demo Program B 19 n the System Versions window Platform indicates the operating system running on the mobile computer Pocket PC OS Version specifies the version of the operating system OEM Name is the OEM name of the mobile computer OEM Version indicates the build version of the operating system IPL Version identifies the build version of the system loader Unique Unit ID Tap Unique Unit ID on the Control Panel to view the mobile computer s unique unit ID a 16 byte hex number identifier and the version numbers for RCM Resource Coordinator Manager API Rescoord Resource Coordinator DLL UUID DLL and Temperature DLL eu 9 ctipanet Example 4 10 41 e Ecm2AP132 dll RCM CAPI Ver 01 01 Rescoord Yer 1300000 F53DOB 71 F8000050 BF7AGOE2 EP EXE Figure B 21 Unique Unit ID Window series 9000 mobile computers do not support the Temperature DLL Persist Persistallows changes made by the Control Pane to remain in effect after a cold boot When enabled Persist creates reg files which save specific settings that are made and restore the settings to the registry after a cold boot B 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Toggle Persistto Yes to retain these changes made after a cold boot System Versions Unique Unit ID Persist Battery Power Settings Date and T
132. 003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Test Mode Bit Mapped Options Status opeaker Results Bit Mapped Options RTS to CTS Delay 0 255 Table 10 6 S Register Settings Continued General Bit Mapped Options Status General Bit Mapped Options Status m Disconnect Inactivity Timer 0 255 NN FIERI ee i D ka Options Status P2 a Options Status General Bit Mapped Options Status V 24 Bit Mapped Options Status Delay to DTR off 0 255 at Flash Dial Modifier Time 0 255 Delay Before Forced Hangup 0 255 oo A a oe S40 General Bit Mapped 104 68h ji Options Status Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent Accessories Table 10 6 S Register Settings T RE Pie ee Options Status EN Ka ET KAB v5 3 d MA IC 95 wm dm IN IEC off ww Ws wm sm ft Register value may be stored in on of two user Country dependent Data Compression Control ke 10 49 10 50 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide This section describes how to install and set up the MC9000 Wall Mount Bracket and Shelf Slide to Wall Mounting Bracket shelf Slides Mounts one single slot cradle Figure 10 38 Wall Mounting Bracket with Shelf Slide When installed on a wall the mounting bracket and shelf slide enable mounting one or two single slot cradles to a wall Use two brackets to mount a four slot cradle F
133. 12 Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 13 14 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 13 14 Cable Adapter Module 13 16 Magnetic Stripe Reader 13 16 Modem Module 13 18 Appendix A Block Recognizer UU a apart Tex bad atar ea ede enn PEE del EUR EE A 3 Appendix B Demo Program bayi ak oe PARE DIE ee ee E B 3 fest BUDS P rrKrrc B 5 scio B 5 WA eee co bore oo ee nv on Co a a eave VE qd ioe ae dn B 6 WA AU NP B 7 BI nb IAA APA B 8 jj dead os odd ee KA ok oo ka B 9 MSR9O000 B 10 MSRCameo B 11 LLL ARA PAA KWA SUSAN UUME ee PA ee ee B 12 20 ENTRETIEN B 13 Scannind Data FIBRE ea nae ee On 09 dedito die Rr e de rend B 13 O ASA B 13 Contents xv XVI MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 1 TTE B 14 A B 15 Liga once hh E E E Ok ke AA PA B 15 UA B 17 About 12i und edhe bend Pins wade meng e Oe eee nG dp aco Kha B 18 System Versions 2 0 a B 18 Naa IA B 19 d an chan ibd on odo oe eee ee EE EA B 19 HIE cr oo be er varita ra ed etc LEE B 20 PO WE SCI ra ciar dro IA B 21 A
134. 1999 2003 Symbol Technologies A Figure B 39 About OTL Window B 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents C 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG DING a BAGA PG KAG BA C 28 SA PAA PAP APA PPT C 29 nd METTRE C 30 ROC pnt eine ero iia C 30 D hedge hes ces bea anh be PAA oy gee CURES D PP RIP ERES ER C 31 Ta IuT m C 32 Er TAA VAA UPEWE AAP PP PP C 32 amp MET TRECE C 34 o H E C 34 Gearing the ASAS C 35 S GG sd TF A A C 35 HIER IAA ER HRS Os eee AA C 36 Du a ae da Ade IA aa C 37 arriero C 37 A bud be xp mer erie C 38 5 AA APAPAP PAO PP TAE C 38 A C 38 E A C 38 E A POCHE AA C 39 o RH C 40 Scan Bar Code 1 cc RR RR RR RR C 41 RFID Demo Program C 3 Introduction The 9000 Demo program illustrates how to use some of the mobile computer s many applications In MC906R G RFID mobile computers the 9000 Demo program includes two additional sample applications an RFID sample application for reading tags using RFID technology and an expanded Imager sample application for image capture and scanning 1 D and 2 D bar codes with an integrated imager If the demo program is not already running on the mobile computer it can be launched from the Application folder Start Programs File Explorer Application folder The demo p
135. 31 AAA AA ee ee eens 12 31 Partition Update vs File Update 12 31 12 32 Upgrade EGON CIENTS kee nid act actuedodaek ud cie AA eda Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 3 Introduction Terminal Configuration Manager TCM is an application used to customize flash file system partitions for the mobile computer The most common use is to create an application partition hex file that contains the customer s application TCM can also be used to load hex files to the flash memory of the mobile computer The program resident on the mobile computer that receives the hex file and burns it to the flash memory is called Initial Program Loader IPL The customization of partitions is controlled by TCM scripts The scripts contain all of the necessary information for building an image The script is a list of copy commands specifying the files to copy from the development computer to the partition TCM works with a pair of directory windows one displaying the script and the other displaying the source files resident on the development computer Using standard windows drag and drop operations files can be added and deleted from the script window The DCP for MC9000w includes scripts used by Symbol Technologies to build the standard factory installed Platform and Application partitions provided on the mobile computer The standard Platform partition contains drivers while the Application partition contai
136. 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Certificates On the mobile computer you can add and delete public key certificates These certificates help establish your identity when you are logging onto a secured network such as a corporate network Certificates also help establish the identity of other computers such as servers with which you connect his helps prevent unauthorized users from accessing the mobile computer and information You can store two types of certificates on the mobile computer personal certificates that establish your identity and root certificates that establish the identity of servers with which you connect The mobile computer may include a set of pre installed certificates For information about viewing and deleting certificates see the sections below Personal 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab Certificates icon Personal tab 9 settings et d ai5 Manage Certificates Use personal certificates to positively identify yourself to others Figure 3 26 Certificates Window Personal Tab The list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date To view more information about a certificate select it from the list box To delete a certificate tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Delete Tap ok Settings 3 35 Root 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Certificates icon Root tab Use root certificates to positively identify root
137. 5 5250 Emulator Descriptions Continued O GN Enter Executes a selected item or function The default behavior of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications FIELD EXIT work properly create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer t For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 25 VI Emulator Keypad The VT emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 6 on page 2 26 for key and button descriptions and Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions e 0 PITO DEE Z elo 6 a Rh
138. 5 12 PEN art rd 5 12 manual power saving mode 5 21 mdd layer version C 25 MDM9000 1 6 10 5 A 9 31 MEMOTY AA E 3 41 IN reas verde arta ios 3 41 cnr eT es 3 4 es APA PNR APP pise 3 15 nn A PS 5 36 MicroAP Authentication Options 5 41 MICHOSON EDEN uius aua xe padded ws 9 32 missed beacons 5 22 A PG 1 6 10 5 10 9 mobile channels 9 37 Mobile Companion 5 3 mobile companion 5 4 MIE rr ciar ra 2 36 5 3 MA peana aria ua Ya 4 22 IN 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG mobile computer cold boot 12 29 sicuri eeo APA onan erre 3 5 Ethernet settings 3 59 PORE sr cnet eee 2 31 A 1 15 DIA 3 55 mobile computer configuration 1 7 mobile favorites 9 36 9 39 UA III ia 9 36 MobileDox ii 4 13 Mobility Services Platform Console xxii 8 3 i vo o 5 5 BIZ IT ESSID Liu essa suae cna 5 6 A care ane ee eee 5 7 ror PAA PP PA AA b li ee 5 A FIXIPSPZPRE KAKAI 5 profile name 5 6 AA 1 6 10 5 MSN Messenger 9 27 BEP 9444050405405 460006500 aeons xxii 8 3 Xii ERECTO RITE RE 1 6 10 6 10 21 battery charging
139. 6 47 AA 9 ET TO fp fw NENNEN fe pp CI ET m LL fw fa el To fe fw OR Ld CA CI FT fr fe CT R8 a S Ct a m CG NG AG KA e AF he Keypad Maps E 47 Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued pepe we ms Dem State Decimal Decimal RO pop v f2 pp pp fe fa See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys F 48 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3270 Emulator Configuration The 3270 emulator configuration contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The 3270 emulator configuration uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table E 6 for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions include e 32 0 key functions e 32 0 emulator keys e 32 0 character map a ODS D SO E DAO ALT a PM PAZ a C acads da _ERINP HO O O E Cr TAB DOWOW HG SOSH DO G0 CO QD e Gm OO C TOE D M E 7 mul Uu a x ima wi a IPO EL 0 A A Figure E 4 3270 Emulator Keypad For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API
140. 62 Rechargeable lithium ion battery Battery failed Replace battery If the mobile computer still does not did not charge operate try a warm boot then a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 Mobile computer removed Insert mobile computer in cradle and begin charging from cradle while battery was The lithium ion battery requires less than four hours charging to recharge fully Cannot see characters on display Mobile computer not powered Press the Power button on During data communication no Mobile computer removed Replace the mobile computer in the cradle or reattach data was transmitted or from cradle or unplugged from the Synchronization cable and re transmit transmitted data was host computer during incomplete communication Incorrect cable configuration See the System Administrator Communication software was Perform setup See Chapter 4 Communications for incorrectly installed or details configured No sound is audible Volume setting is low or Unit may be a beeper only unit or incorrect Config turned off Block is programmed into device Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 13 5 Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued ENL NENNEN e is AA Mobile computer turns itself off Tapping the window buttons or icons does not activate the corresponding feature A message appears stating that the mobile computer memory is full Mobile computer is inacti
141. ANG cca con token ee eed eg dar eoe RE le C ROC CX RA E 10 20 Magnetic Stripe Reader 10 21 Attaching and Removing o 10 22 eo ee rai Cad en ee ee KT E E PME 10 23 Battery Charging Indicators 10 24 Sem UD ee EIA Heme ra qo CRY REDE E ta aen 10 24 Long Io IE iratus aude s vod dedos Jod da 58 4194645559045 AA bol bb dk 10 24 Gable Adapter Modula CAP APAPAP O 10 26 Attaching and Removing a 10 27 A AA O 10 28 Batten Charging MOKAS aea ois od os bob CHER EK ee eva dsb eed Pek REA ERE 10 29 Serial USB Connection 10 29 Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter 00 ri iris nido 10 30 Inserting and Removing a Battery a 10 30 Sc 10 31 Battery Charging IS iuis aureae db des XP Gl Gub Redde E CER RUE ia e 10 31 Ee ra eF r E 10 33 BELL GA KANAN UNA Ae a oe dS ae Kha 10 34 Connecting to the Mobile Computer 10 34 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 10 35 Modem LED IndicatorS 10 36 Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem 10 36 OC Me MOREM ANA PAA APP AA 10 39 PIETA LOU TON pn pisa ee ox dd be UR e ER GA NAB Ce ER d c Ur dC OI ODA 10 40 o SA 1
142. CHE HER AP OP EGER eS 5 38 MicroAP Ta 5 39 Encryption Tab 2 cnt nett RR eel 5 4 PIN penis arcos AA 5 42 UE PR rdMDoMmM 5 43 Configuring the S24 DS 11 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 5 45 Configuring the S24 FH 2 Mb Radio Using a Registry File 5 45 Spectrum24 Configuration 5 3 Introduction Wireless LANs allow mobile computers to communicate wirelessly and to send captured data real time to a host device Before a mobile computer can be used on a Spectrum24 LAN your facility must be set up with the equipment required to run the wireless LAN and the mobile computer must be properly configured Refer to the documentation that came with your Access Points APs for Instructions on setting up the required hardware The mobile computer Network Adapter settings and Spectrum24 settings configure and monitor the wireless connection The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates mobile computer signal strength as follows Icon Status Excellent signal strength Very good signal strength Good signal strength Fair signal strength na a z P 1 J a Poor signal strength Out of network range not associated e 5 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Mobile Companion The Mobile Companion utility is used to configure the mobile c
143. COMM session was connection dropped After completing an RFCOMM The Microsoft Bluetooth stack holds a Either wait 10 seconds choose a different COM session with another Bluetooth baseband connection for ten seconds port number for the virtual COM port or modify device was unable to create after an application closes its session HKLMNsoftwareMicrosoftibluetoothN2capNdle a virtual COM port to connect and exits This was designed to allow Phys which defines the number of seconds to to another Bluetooth device for speedy connections to the same hold the connection device if other profiles were to connect Maintenance 8 Troubleshooting 13 11 Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Table 13 3 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Mobile computer charge Cradle is not receiving power Ensure the power supply is securely connected and indicator LED does not light receiving power Mobile computer is not seated Ensure the battery is properly installed in the mobile correctly in the cradle computer and re seat the mobile computer in the le The battery is not properly orate installed in the mobile computer The battery in the mobile Verify that other batteries charge properly If so computer is faulty replace the faulty battery Note The Four Slot Charge Only Cradle has no power indication Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Table 13 4 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Symptom Attempt by th
144. Check available disk space Target Disk Full Build process failed because TCM failed to add file to the image of a disk volume Remove some files or increase the disk size Hex file is READ ONLY The Hex image file to be created exists and is read only Delete the existing file or change its attribute Error opening the file xxx with TCM could not open file xxx with write access Check if file is in use write access Failure creating binary file TCM failed to open create an intermediate binary file Hex File To load is missing or In Load Terminal window the file selected to load has invalid status invalid Could not locate mobile computer While loading the Script Properties window T CM could not find the TCM ini section name in TCM ini file corresponding to the mobile computer type specified by the current opening script Either TCM ini or the script file is invalid Incorrect disk sizes in TCM ini file The total disk size specified in the script does not match the total disk size defined in the corresponding TCM ini section Check if the script is corrupt or the TCM ini has changed after the script was created INVALID DIRECTORY In Script Properties window the selected System File Path is not a valid directory Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 23 Table 12 3 TCM Error Messages Continued One of the disk sizes is one sector In Script Properties window one of the disks is too small one sector in size This may In size
145. Crop Style FRAME hd NG Start X Y Width m VF Origin X PY Width Height o je fp fe Figure C 13 Symbol Image Capture VFCap Tab C 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 3 VFCap Fields Ref pi ViewFinder 000 Enables and disables the viewfinder Indicates the current frame rate of the viewfinder in frames per second Framerate The allowed value is 0 and cannot be changed opecifies if the aspect ratio of the viewfinder image is forced to match that of the acquired image The aspect ratio of the viewfinder window is defined by VF Origin Width and Height The aspect ratio of the imaging device is defined by the Native Hes X and Y coordinates see DEVCap fields If Fix Aspect Ratio is enabled the acquired image is proportionally scaled so that it fits into the viewfinder window The viewfinder window is not completely filled with image data if the viewfinder window aspect ratio does not match the device aspect ratio If Fix Aspect Ratio is disabled the acquired image is scaled disproportionately if necessary to completely fill the viewfinder scale rectangle The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled or Fix Aspect Ratio Disabled opecifies how the cropped area is displayed The default value is FILL Allowed values are FILL DARKEN or FRAME FILL The viewfinder displays only the cropped region DARKEN The whole image is displayed and eve
146. F Manage Certificate m 2 12 Folder All Folders v Type Certificates cer Figure 5 12 EAP TLS PEAP Browse Server Certificate 9 Select All Files from the Type drop down list 10 In the list of certificates select tap the certificate to install Tapping a certificate to install displays the nstall Root Certificate window 11 On the Install Root Certificate window Figure 5 11 tap Install Certificate 12 Tap ok to exit Spectrum24 Configuration 5 15 13 To retrieve information about any installed certificate tap and hold a certificate in the list and select Details from the menu m gt Z E Manage Certificate 2 22 PB Ey Manage Certificate 42 23 QD E Manage Certificates j Client Existing certificates i EAP User j CN EAP User CN PNET EAP CA Friday March 26 2004 Saturday March 26 20 B Expanded Val Details Delete Tap and Hold xpanded Value Install new certificate 82 User client 43 Root server TLS only TLS and PEAP Figure 5 13 Certificates Details 14 To display expanded details about a particular field tap a field in the list Manage Certificate 4 2 23 o Client EAP User CN EAP User CN PNET EAP CA Friday March 26 2004 Saturday March 26 20 O 5ymbol Technologies Inc L Holtsville SSNY Figure 5 14 Expanded Details 15 Tap ok to exit 5 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocke
147. FH Tab Descriptions Mobile Unit The Mobile Unittab configures the mobile computer ESSID power management RTS threshold International Roaming capability and AP options see Mobile Unit Tab on page 5 38 MicroAP The MicroAP tab sets the mobile computer to operate as an AP and establishes a single cell wireless network see MicroAP Tab on page 5 39 Encryption The Encryption tab sets the WLAN adapter to make the wireless link less vulnerable to information theft see Encryption Tab on page 5 41 IP Config The P Config tab configures the mobile computer profile network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS see P Config Tab on page 5 42 Spectrum24 Configuration 5 37 Table 5 12 Spectrum24 FH Tab Descriptions Continued Tab Description WLAN Adapter The WLAN Adapter tab sets the hardware and radio settings The password protection feature is turned on and off from the WLAN Adapter tab see WLAN Adapter Tab on page 5 43 5 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Mobile Unit Tab Use the Mobile Unittab to configure the mobile computer ESSID power management RTS threshold International Roaming capability and AP options E Symbol Spectrum2 Yi 2 08 ok 802 11 Mobile Unit ekina RTS Threshold 1600 C International Roaming Power Management Power Made Beacon Algorithm Minimum Maximum Mobile Unit Encryption IP con 4 gt E Figure 5 29 Mo
148. GJ GJ QJ CO as HO E Co Y Figure 2 3 53 Key Keypad 2 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 3 53 Key Descriptions Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off O Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the registry Create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKey Override dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters SPACE BKSP Space and backspace functions Operating 2 15 Table 2 3 53 Key Descrip
149. Go Channels wf MSN Mobile Tap the favorite you i Pocket PC Web Guide want to view fF Pocket PC com E windowsMedia com Tap to add or delete a Open Add Delete folder or favorite link E Figure 9 27 Mobile Favorites The page downloaded during the last synchronization with the host computer displays If the page is not on the mobile computer the favorite is dimmed Synchronize with the host computer again to download the page to the mobile computer or connect to the Internet to view the page Browsing the Web 1 Connect to the ISP or network using a Spectrum24 connection see Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 21 2 Once connected go to a specific Web page in one of the following ways e lap Favorites then tap the favorite you want to view e nthe address bar at the top of the screen enter the Web address and tap the go button or tap the arrow to choose from previously entered addresses If you select Pocket Internet Explorer before setting up the network connections a screen may appear allowing you to proceed to the connection settings screen After you select the settings you return to Pocket Internet Explorer c To add a favorite link while using the mobile computer go to the Web page you want to add tap and hold on the page and tap Add to Favorites 9 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Pictures Use Pictures to vie
150. Hoc networks available to the mobile computer 3 Select the Disable Profile Roaming check box to configure the adapter WLAN profile not to roam to the next available WLAN profile when the mobile computer moves out of range of the current WLAN profile 4 Select the Enable Sounds check box to initiate an audible signal when performing a ping test and associating with an AP The tones are important to notify users if the pinging Is received or if the mobile computer has roamed to another AP 5 select the Enable Rogue AP Detection check box to inform the system of unauthorized APs on the network Symbol infrastructure is required CO Mobile Companion has a password protection feature When Mobile Companion initially appears the password is off by default 5 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 6 locreate a password for the first time change an existing password or delete a password tap Change Password ES Options Padi PAL ok Current Password Mew Password Confirm Mew Password E Figure 5 26 Mobile Companion Password Window a To create a password for the first time leave the Current Password text box empty and enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password text boxes Tap OK b To change an existing password enter the current password in the Current Password text box enter the new password in the New Password and Confirm New Password text boxes
151. IP WPA ooo coccion BR O ai ee Today screen 1 18 2 33 3 25 9 40 dea TONNES cra ha 423 es INED Steg ek beep testi eese Sedis 2 48 m protected access enterprise YA Mu 5 35 transmit retries 5 23 ee de troubleshooting WINS e 5 19 5 25 5 42 PINEDO COSO soja rice cs 13 9 ALEA CAM isse 13 16 a aa es bia four slot charge only cradle 13 11 wireless capabilities E 3 45 A o o 13 12 wireless EISE SUING inv aod dnd rates 3 99 four slot spare battery charger 13 14 wireless LAN Aa 4 22 MC9000 G Series non RFID 13 4 wireless network security LEAP 5 32 MC9OBR G RFID 13 4 13 6 WLAN adapter raras TR 9 3 e nd d 13 18 WLAN profiles 9 4 5 3 MSR lesse ip eN single slot serial USB cradle 13 14 Paa sinara eee oe word completion settings 3 13 writing ON screen 2 48 U VI SEUNG eau eser cerrar barda 3 14 UBG coso erro ra rad a ADR RR 10 30 A AA 1 7 10 5 unigueunitid B 19 universal battery charger 10 30 WII AA ade RE EXPE EY 1 5 UA AA AA 1 6 10 6 use video vf crop settings C 18 using headset 0 0 0 0 eee eee 2 32 DUDEN BAYAAN AA 1 12 V a P NG C 4 version Mobile Companion 5 4 5 24 Tell Us What You
152. ITIS ia venice s dO O e resaca Sl sound and notifications 3 6 symbol settings 3 9 3 55 wireless Ethernet 3 10 shared encryption key 5 41 si al cocostirarsiostelri pides I VE signal strength T 5 4 5 23 single slot serial USB cradle Presa 10 11 10 35 LED indicators PAA TOR 10 20 SMDK for eVC4 xiv 11 3 11 4 B 30 system requirements 11 3 SMDK for NET XXIV 6 11 3 11 5 i re 2 62 3 20 3 30 add 3 33 3 55 6 4 C 38 software version 927 sound WANA AG settings B 27 PP 9 6 5 29 spare batteries A A EE Seng uis A PF charging 111 Index spare battery charger 10 19 power connection 10 20 AA KG pAKNIA PAGA ICONS 2 36 5 3 opectrum24 FH passwolt iooiocccicr e e AA SONGS Lei sooo IA eR TRU ED splash screen 12 30 kill ANI EE start menu selecting programs Z2 43 start menu ae Te EMI starting the mobile computer 1 7 1 15 SIUC Vesna rr PLA 919 9 12 status icon WA IAA connectivity icons COMEC e ocean pa pka aed OO e mail 2239 instant MESSAGES WI multiple notifications 2 35 speaker ToC time and next
153. Item to create 3 Tap ok Settings 3 17 Owner Information Use the Owner Information window to enter information about the owner The information can be displayed when the mobile computer is turned on Identification To enter personal information 1 Tap Start Settings Personaltab Owner Information icon Identification tab 9 Settings et 4 a10 5 Owner Information B pi E Show information when device is turned on Identification Figure 3 10 Owner Information Window Identification Tab 2 Fill in or edit the data as desired 3 To have this information display when you start the mobile computer select the Show information when device is turned on check box 4 Tap ok 3 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Notes To add more information about the owner 1 Tap Start Settings Personaltab Owner Information icon Notes tab 9 Settings e PET ok Owner Information Don fae A information v id me fice is turned a Figure 3 11 Owner Information Window Notes Tab Enter information in the Notes box To have this information display when you start the mobile computer select the Show information when device is turned on check box 4 Tap ok Settings 3 19 After the information is entered and the Show information when device is turned on check boxes are selected the Welcome window appears whenever the mobile computer IS powered on lap the scre
154. K to close the message The mobile computer will obtain address information and communicate through the ethernet cradle 13 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Table 13 5 Troubleshooting The Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Symptom Possible Cause Action Batteries not charging Battery was removed from the charger or charger was unplugged from AC power too soon Ensure MSR is receiving power Ensure mobile computer is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power If a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Battery contacts not connected to charger Verify that the battery is seated in the battery well correctly with the contacts facing down Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Table 13 6 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Symptom Possible Cause Action LEDs do not light when mobile computer or spare battery IS inserted Cradle is not receiving power Mobile computer is not seated firmly in the cradle Ensure the power cable is connected securely to both the cradle and to AC power Remove and re insert the m
155. Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG For one single slot cradle four slot charger center it on the bracket x Slide grooves on bottom of cradle charger over bracket slide Figure 10 43 Attaching Two Shelf Slides For two single slot cradle four slot chargers slide one onto the left hand slide and one onto the right hand slide Insert set screws Figure 10 1 Attaching Two Shelf Slides For a four slot cradle slide the cradle on to the slides across both brackets Secure each cradle or charger to its slide using the two set screws provided Software Installation on Developmer Contents 11 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Software Installation on Development PC 11 3 Introduction To develop applications to run on the mobile computer one or more of the following is required e Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for Embedded Visual C 4 0 eVC4 e Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for NET e Device Configuration Package DCP for MC9000w The SMDK for eVC4 is a development tool used to create native C and C applications for all Symbol mobile computers running the Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system It includes documentation header files H and library files LIB for native code application development that targets Symbol value add APIs The SMDK for NET provides all of the tools necessary to
156. N s f e Figure 6 31 Enter Bluetooth Device PIN Window 14 In the Device PIN text box enter a PIN between 1 and 16 characters and tap Next The mobile computer sends the PIN request to the phone When prompted enter the same PIN on the phone Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 27 15 In the Name text box edit the name of the device requesting the bond if desired PET PETUTI Name the Bluetooth Device amp Enter a name For the bonded device Name BONDED 1 EM 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Figure 6 32 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 16 Tap Finish 17 Enter the dial up number exactly how it should be dialed Include the country and area code as required ES Settings qn a 3 34 ISP via Bluetooth Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line ar credit card Po IF you travel or change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y ul ij o p LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F ruj V te gt Figure 6 33 Enter Dial Up Number Window 6 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 18 Tap Next ES Settings Po af 4 46 My Connection User name Password Domain Figure 6 34 My Connection Window 19 In the User na
157. PO Om C 35 sa a bbl ne rr C 35 PD oa oe ops ony AA PAA C 36 PO cae ake oie bU CREEK PESE EE RES C 37 E e EEE ig ode ee RE oe n C 37 3 no C 38 TI oo eek oe oe hae Pe be Pe ee we ib ce C 38 bob PN RERO E T TT A C 38 kai IIIA rr os dia doin el C 38 E IE AA AR DIR PREISE PAS C 39 Program Tag C 40 Scan Bar CONG C 41 Appendix D Specifications Ese ios aack n ados Gea PEP C ROC ACD CR ERE D 3 A AA D 8 Mobile Computer Pin DUtS ooooocooococooooccoo RR D 9 Accessory CAM and MSR Pin Outs 0 0 0 0000 e eee eee D 10 Contents xvii XVIII MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Appendix E Keypad Maps Gira AAA prd d exa GN Vj ROI TTE T 28 Key Keypad Configuration 43 Key Keypad Configuration 53 Key Keypad Configuration 3270 Emulator Configuration 3290 Emulator LOTION es pama Ka Kh KAG AY KAG Ee GR DAG dde NON anG KG NAKABABA E doe ede s Glossary Index Contents xx MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Introduction This Product Reference Guide provides information about the MC9000 G mobile computer using the Microsoft
158. Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation Produces the number one in default state Produces an asterisk in Alpha state Operating 2 7 Table 2 1 28 Key Descriptions Continued es 00000 Alphanumeric GHI JKL MNO 4 5 6 SPACE BKSP Control LED Function blue DO In default state produces the numeric value on the key In Alpha state produces the lower case alphabetic characters on the key Each key press produces the next alphabetic character in sequence For example press and release the ALPHA key and then press the 4 key once to produce the letter g press and release the ALPHA key and then press the 4 key three times to produce the letter I When the SHIFT key is pressed in Alpha state the upper case alphabetic characters on the key are produced For example press and release the ALPHA key press and release the SHIFT key and then press the 4 key once to produce the letter G press and release the ALPHA key press and release the SHIFT key and then press the 4 k
159. S 2 based LAN Manager and Microsofts LAN Manager and Windows for Workgroups NetID Nominal Nominal Size Null Modem Cable NVM ODI Open Data Link Interface ODI Open System Authentication PAN Parameter Glossary GL 13 For mobile computers using Spectrum24 radios with the Spring protocol a NetID allows facilities to limit which Access Points a mobile computer can communicate with It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The mobile computer can only communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that have matching NetlDs Also see ESS ID The exact or ideal intended value for a specified parameter Tolerances are specified as positive and negative deviations from this value Standard size for a bar code symbol Most UPC EAN codes are used over a range of magnifications e g from 0 80 to 2 00 of nominal An RS 232 cable used to connect two personal computers together in close proximity for file transfer It attaches to the serial ports of both machines and simulates what would occur naturally if modems and the phone system were used It crosses the sending wire with the receiving wire Non Volatile Memory see Open Data Link Interface Novell s driver specification for an interface between network hardware and higher level protocols It supports multiple protocols on a single NIC Network Interface Controller It is capable of understanding and translating any network information or request sent by an
160. S le CEI AAA E ORELL CI CN CT Rp ho e CT S fes fp See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys F 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default VK Code ASCII Value State Decimal Decimal be m Dedicated to controlling volume level LL e Cannot be remapped Dedicated to controlling volume level AS AS FP CS CI a OS See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 41 Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default VK Code ASCII Value State E m See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued pepe we ms pem State Decimal Decimal e ep f6 fg V R 9 s CS Rb 4 pe i tf M Iw a hol ll i1 l Ph poo J 9 o ESOO o lago E JA A e ll fg A REEMNMNM ol FH Lo fm fg o P lto boo ll f8 p lll O IO O IS CO tal m See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Map
161. Start 9000 Demo Imager icon If the demo program Is not already running on the mobile computer it can be launched from the Application folder by tapping Start Programs File Explorer Application folder When the Imager sample application is launched the mobile computers display can vary When launched for the first time or after a soft reset the Scan window displays 3 Symbol Image Cap 47 12 08 e File Demo Advanced Help Return to RFID Demo E Figure C 2 Symbol Image Capture Scan Window File Menu Tap the File menu to open save or delete a file or exit the application C 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Opening a File Use the open option to open saved scanned data or a saved image file To open a file 1 Tap File Open to display the Open window Folder All Folders Type Text txt Help txt 6 28 6 13 Figure C 3 Symbol Image Capture Open Window 2 Locate the file to open by selecting a folder on the mobile computer from the Folder drop down list 3 Select the types of files to display e g Text BMP JPEG TIFF from the Type drop down list The default image file type displayed in the ype drop down list is set in the File Format field on the ImgCap tab Advanced Settings ImgCap tab See ImgCap on page C 16 Text files can only be opened in the Scan window Images can only be opened in the Capture window Co 4 Tap the appro
162. Table 3 1 Personal Tab Applications CA o o OO Customize Up Down key control See Buttons on page 3 11 for more information The Program El Buttons tab in this window is currently not supported Buttons Switch input methods and set input options See Input on page 3 12 for more information 3 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 3 1 Personal Tab Applications Continued KA Configure the items that appear in the Start menu See Menus on page 3 15 for more information Change owner s personal profiles See Owner Information on page 3 17 for more information Owner Information Change owner s password and set security options See Passwords on page 3 20 for more information Password Select the type of actions for which you want to hear sounds and customize how you are notified about different events See Sounds 8 Notifications on page 3 23 for more information Sounds amp Notifications Customize the information displayed on the Today screen See Today on page 3 25 for more information Settings 3 7 System Tab About Backlight Certificates Backlight O 5 amp O Clock Memory Contrast Memory i em 9 7 Radio Power Regional Remove Power Regional Remove Settings Programs Settings Programs ES Qf EN LL Screen Spectrum 4 Symbol Screen Spectrum 4 Symbol FH Settings Settings FH Settings Settings Personal System Color Display Monochrome Display Figure
163. Table 5 13 Mobile Unit Tab Fields Continued re Remi 0 Power Mode A Spectrum24 radio has two main power consumption modes Continuous Aware Mode CAM and Power Save Poll PSP mode Use the Power Mode drop down list to specify the power mode to be used by the radio CAM provides the best performance but uses the most power CAM is the preferred mode for devices running on AC power PSP saves significant amounts of power over CAM and is the preferred mode for devices running on battery power MicroAP Tab Use the MicroAP tab to configure the mobile computer to operate as an AP The MicroAP establishes a single cell wireless network for devices in mobile unit mode Each MicroAP requires a unique ESSID MicroAP cells can coexist as separate individual networks within the same site without interference The MicroAP does not roam but it does support roaming 5 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG The mobile computer in MicroAP mode operates in CAM and supports devices operating in both PSP and CAM The MicroAP supports up to 16 mobile computers ie Symbol Spectrum2 Yi 4 2 09 ok 802 11 Micro AP Settings Enable Micra AP 1 Megabit Base Rate 2 Megabit Base Rate Frequency Hop Settings Hop Set E wj T Hop Sequence 25 y om Delay B v Cancel Mobile Unit MicraAP Encryption IP Con 4 gt E Figure 5 30 MicroAP Tab Table 5 14 MicroAP Tab Fields reine Enable M
164. Tap OK c Delete the password in this case enter the current password in the Current Password edit box and leave the New Password and Confirm Password edit boxes empty eo Passwords are case sensitive and can not exceed 10 characters Spectrum24 Configuration 5 31 Changing Profiles select WLAN Profiles from the Mobile Companion menu to view connect to create and edit a profile A completed profile is a set of adapter configuration settings that can be used in different locations to connect to a wireless network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined operating parameters available for use in various network environments When the WLAN Profiles window initially appears existing profiles appear in the WLAN Profiles list box Figure 5 27 Mobile Companion WLAN Profiles oelect a profile from the list box and tap Connect to set that profile as the active profile Once selected the mobile computer is using the authentication encryption ESSID IP Config and power consumption settings initially configured for that profile Editing a Profile select a profile from the list box and tap Edit to display the Mode tab where the ESSID and operating mode can be changed for the profile Use the Encryption IP Config and Power tabs as necessary to edit the profile power consumption and security parameters Creating a New Profile Tap New to display the Modetab wherein the profile name and ESSID can be set Use the En
165. Think We d like to know what you think about this Manual Please take a moment to fill out this questionnaire and fax this form to 631 738 3318 or mail to symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza M S B 4 Holtsville NY 11742 1300 Attention Technical Publications Manager IMPORTANT If you need product support please call the appropriate customer support number provided Unfortunately we cannot provide customer support at the fax number above Manual Title please include revision level How familiar were you with this product before using this manual L Very familiar L Slightly familiar L Not at all familiar Did this manual meet your needs If not please explain What topics need to be added to the index if applicable What topics do you feel need to be better discussed Please be specific What can we do to further improve our manuals Thank you for your input We value your comments Symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www symbol com 72 65703 07 Revision A November 2004
166. This is the lowest power IEC laser classification Conformity is ensured through a software restriction of 120 seconds of laser operation within any 1000 second window and an automatic laser shutdown if the scanner s oscillating mirror fails see MAC Address A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no intercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded Input Output Control Internet Protocol Mobile computers with an integrated imager use digital camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code store the resulting image in memory and execute state of the art software decoding algorithms to extract the data from the image The space between two adjacent bar code characters in a discrete code A bar code in which characters are paired together using bars to represent the first character and the intervening spaces to represent the second A binary bar code symbology representing character pairs in groups of five bars and five interleaved spaces Interleaving provides for greater information density The location of wide elements bar spaces within each group determines which characters are encoded This continuous code type uses no int
167. View menu srwrrs5 amp Tap to go to today Lunch w adam Tap to display or edit the 12 00p 1 00p Corner cafe i p 1 00p Corner cafe appointment details Staff meeting 3 00p 4 00p New Tools HE E EHE E Tap to create a new appointment Figure 9 1 Calendar Application You can customize the Calendar display such as changing the first day of the week by tapping Tools Options Creating Appointments To create an appointment 1 Tap Start Calendar to open the application 2 If you are in Day or Week view tap the desired date and time for the appointment 3 lap New LU 2 Ol ue Applications 9 5 Tap to return to the calendar the appointment is saved automatically E Lalendar Subject Location Starts 8 26 02 12 00 PM Ends 8 26 02 1 00 PMI Type Mots Occurs ONCE Reminder Remind me 15 minuteis Categories No categories Appointment cw Tap to choose from predefined text Tap to choose from previously entered locations Tap to select a time Tap to select a date Notes is a good place for maps and directions Figure 9 2 Entering an Appointment Using the input panel enter the subject and a location Tap first to select the field If needed tap the date and time to change them Enter other desired information Hide the input panel to see all available fields To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more in
168. When the nitial Program Loader menu appears release scan button trigger and Power button Initial Program Loader Platform Application PRIMFIRM SECFIRM ESSID Config Block Windows CE Monitor Rom Files Splash Screen Power Micro Partition Table System Reset Auto Select Figure 12 7 Initial Program Loader IPL Menu eo The Rom Files menu option is for internal use only To insure a successful download do not remove power from the mobile JN computer while in IPL mode CAUTION 12 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 Choose Auto Select or use the up and down scroll buttons to select the partition to download then press Enter Table 12 2 IPL Menu Partitions Contains the files in the Platform folder Application Contains the files in the Application folder PRIMFIRM Contains the primary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card Note These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR radio They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the 24 FH radios SECFIRM Contains the secondary radio firmware for the Spectrum24 HR radio card Note These partitions must be loaded to use wireless downloads through IPL with the HR radio They are only used by IPL and are not required by the Operating System or the 24 FH radios ESSID Identifies the ESSID used for wireless downloads Note This partition specifies the ESSID to b
169. a rate and the length of time an adapter was out of the Ad Hoc network Tap Refresh to update the Peers tab to the latest Ad Hoc network performance and mobile computer membership data AF Mobile Companion r 2 2 10 known Peers Info 1P Status Status Peers E Figure 5 24 Mobile Companion Peers Tab Setting Options Select Options from the Mobile Companion menu to access AP and Ad Hoc networks disable profile roaming and enable system sounds M2 12 00 Optional Settings Access 4P networks Access Ad Hoc networks Disable Profile Roaming Enable Sounds Enable Rogue AP Detection Change Password Cancel E Figure 5 25 Mobile Companion Option Settings Spectrum24 Configuration 5 29 1 Select the Access AP networks check box to display available AP networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks see Finding WLANs on page 5 5 These are the APs available to the mobile computer profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks window to display the AP networks available to the mobile computer 2 Selectthe Access Ad Hoc networks check box to display available peer adapter networks and their signal strength within the Available WLAN Networks These are peer networks available to the mobile computer profile for association If this option was previously disabled refresh the Available WLAN Networks window to display the Ad
170. acter types including all uppercase letters numerals from 0 to 9 and 7 special characters 96 and space The code name is derived from the fact that 3 of 9 elements representing a character are wide while the remaining 6 are narrow An industrial symbology compatible with Code 39 but offering a full character ASCII set and a higher coding density than Code 39 Number of data characters in a bar code between the start and stop characters not including those characters A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all user stored records and entries Communication port ports are identified by number e g COM1 COM2 Continuous Code Cradle Data Communications Equipment DCE DCE DCP Dead Zone Decode Decode Algorithm Decryption Depth of Field Device Configuration Package DHCP GL 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG A bar code or symbol in which all spaces within the symbol are parts of characters There are no intercharacter gaps in a continuous code The absence of gaps allows for greater information density A cradle is used for charging the mobile computer battery and for communicating with a host computer and provides a storage place for the mobile computer when not in use A device such as a modem which is designed to attach directly to a DTE Data Terminal Equipment device oee Data Communications Equipment oee Device COnfiguration Package
171. age 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps F 19 Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued jewi99q anie OSV mE eunrseg epo3 YA o m uU E a E E sdej p 93215 eydiy HIS NON sde e 93215 eydiy uius NON sde Z 93215 eydiy uius NON dej 1 eyes eudiy uius NON sde y 93835 eydiy NON sde a3exs eyd y NON sde Z e3e3S eud y Py ty de E E 9J8 S 1 NeJ3 SE See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values F 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal wud de N ulum See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps E 21 euroeq anjey OSV NENNEN NN RENE ca 7T coma DI cama 7T 9J8 S 1 NeJ3 JN X Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued fo 77 x a we See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values E 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alp
172. ain original aspect ratio 2 Locates image to home position upper left 3 Re scales mode enable Tap to lock aspect ratio enable disable Tap to Open a jpg file Tap and drag stylus on image as follows 1 Fine panning mode enable 2 Coarse panning mode enable Tap to Save an image Demo Program B 17 Table B 1 ImageViewer Toolbar Continued Tap to open About ImageViewer Tap to Exit ImageViewer Ctl Panel To access the Control Panel demo tap the Ct Panel icon on the Series 9000 Demo window to access the Control Panel window where you can specify settings for the mobile computer ES CHPanel Example 4 9 01 e Control Panel Value 4 System Versions Unique Unit ID Persist Battery Power Settings Date and Time Touch Calibrate Printer Settings Comm Settings Display Settings Audio Settings Figure B 18 CtlPanel Window B 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG About Tap About on the Control Panel to view the version of the Control Panel ES CtPanel Example 4 2 3 29 ok CtlPanel Example CtlPanel Version 4 1 9 1 Copyright 1999 2003 Symbol Technologies Figure B 19 About Window System Versions Tap System Versions to view version information for the applications on the mobile computer ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 10 40 ES PocketPC OS Version 04 20 DEM Name SYMBOL TCSDOOK DEM Version
173. als off radio button 3 46 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Advanced You can select options for turning off the mobile computer to conserve battery power To conserve the most power select the option to turn off the device after 3 minutes or less To optimize display performance do not leave the display turned on to a fixed image for an extended period of time Turn the mobile computer off or use a screen saver when the mobile computer is not in use Use the mobile computer Power Settings to automatically turn off the display when the unit Is not in use or use a screen saver application eu 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab Power icon Advanced tab 9 settings et o4 436 D n battery power Turn aff device if mot used Far 3 minutes YA n external power Turn off device iF nat used Far 5 minutes Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 3 40 Power Window Advanced Tab Select On battery power Turn off device if not used for check box Select time value from the drop down list Select On external power Turn off device if not used for check box oelect time value from the drop down list Tap ok no RB WN Settings 3 47 Optimizing Battery Life You want the batteries to last as long as possible especially when you re on the road Under normal conditions you can get many hours of use from a single charge
174. am in a network without written permission from Symbol The user agrees to maintain Symbol s copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and to include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof oymbol reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design oymbol does not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any Symbol Technologies Inc intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in Symbol products Symbol opectrum One and Spectrum249 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc Bluetooth wireless technology is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Microsoft Windows and ActiveSync are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Other product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 http www symbol com Revision History Changes to th
175. amily and you have designated Family for synchronization the server creates a copy of the Family folder and copies the messages into that folder You can then read the messages while away from the host computer e f you use SMS messages are stored in the Inbox folder e f you use POP3 and you move e mail messages to a folder you created the link is broken between the messages on the mobile computer and their copies on the mail server The next time you connect the mail server notes the messages missing from the mobile computer Inbox and deletes them from the server This prevents you from having duplicate copies of a message but it also means that you no longer have access to messages moved to folders created from anywhere except the mobile computer e f you use IMAPA the folders you create and the e mail messages you move are mirrored on the server Therefore messages are available to you anytime you connect to the mail server whether it is from the mobile computer or host computer This synchronization of folders occurs whenever you connect to the mail server create new folders or rename delete folders when connected Applications 9 21 Pocket Word Pocket Word works with Microsoft Word on the host computer to give you access to copies of documents You can create new documents on the mobile computer or copy documents from the host computer to the mobile computer Synchronize documents between the host computer and the mobile com
176. an asterisk When the SHIFT key is pressed in function key state produces an asterisk In default state produces a zero In Alpha state produces a space Produces a pound number sign eo For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 9 43 Key Keypad The 43 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values and the alternate ALPHA key orange values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for key and button descriptions and able 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions Figure 2 2 43 Key Keypad 2 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 2 43 Key Descriptions Low Remi 0 Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the r
177. application The 9000 Demo program can be obtained from the Symbol Web site There are no Power Management APIs to call for the Bluetooth radio The Microsoft stack mode APIs cause the Bluetooth radio power state to directly correspond to the stack mode BthSet GetMode APIs cause the correct radio power state based on the stack s mode e g Mode Off Power Off The mobile computer s User Interfaces for stack mode control both stack state and power state see Power Window Wireless lab on page 3 45 Bluetooth Window Mode lab on page 6 5 and Connectivity Dialog Dox on page 6 5 A Bluetooth icon appears in the command bar at the bottom of the screen task tray to indicate that the Bluetooth radio is on The B uetooth icon disappears when the radio is off The Bluetooth icon is for display purposes only 6 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG BthGetMode should be monitored after resuming the mobile computer It can take approximately 30 seconds until the stack finishes initialization It is recommended that BthGetMode is checked before performing a Bluetooth related task to ensure that another process or application has not changed the Bluetooth mode ES Bluetooth Power States Cold Boot When a cold boot is performed on the mobile computer Bluetooth turns off after initialization which takes a few moments It is normal to see the B uetooth icon appear and disappear as well as a wait cursor when init
178. approximately 15 17 seconds As the unit cycles into a cold boot appears in the upper left corner of the display window followed by the message Booting System 4 Release the Power button 5 Asthe mobile computer initializes its system the Symbol splash window Figure 1 7 on page 1 15 appears for about 30 seconds Calibrate the screen See Calibrating the Screen on page 1 16to calibrate the mobile computer screen 2 64 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents 3 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG EOS HECHO SIRROTETET TORT 3 17 au Loo ire oe oe ac ee OR ado daba PAPA beads e dba d 26d Rad do PRAES dE neh 3 17 Lul a etapa ee 94 woe pa tai ra PP rra 3 18 co SA 3 20 PSA ascii tae ood dad era dd cia dede PA 3 20 LA PARA PAPA a ences ee da ese 3 22 Bonos SCIRE EA DID saa ce ee EE a RIO PE 3 23 AS 3 23 ROI recerca AA 3 24 o AA 3 25 PUN tan pt 99 ETT TETTE T ET TT aa ANNA 3 25 ITEMS cesses RR RR RR RR eee els 3 26 A IVA SUMU SELE WEO 3 27 OL AA AAA IN 3 27 Devica AAA 3 28 SS 3 29 IN rr rara rs ers pad a nea ra HA 3 30 o ae pho ay eho eh 0 ee bes GA 3 30 External Power a 3 32 o AA AA AA 3 33 DESAIN TEMERE EAN ee UCL E UNO TAE meee AREA 3 34 co AA 3 34 ricas da a ia ca baw oe ici ra ada PE 3 35 os P PH 3 36 jJ 3 36
179. are 0 100 opecifies the desired size for a JPEG image in Kilo bytes This capability is ignored if the current value is set to O JPEG File Size The default value is 0 Allowed values are 0 500 C 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 2 ImgCap Fields Continued mu Bem X Coordinate Specifies in pixels the X coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle that is used to crop the acquired Image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Y Coordinate Specifies in pixels the Y coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle that is used to crop the acquired Image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Width Specifies in pixels the width of the rectangle that is used to crop the acquired image If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses a width that encompasses the entire acquired image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Height Specifies in pixels the height of the rectangle that is used to crop the acquired image If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses a height that encompasses the entire acquired image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to Crop Settings or greater than 0 opecifies if the cropping defined for the viewfinder shoul
180. are battery not placed correctly cradle is not powered Fast Blinking Amber Error in charging check placement of spare battery Accessories 10 21 Table 10 2 Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators Continued Slow Blinking Amber spare battery is charging solid Amber Charging complete Magnetic Stripe Reader This section describes how to set up and use the snap on MSR with the mobile computer The MSR Snaps on to the bottom of the mobile computer and can be easily removed when not In use Latches Card Reader Slot Pogo Pin Pass through Connector Latch Grip Communications Port Power Port Figure 10 12 Magnetic Stripe Reader 10 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG When attached to the mobile computer the MSR has the following attributes e Provides power for operating the mobile computer with the appropriate power connection e Allows the mobile computer to capture data from magnetic stripe cards To download MSR data capture software visit http devzone symbol com e Provides serial connection through the serial pass through port for communication with a serial device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 e Provides USB connection through the USB pass through port for communication with a USB device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9
181. arged and is being trickle charged to bring the voltage up Yellow to the operating level After operating level voltage is achieved the battery charges normally Yellow Charging error check placement of mobile computer spare battery CHARGING Normal charge Accessories 10 33 Modem Module his section describes how to setup and use the MDM9000 Modem Module serial Port Phone Port Figure 10 24 Modem Module The Modem Module enables data communication between the mobile computer and a host computer remotely through the phone lines and synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer The following items are required for a modem connection Telephone number IP address and DNS WINS address information from the dial in server administrator Dial in account on the host system including a user ID and password RJ11 or RJ12 modem cable Functioning telephone Jack that supports plug in modems connected to the local telephone system setup of Country Codes to use the modem with the appropriate country s telephone network he following items are required for communication MC9000 G Series or MC906R G RFID mobile computer Cable Adapter Module CAM Symbol p n ADP9000 100 see Cable Adapter Module on page 10 26 serial Adapter Cable for communication via cradle Symbol p n 25 63856 01 Microsoft ActiveSync setup of host computer and mobile computer 10 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003
182. ate 5116 03 Long date Friday May 16 2003 Positive numbers 123 456 789 00 Negative numbers 123 456 789 00 Positive currency 123 456 783 00 Negative currency 123 456 789 00 Figure 3 43 Regional Settings Window Region Tab 2 From the drop down list select the country in which you are currently located 3 Select the Number tab Settings 3 51 e 46436 Regional Settings Decimal symbol Mo of decimal places Digit grouping symbol Mo of digits in group List separators Negative sign symbol Negative number Format Display leading zero Measurement system ate Gee roe ome Figure 3 44 Regional Settings Window Number Tab oelect the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab oelect the Currency tab EJ settings e 46437 Regional Settings Currency symbol Currency symbol position Decimal symbol No of decimal places Digit grouping symbol Mo of digits in group Negative number Format 1 1 hd x Universal currency symbol Figure 3 45 Regional Settings Window Currency Tab select the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Regional tab 3 52 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 7 8 d select the ime tab 9 Settings et 42437 Regional Settings Time sample 4 37 34 PM Time separato
183. automatically tries to connect whenever Pocket Internet Explorer Pocket Inbox or any other program that uses a dial up connection is used To dial automatically 1 Start the program that uses a dial up connection Enter a request for receiving and or transmitting information e g in Pocket Internet Explorer enter a new URL and tap Go The mobile computer automatically tries to connect eo If the phone number or dialing location is wrong tap Settings Tap Manage existing connections and edit the properties of the connection 2 Depending on the phone and connection settings entering a passkey and or a password may be required before the phone starts to dial 3 If the dial up password was not saved the Network Log On screen may appear Enter the Password and tap ok 4 When the mobile computer starts calling the call status can be seen on both the mobile computer and phone display After the mobile computer connects it receives transmits the information as requested e g Pocket Internet Explorer displays the requested web site Bluetooth LAN Access his section explains how to use dial up networking to access a Bluetooth enabled LAN access point AP for a network connection To use this method for LAN access ensure the Bluetooth AP supports communication as a Bluetooth dial up modem With this method of communication the Internet Explorer can be used to connect to the server The steps required to create a Bluetooth ena
184. ay backlight On the 43 key keypad the display backlight icon is white indicating that the display backlight is the default value for that key Operating 2 29 Mobile computers with color screens do not have contrast settings 28 Key Keystrokes Blue function key and Or Blue function key SHIFT and Blue function key and 0 Or Blue function key SHIFT and 0 Blue function key and 1 Or Blue function key SHIFT and 1 Blue function key and 4 Or Blue function key SHIFT and 4 Blue function key and 3 Or Blue function key SHIFT and 3 Table 2 7 Keypad Special Functions 43 Key Keystrokes Blue function key and F1 Blue function key and F5 Blue function key and F4 53 Key 3270 5250 VT Keystrokes Blue function key and Z Blue function key and X Blue function key and D Blue function key and Blue function key and H Special Function Turns on and off the display backlight Turns on and off the keypad backlight Monochrome units Increases display contrast Color units Increases display backlight intensity Monochrome units Decreases display contrast Color units Increases display backlight intensity Increases scan decode beeper volume 2 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 7 Keypad Special Functions 53 Key 3270 28 Key 43 Key 5250 VT Keystrokes Keystrokes Keystrokes Special Function Blue function ke
185. bar code symbols at hand Call the Support Center from a phone near the scanning equipment so that the service person can try to talk you through the problem If the equipment is found to be working properly and the problem is symbol readability the Support Center will request samples of bar codes for analysis at our plant If the problem cannot be solved over the phone you may need to return the equipment for servicing If that is necessary you will be given specific directions c oymbol Technologies is not responsible for any damages incurred during shipment if the approved shipping container is not used shipping the units improperly can possibly void the warranty If the original shipping container was not kept contact Symbol to have another sent to you XXV Symbol Support Center For service information warranty information or technical assistance contact or call the Symbol support Center in United States symbol Technologies Inc One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 1300 1 800 653 5350 United Kingdom symbol Technologies symbol Place Winnersh Triangle Berkshire RG41 5TP United Kingdom 0800 328 2424 Inside UK 44 118 945 7529 Outside UK Australia symbol Technologies Pty Ltd 432 St Kilda Road Melbourne Victoria 3004 1 800 672 906 Inside Australia 61 3 9866 6044 Outside Australia Denmark Danmark oymbol Technologies AS Dr Neergaardsvej 3 2970 Harsholm 7020 1718 Inside Denma
186. bile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 15 VT 220 Emulator Keys Continued Table E 16 VT HP Character Map CN a me ai e p Keypad Maps E 69 Table E 16 VT HP Character Map Continued NENNEN EENL NN O mae E 70 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 16 VI HP Character Map Continued me e mee o pee MD ls o jm E mem a CS CON EI Bo e plea mla Pls Pla pula pla NENL NN NENL NEN E E Keypad Maps E 71 Table E 16 VI HP Character Map Continued me e mee CON NN D 895 mme p lam Po NN s mee Ro lame Mo jams mw mea lt E 722 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 16 VI HP Character Map Continued me e mee EIN EI PON E Rm Ro e HO e CON GN C Mm le C pde Pla Re Keypad Maps E 73 Table E 16 VI HP Character Map Continued E NENE QE IN EIN E 74 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 802 11 802 11b ACK NAK A radio protocol that may be used by the Symbol opectrum24 radio card Symbol radio cards that use the 802 11 protocol also have an ESS ID ACK NAK is the default software handshaking GL 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Access Point AirBEAM Manager AirBEAM Smart Client AP API Access Point AP refers to Symbol s Spectrum24 Ethernet Access Point lt is a piece of c
187. bile Unit Tab Table 5 13 Mobile Unit Tab Fields ore TO tw Use the ESSID field to set the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is a 32 character string maximum address identifying the wireless LAN The ESSID assigned to the mobile computer is required to match the AP ESSID for the two devices to associate RTS Threshold Use the ATS Threshold drop down list to select the data transmission size at which the mobile computer alerts the AP with a Request To Send RTS signal prior to transmission Once the mobile computer receives a Clear To Send CTS signal from the AP the mobile computer transmits the data packet Establishing an RTS threshold in advance of sending large volumes of data helps ensure data transmission with little interference International Roaming Check the nternational Roaming check box to enable the mobile computer to associate with APs with different country codes Preferred BSS Use the Preferred BSS field to enter the IEEE MAC address of the AP where the mobile computer prefers to associate The mobile computer assigns a higher priority to this AP when transmitting over the network Mandatory BSS Use the Mandatory BSS field to enter the IEEE MAC address of the AP where the mobile computer is required to associate The mobile computer associates to only this AP when communicating on the network Enter an AP MAC address to associate to an AP that has a compatible ESSID Spectrum24 Configuration 5 39
188. bled LAN connection via APs are similar to creating a new dial up A valid telephone number and other advanced settings for the office network or ISP are not required Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 33 Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon The Connections window appears e 46442 QD Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPN server connection Set up mv proxv server E Figure 6 40 Connections Window 2 Onthe Tasks tab tap Add a new modem connection under My ISP The My Connection window appears ar PRERE My Connection de Enter a name For Ehe connection AP via Bluetooth Select a madem BluetoothDUN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjg h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Figure 6 41 My Connection Window 3 Inthe Enter a name for the connection text box enter a name such as AP wa Bluetooth 4 nthe Select a modem drop down list select BluetoothDUN 6 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 lap Next Ey settings et 2 12 23 My Connections gt Select a bonded Bluetooth phone ka use as a dialup modem Press Hew to bond with a new Bluetooth Device Mew Figure 6 42 New Dial Up
189. bo CSS CR ERES ERE VEECI PE B 22 A n AA SN B 22 ia AAA B 23 Prnter SERT Lu estas rar bd OLI est APP PAPA B 24 Communication Settings B 25 DAD ABB MA B 26 POI SUNOS ues iria rd RA Caw eh e Rd B 27 e AAP ea B 28 Symbol Security 0 0 0 a B 31 Lo od ut ob deena es bee nee ees tgs oe oe be anaes B 32 uq Q B 33 rei dr an od B 33 AA B 35 1 B 35 i145 gk ee ee ce ng be KIUKA i O PPT B 36 About Lo B 37 Introduction ooo C 3 Lo oorr es ph eh oe ee end EO ERE qud Ed C 4 E scot 95 08 oh tek ones ceases dud docile beens C 5 FileMenu C 5 Pr qai Meli NETTES TORTE iss TTE OO bare TT C 6 SQUE S TG ricino Hah NG KG Ab Keenan cs C 7 A MERERETUR C 8 DEED AP PN T EEE C 9 Wong ois co T C 9 zt pnr eis Seder ee PR TITRE C 9 co m C 11 fnit RENTRER TTE ETT NS C 12 Advanced pce ek chaos oh tend ERE dE CRITER EAR ED RERCEPC NR dees C 14 Settings Capabilities C 14 Hon ata C 28 f ope es Fs oe se adore EEE dene ay oe o es ad C 29 sali O AY E C 30 2r R TT C 30 D e MEME C 31 PHI errada EEPE diia ae ded ebd dd dri us C 32 launchingRFID C 32 PN INE AA C 34 o AS C 34 Glearing the Display
190. bol Image Capture About Window RFID Demo Program C 31 Set Defaults Tap Help Set Defaults to reset any settings back to their default values To set defaults 1 Tap Help Set Defaults Use Default Settings You will lose all setting changes Are you sure Figure C 22 Symbol Image Capture Set Defaults Message 2 Tap Yes to return all of the mobile computer s Imager settings to their default values See the capabilities description tables beginning on page C 15 for the default values assigned to capabilities fields eo All user changes are lost when defaults are reset C 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG RFID The RFID sample application in MC906R G RFID mobile computers with RFID technology provides the ability to perform a set of typical operations on RFID tags Tags can be programmed erased locked and killed In addition data can be collected by decoding in range EPC Class 1 RFID tags that beam back to the mobile computer the information they contain While the trigger is pressed the mobile computer interrogates all of the RFID tags within the radio frequency RF field of view The mobile computer captures data from each new tag found and displays a tag icon in the main ags window When the trigger is released the mobile computer stops interrogating tags The sample application supports the launching of an application that is capable of scanning bar codes or capturing image
191. bologies including the most popular linear postal PDFA17 and 2 D matrix code types e The ability to capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging applications e Advanced intuitive laser aiming for easy point and shoot operation The imager uses digital camera technology to take a digital picture of a bar code stores the resulting image in its memory and executes state of the art software decoding algorithms to extract the data from the image 2 58 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Aiming the Imager The mobile computer s integrated imager projects a laser aiming pattern shown below similar to those used on cameras The aiming pattern is used to position the bar code or object within the field of view F 7 ia JJ Figure 2 33 Laser Aiming Pattern Operational Modes Mobile computers with an integrated imager have two modes of operation Decode Mode and Image Capture Mode Both modes are activated by pulling the trigger Decode Mode In this mode upon pulling the trigger the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled or until a bar code is decoded Image Capture Mode In this default mode upon pulling the trigger the Imager attempts to locate and decode enabled bar codes within its field of view The Imager remains in this mode as long as the trigger is pulled or until a
192. built As part of the build TCM performs a check on the script which verifies that all files referenced in the script exist his check is important for previously created scripts to ensure that files referenced in the script are still in the designated locations To build scripts 1 Click Build on the TCM toolbar The Configure Build window appears Configure Build For MC9000w v1 0 64M Build Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages M C30000440 1 4Hex Images Browse Select Item To Build Build File Format w Partition T able parttbl hex i Compression ASCII Restricted Set Splash Screen Application ESSID Figure 12 5 Configure Build Window 2 Select the items partitions to build using the check box es to the left of each named partition 3 The Build Path defines where to store all built partitions Select hex image COMPRESSION to reduce the size and speed up the download 5 Click OK and follow the on screen instructions 12 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG If one of the partitions being built is the ESSID a prompt appears requesting the ESSID value Deselect the HR High Rate check box when building ESSID images for a device with an FH radio Build ESSID Partition Enter ESSID MESSID W HR oros Figure 12 6 Build ESSID Partition Window If one of the partitions being built is the Splash Screen a prompt appears requesting bot
193. canning bar code menus SDK Self Checking Code Shared Key SHIP SMDK Soft Reset Space Spectrum24 Spectrum One Specular Reflection Spread Spectrum Spring Radio Protocol Start Stop Character STEP Subnet GL 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG software Development Kit A symbology that uses a checking algorithm to detect encoding errors within the characters of a bar code symbol ohared Key authentication is an algorithm where both the AP and the MU share an authentication key oymbol Host Interface Program oymbol Mobility Developer Kit oee Warm Boot The lighter element of a bar code formed by the background between bars oymbol s frequency hopping spread spectrum cellular network oymbol s implementation of the Spread Spectrum wireless network utilizing direct sequencing The mirror like direct reflection of light from a surface which can cause difficulty decoding a bar code A technique for uniformly distributing the information content of a radio signal over a frequency range larger than normally required for robust transmission of data opreading the signal without adding additional information adds significant redundancy which allows the data to be recovered in the presence of strong interfering signals such as noise and jamming signals The primary advantage of spread spectrum technology is its ability to provide robust communications in the presence of in
194. cations e 20 key keypad e 43 key keypad e 53 key keypad e 32 0 Emulator keypad e 5250 Emulator keypad e VI Emulator keypad Cradles single Slot Serial USB cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and a spare battery It also synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through either a serial or a USB connection Four Slot Charge Only cradle charges the mobile computer main battery Four Slot Ethernet cradle charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection Miscellaneous Four Slot Spare Battery Charger charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries Headphone can be used in noisy environments Modem Module enables data communication between the mobile computer and a host computer remotely through the phone lines and synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer Multimedia Card MMC provides secondary non volatile storage An SD card may also be used UBC adapter adapts the UBC for use with the MC9000 batteries Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide can be used for wall mounting applications 10 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG nap on Modules e MSR snaps on to the mobile computer and adds magstripe read capabilities e CAM snaps on to the mobile computer and is used to connect cables to the mobile computer Both of the snap on modules use the cables listed
195. cause problem while building images especially when cushion is enabled Increase the disk size INVALID VOLUME NAME In Script Properties window one of the volume labels is not valid Corrupt TCM INI file Invalid The VolumeDivisor entry is missing or invalid in the TCM ini Reinstall TCM or recover value of VolumeDivisor TCM ini Invalid version of TCM script file The TCM script was not created by this version of TCM Corrupt or missing TCM ini file Or Corrupt or missing TCM ini file TCM ini file TCMeoudmotfinTOMimifile could not find TCM ini file FAILED CONNECTION TO COM While downloading images to mobile computer eee failed to connect to the selected PORT Could not get status COM port Check if the COM port is free and is properly configured FAILED CONNECTION TO While downloading images TCM failed to connect to the mobile computer Check if TERMINAL Terminal Not the correct flow control protocol is selected and the mobile computer is properly Connected Properly Terminal Not connected and is in a listening state Ready to Receive 12 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG IPL Error Detection While receiving data IPL performs many checks on the data to ensure that the data is received correctly If an error is detected IPL immediately aborts the download and reports the error on an error screen Error screens may vary depending on the action being performed A sample error s
196. ceececeeeece TE 10 24 serial USB Connection 10 24 Using Eau d eder AA 10 24 Cable Adapter Module 10 26 Attaching and Removing 10 27 r 10 28 Battery Charging oia TE REPE SA 10 29 Serial USB Connection 10 29 Universal Battery Charger UBC Adapter 10 30 Inserting and Removing a Battery 10 30 UU rre eee Gas as ALA ee akon ED ER ac S ANG ERR 10 31 Battery Charging Indicators 10 31 Modem Module 10 33 s Q LI Connecting to the Mobile Computer TORRENS whaha 10 34 Connecting to the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle 10 35 Miodem LED WGA ooa ctp tar RR b ee orn EPOD Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem 10 36 Connecting the Modem T 10 39 Modem Country Setup 10 40 Supported Countries 10 40 AT Commands 10 41 Changing the Initialization SHANG Torr 10 41 Basic AT Command Syntax 10 43 o A Aa 10 45 Wall Mounting Bracket and Shelf Slide AA 10 50 Installing the Wall M
197. certification authorities Thawte Server CA 12 31 20 Thawte Premium Serv 12 31 20 Secure Server Certific 1 7 10 GTE CyberTrust Root 2 23 06 GTE CyberTrust Globa 8 13 18 GlobalSign Root CA 1 28 14 Entrust net Secure 5 5 25 19 Entrust net Certificati Figure 3 27 Certificates Window Root Tab he list box displays the name of the certificate issuer and the expiration date To view more information about a certificate select it from the list box To delete a certificate tap and hold it in the list box and then tap Delete Tap ok 3 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Clock Use the Clock window to change the date time time zone and set alarms Time To set the date time and time zone 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon Time tab 9 Settings et 4 416 5 GRIT 5 Eastern US 4 16 22 PM EE 5 16 2003 m GMT 1 Berlin Rome 10 16 22 PM E Figure 3 28 Clock Window Time Tab Select the Home radio button Select the current time zone from the time zone drop down list To set the hour a lapon the hour field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the hour or b On the clock face tap and drag the hour hand to the current hour 5 losetthe minutes a tapon the minute field and use the up and down arrows to the right of the time to adjust the minutes or b On the clock face tap and drag the minute
198. character map Table E 5 for key functions and lable E 6 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include e The 53 key configuration contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and function keys See 53 Key Keypad Configuration NOIA 208 Bagabag 3A ad 30000008 6000000059 E Table E 5 53 Key Keypad Functions Local Function Display Backlight On Off E 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 5 53 Key Keypad Functions Local Function Key Sequence Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt D gt Brightness color Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt l gt Brightness color For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API information about F6 F7 keys see the keypad s description table in Chapter2 Operating QJ Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Default VK Code ASCII Value State Decimal Decimal VK F14 0x d 125d eel cl fh lo ho fo Key AAA VK_F o po mm AA LLL WA MN AAA See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 39 Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued ETE jaa ms pem State Decimal Decimal o ll f5 lago lt o 9 p U pee mw 8 C F mM d Bn 1 TA a a IE B LLL E Ii LES IS AAA DAN IS O a O AAA fe eo ION COS oo e 9 DANI II AI SL DAI I
199. character to the end of the quiet zone margin adjacent to a stop character The structural rules and conventions for representing data within a particular bar code type e g UPC EAN Code 39 PDF417 etc Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A communications protocol used to internetwork dissimilar systems This standard is the protocol of the Internet and has become the global standard for communications TCP provides transport functions which ensures that the total amount of bytes sent is received correctly at the other end UDP is an alternate transport that does not guarantee delivery It is widely used for real time voice and video transmissions where erroneous packets are not retransmitted IP provides the routing mechanism TCP IP is aroutable protocol which means that all messages contain not only the address of the destination station but the address of a destination network This allows TCP IP messages to be sent to multiple networks within an organization or around the world hence its use in the worldwide Internet Every client and server in a TCP IP network requires an IP address which is either permanently assigned or dynamically assigned at startup GL 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Telnet Terminal Terminate and Stay Resident TSR Terminal Emulation TFTP Tolerance Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol TSR UPC
200. characters SPACE BKSP opace and backspace functions Operating 2 23 Table 2 5 5250 Emulator Descriptions Continued O NN These keys can be assigned to an application F6 and F7 keys cannot be remapped and are dedicated by the Operating System to control volume level When these keys are pressed Shell exe traps them and displays the volume adjustment window To get these keys to an application call GXOpenlnput at the beginning of the application and call GXCloselnput at the end of the application This redirects all of the key events to an application including the F6 and F7 keys Note Other applications cannot receive any key event until GXCloselnput is called For example if the customer is using the APP1 key to run Calc exe this is disabled during this period Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions m O shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Control Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions Wa The keypad LED lights LED Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Period Decimal Point Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Moo WU Produces an asterisk 2 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2
201. cle the cradle Check the DHCP server log to verify that the cradle is receiving a response to its DHCP request The Ethernet link may be down Ensure the ethernet cable is connected to an active hub Mobile computer has been inserted incorrectly into the cradle Cradle is not receiving power Remove wait a minute and then reinsert the mobile computer ensuring it fits snugly onto the connector at the bottom of the cradle Ensure the power supply is securely connected and receiving power Battery is not recharging Mobile computer removed from the cradle too soon Replace the mobile computer into the cradle It can take up to 4 hours to recharge a completely depleted battery pack if mobile computer is suspended or longer if the mobile computer is on Tap Start Settings System Powerto view battery status Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery Mobile computer is not inserted correctly into the cradle Remove the mobile computer and reinsert it correctly Verify charging is active Tap Start Settings System Powerto view battery status Warning Message Unable to obtain a server assigned IP address Try again later or enter an IP address in Network settings This message occurs If a suspend resume cycle is performed and the mobile computer radio is not associated e g due to being out of range Tap O
202. creen may look like the screen pictured below Downloading Platform via Serial Port 115200 Error 2 Messages Cancelled by user Press any key to continue Figure 12 15 IPL Error Screen This error message screen displays until you press any key Once the screen is acknowledged IPL returns to the Initial Program Loader main menu to wait for a new selection To find the probable cause of the error use the error number and or the error text displayed on the screen to look up the error in Table 12 4 Table 12 4 IPL Errors 1 Unknown error A general error occurred Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the mobile computer requires servicing Cancelled by user The user canceled the download Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 25 Table 12 4 IPL Errors Continued Can t open the source An error occurred opening the source device either radio card or Serial port Check source device connectivity and retry Can t open the destination An error occurred opening the destination device either flash ROM or Power Micro Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the mobile computer requires servicing The source device either radio card or Serial port could not be read from Check source device connectivity and retry Can t read from the source device The destination device either flash ROM or Power Mic
203. cryption IP Config and Power tabs as required to set security network address information and power consumption level for the new profile Deleting a Profile select a profile to delete from the list box and tap Delete to remove the selected profile 5 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Ordering Profiles select a profile from the list box and tap Move Up or Move Down to order the profile If the current profile association is lost Mobile Companion attempts to associate with the first profile in the list and then the next until a new association is achieved Profile Roaming must be enabled Using LEAP for Wireless Network Security LEAP is a security protocol that provides authentication and encryption for wireless networks Authentication is provided through the use of user names and passwords here are multiple options for caching of these credentials available to the administrator of the device through the registry here are multiple password caching options used for LEAP The methods are e Save the password in the registry e Save the password until a warm boot soft reset but not saved in the registry This method also has a timeout available e The username and password are never saved Any change of status roam or suspend resume will require that the user login The default is set to cache the password until a warm boot with no timeout If a different password caching option is d
204. ctions Keyclicks On Off Quiet Mode On Off Mobile Computer Configuration Host Profiles Message Recall Free Cursor Mode Close Session Previous Session Next Session View Mode On Off Scroll Left Scroll Right Scroll Down Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt D gt Brightness color Contrast monochrome Func l Brightness color F 58 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 11 5250 Emulator Keys sme KeySemence System Request Table E 11 5250 Emulator Keys Continued Sm ene Keypad Maps F 59 E 60 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 12 5250 Character Map Ge e mee DE e Ro mem p mee ra EMM E HR pe EAN CC po e Cc Ko pe pole pole Pu Keypad Maps E 61 Table E 12 5250 Character Map Continued Ge e mee meme Foo pem NENL I NN Fo E p Emme B eek po lomo e NENL NN po lame s lame Po fame F 62 IMC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 12 5250 Character Map Continued CO CECI CON E CON E C p Wem LE e pla a O EAN EI EOI EN pole C C EI pla Keypad Maps E 63 Table E 12 5250 Character Map Continued CN eem pop Ro e IM EIN E 64 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG VT Emulator Configuration The VT emulator configuration contai
205. ctive program select the program from the Running Program List list box and tap Activate To stop all active programs tap Stop All Tap ok 3 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Power Use the Power window to view the status of the main and backup batteries and set power management options Battery To check the main battery and backup battery status 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Power icon Battery tab Ey settings e BEE Lok Main battery Lilon Battery power remaining Backup battery Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 3 38 Power Window Battery Tab The Battery tab provides general information about battery conditions The amount of useful operating time remaining varies depending on battery type and how you use the mobile computer 2 lapok Settings 3 45 Wireless To turn the mobile computer s wireless capabilities on 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Power icon Wireless tab 9 settings e 46435 Wireless signals off O Wireless signals on Bluetooth Adjust backlight settings to conserve power Change beam settings to conserve power E Figure 3 39 Power Window Wireless Tab 2 Select Wireless signals on radio button 3 Inthe list box select the wireless device check box 4 Tap ok To turn the mobile computer s wireless capabilities off select the Wireless sign
206. current time in a digital or analog format To change the time format tap and hold the ime icon until a menu appears Select the format you want 3 d 9 40 y er MED Analog Clock ambo NE anos P Tap here to set owner Digital igital a eeling Na Anna EF PM Tem NS q E Ya 3 Figure 2 13 Time Icon Format Menu To display current date time and appointments 1 Tap the ime icon to display the ime and Next Appointment dialog box er df 1 20 La Pl rni zi iT z HI a Time and Next Appointment Monday June 16 20254 Current Date and Time Battery Status Icon Bi I 54 1 1 Mo upcoming appointments Upcoming Appointments 1 ud Figure 2 14 Time and Next Appointment Dialog Box Operating 2 41 2 The dialog box displays the current date and time the battery status and any upcoming appointments in the Calendar Instant Message Icon The nstant Message icon notifies you when MSN Messengerhas received a new incoming message see MSN Messenger on page 9 27 for more information d Figure 2 15 MSN Messenger Dialog Box 2 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG VA E Mail Icon The E Mail icon notifies you when you have received incoming e mails See Inbox on page 9 15 for more information E Figure 2 16 New E mail Messages Dialog Box Multiple Notification Icon The Multiple Notification icon appears when two or more message notificat
207. d an existing bond For more options New Made Bonded Devices E Figure 6 5 Bluetooth Window Bonded Devices Tab Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 9 5 Tap New The mobile computer searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them in the list Select a Bluetooth device gt Searching complete DOD2c7 icde4c Figure 6 6 Select a Bluetooth Device Window 6 Inthe list tap the device with which to create a bond and then tap Next PET PEUT Enter Device Bluetooth PIN gt Enter a Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond with 0002c71c9e4c The same PIN must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how ko answer ko PIN requests ici 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y ul ij o p caPja s a f ajn ijkjij shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Ej Figure 6 7 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN Window eo If the device to which the mobile computer is bonding does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the mobile computer 6 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 7 Inthe Device PIN text box enter a PIN between 1 and 16 characters and tap Next The mobile computer sends the PIN request to the device for bonding 8 When prompted the same PIN must be entered on the other device When the PIN is entered correctly on t
208. d identifying mobile objects such as store merchandise postal packages and sometimes living organisms like pets Using a special device called an RFID reader RFID allows objects to be labeled and tracked as they move from place to place Device used to read RFID tags Read Only Memory Data stored in ROM cannot be changed or removed The name of the licensed Disk Operating System loaded into the mobile computer s flash file system A device that connects networks and supports the required protocols for packet filtering Routers are typically used to extend the range of cabling and to organize the topology of a network into subnets See Subnet An Electronic Industries Association EIA standard that defines the connector connector pins and signals used to transfer data serially from one device to another Area intended to contain a symbol An electronic device used to scan bar code symbols and produce a digitized pattern that corresponds to the bars and spaces of the symbol Its three main components are 1 Light source laser or photoelectric cell illuminates a bar code 2 Photodetector registers the difference in reflected light more light reflected from spaces 3 Signal conditioning circuit transforms optical detector output into a digitized bar pattern The scanner is energized programmed and ready to read a bar code A method of programming or configuring parameters for a bar code reading system by s
209. d the AirBEAM Synchronize window appears AIrBEAM Synchronize e The Status List displays status messages that indicate the progress of the synchronization process Connecting Connection 811 e Tap OK to return to the Main Menu This button remains inactive until the synchronization process is complete e Tap Retry to restart the synchronization process This button is activated only if there is an error during the synchronization process Disconnecting 7 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Automatic Synchronization The AirBEAM Smart Client can be configured to launch automatically using the Misc 1 Preference tab see Misc 1 Tab on page 7 7 When setting automatic synchronization use the Auto load drop down list to specify how the AirBEAM Smart Client should be invoked automatically when the client device is rebooted See Misc 1 Tab on page 7 7 for instructions on enabling Auto Sync AirBEAM Staging The AirBEAM Smart staging support is intended to speed up and simplify the process of staging custom or updated operating software onto mobile devices directly from manufacturing The staging support is part of the AirBEAM Smart CE Client that is integrated into the mobile computer The AirBEAM Smart support works by defaulting the AirBEAM Client configuration to a known set of values and launching the AirBEAM Smart package download logic A staging environment including an RF network FIP ser
210. d be used for image retrieval as well If this field is enabled all image capabilities crop settings are ignored and all viewfinder capabilities are used instead The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled or Use Video VF Crop Settings Disabled opecifies if the acquired image should be flipped on the horizontal axis The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled or Flip Horizontal Disabled opecifies if the acquired image should be flipped on the vertical axis The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled or Flip Vertical Disabled RFID Demo Program C 19 Table C 2 ImgCap Fields Continued a Specifies if the bits in the acquired image should be negated providing a negative image The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled or Negative Image Disabled Specifies if Cap On Rel Capture On Release is Enabled or Disabled When enabled an image is captured when the trigger is released When disabled an image is captured when the trigger is pressed Cap On Rel The default value is Disabled Specifies the amount in degrees that the acquired image should be rotated Some devices may impose a minimum increment value Rotate Image This feature is not currently supported VFCap Tap the VFCap tab to define and or control aspects of the viewfinder function Ea A ff 12 28 ES On Screen Keyboard ViewFinder Framerate bo Fix Aspect Ratio
211. d scanner only e Use the Imager to scan bar code data and capture still images mobile computers with an integrated imager only e Use Microsoft Activesync to synchronize or copy information from the host computer to the mobile computer For more information on ActiveSync see Chapter 4 Communications or ActiveSync Help on the host computer Entering Information Using the Input Panel Use the input panel to enter information in any program You can either type using the soft keyboard or write using Block Recognizer Letter Recognizer or Transcriber In any case the characters appear as typed text on the screen 2 46 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To show or hide the input panel tap the Input Panel button Tap the arrow next to this button to view input methods Options Block Recognizer Keyboard Letter Recognizer chanjo X Transcriber New Edit Tools 2 EIE Input Panel Button select an input method Tap to see choices Figure 2 20 Input Panel Button When you use the input panel the mobile computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel When you tap the displayed word it is inserted into the text at the insertion point The more you use the mobile computer the more words it learns to anticipate To change input settings such as the number of words suggested at one time select Options from the Input Panel menu and
212. d to be reinstalled after a cold boot If you have trouble reinstalling programs adjust RAM allocation 3 432 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Storage Card The Storage Card tab displays how much memory is available in a partition in the mobile computer 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Storage Card tab 9 Settings aia ok Total storage card memory 15 16 MB In use 0 00 MB Free 15 16 MB AAA Platform Storage Card Running Programs E Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large files using storage memory Figure 3 36 Memory Window Storage Card Tab 2 Tap the drop down list and then the name of the storage card or Flash File partition whose information you want to view Minimally the drop down list always includes the Platform and Application partition 3 Tap ok Settings 3 43 Running Programs The Running Programs tab displays the list of currently active programs 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Running Programs tab 9 settings ef d aus ok Running Program List Storage Card Running Programs EN Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large files using storage memory Ej Figure 3 37 Memory Window Running Programs Tab The Running Program List lists all running active programs 2 To stop an active program select the program from the Running Program List list and tap Stop 3 lodisplay an a
213. d until a Warm Boot Cache the password until a warm boot is the default setting A timeout value can also be set in the registry The timeout forces the user to enter the username and password after a power on if the device had not gone through the LEAP authentication processes after the set period of time Normally the device goes through the LEAP authentication process at every power up and every time it roams between APs The timeout setting can be set in minutes using hexadecimal in the registry file The default setting of zero disables the timeout feature To change the timeout setting edit the registry file using a text editor e g Notepad as follows 1 Ensure the LCachePwd value is set to dword 1 LCachePwd dword 1 2 fatimeoutis desired change the LTimeoutMinutes value from 00000000 to a desired value Examples are provided in the registry file The following example is for 240 minutes which Is represented as 000000F0 in hexadecimal LTimeoutMinutes dword 000000F0 3 Ensure that the UNAME and UPwd lines are commented out by putting a semicolon at the beginning of each line 5 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 After these changes are made to the S24Profiles reg file the file must be copied onto the mobile computer Copy the file into the Platform folder of the device using ActiveSync overwriting the old file Once this is done cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take
214. dd Accessories 10 9 Multi Media Card MMC Secure Device SD Card The MMC provides secondary non volatile storage The MMC is located under the keypad see Figure 10 1 SD cards are inter operable with MMC cards and can also be used in MC9000 mobile computers CO the mobile computer with the keypad detached Follow proper ESD precautions to avoid damaging the MMC SD Proper ESD precautions include but are not CAUTION rmited to working on an ESD mat and ensuring that the operator is properly grounded To insert the MMC SD Do not remove the keypad while the mobile computer Is on and do not operate 1 Suspend the mobile computer 2 Remove the two keypad screws and slide the keypad down and lift off see Figure 10 1 on page 10 7 3 Lift the MMC SD retaining door 4 Position the MMC SD with the contacts down into the MMC SD holder The MMC SD corner notch fits into the holder only one way Snap the retaining door closed MMC SD MMC SD Retaining Door Figure 10 3 Inserting the MMC SD 10 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Do not apply more than 4 in lbs of torque when tightening the keypad screws CAUTION 5 Replace the keypad and re attach using the two screws see Figure 10 2 on page 10 8 Accessories 10 11 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a single Single Slot Serial USB cradle Figure 10 4 with the mobile compute
215. der motion horizontally and or vertically may enhance tag reading ability c 3 If necessary position the mobile computer horizontally or vertically as shown in Figure 2 36 depending on the orientation of the tag 4 Pull the trigger 5 Anaudible beep sounds by default and the Indicator LED bar flashes green one time to indicate the tag was decoded successfully MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 6 Release the trigger Tag decoding usually occurs instantaneously The mobile computer repeats the steps required to read a tag as long as the trigger remains pulled For more information about reading RFID tags and using MC906R G RFID mobile computers see Appendix C RFID Demo Program Scan LED Indicator The Indicator LED bar on the mobile computer provides a visual indication of the scan status See Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 for the location of the Indicator LED bar Table 2 10 Scan LED Indicators II dm CU Flash Once Green Resetting the Mobile Computer If the mobile computer stops responding to input reset it There are two reset functions warm boot and cold boot A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs A cold boot also restarts the mobile computer but erases all stored records and entries in RAM Data saved in flash memory or a memory card is not lost In addition it returns formats preferences and other settings to the factory default settings
216. develop C and VB NET managed applications for Symbol mobile computers These tools include class libraries sample applications and associated documentation SMDK for NET allows Microsoft NET Compact Framework developers to programmatically access Symbol value add features of the mobile devices The DCP for MC9000w provides the Product Reference Guide PRG flash partitions Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and the associated TCM scripts With this package hex images that represent flash partitions can be created and downloaded to the mobile computer Required System Configurations The minimum system configuration required to install the SMDK for eVC4 SMDK for NET and DCP for MC9000w Is e BM compatible host computer with Pentium 450 MHz processor or higher e Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system e 128 MB RAM e 100 MB available hard disk space e CD ROM drive e One available serial port e Mouse e Activesync software available at the Microsoft web site http www microsoft com 11 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG SMDK for eVC4 Installation Requirements In order to install the SMDK for eVCA the following additional components must first be installed on the development PC e Microsoft Windows XP or Windows 2000 e Microsoft Embedded Visual C v4 0 with SP2 e Microsoft Windows Mobile 2003 SDK e Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher e Adobe Acrobat
217. dio Bluetooth Radio Power On Unchecking this removes power From the radio E Figure 3 41 Radio Power Window 2 Select the check box for the radio to power on Deselect the check box for the radio to power off 3 lapok Settings 3 49 Bluetooth Versions Tap the BT Version tab to view the versions of Bluetooth radio hardware and software on the mobile computer eo The BT Version tab is only available in mobile computers with Bluetooth wireless technology 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Radio Power icon Bluetooth tab 7 x29 Radio Power Settings Bluetooth Extensions Version 3 2 Bluetooth Monitor version 3 2 Radio Firmware Version 7 Radio Hardware Version 757 BD Addr OO40F8460146 Figure 3 42 Bluetooth Versions Window 2 Tap ok to exit 3 50 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Regional Settings With regional settings you can change the way the mobile computer displays dates times currency amounts large numbers and numbers with decimal fractions You can also choose the metric or U S system of measurement You can also choose from a large number of input locales When you switch to another input locale some programs offer special features such as font characters or spell checkers designed for different languages 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab Regional Settings icon Region tab e 46436 Appearance samples Time 4 36 35 PM Short d
218. e BONDED 1 Figure 6 11 Rename Bonded Device Window 6 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 Enter a new name for the bonded device in the Name text box Tap ok eo Tap Delete in this window to delete a bonded device Deleting a Bonded Device If it is no longer necessary to connect with a device delete it from the Bluetooth Bonded Devices window 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab 2 lapand hold the device to delete In the pop up menu select Delete et 461603 QD Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options u P 1 Rename Made Bonded Devices E J Figure 6 12 Delete Device Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 13 3 Aconfirmation dialog appears lap Yes Delete Bonding with BONDED 1 Made Bonded Devices E Figure 6 13 Delete Device Confirmation Dialog Box 6 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Receiving Incoming Beams By default the mobile computer detects incoming Bluetooth beams and prompts the user to accept them Clear the Receive all incoming beams check box to prevent the mobile computer from detecting or receiving beams To turn off incoming beams 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Beam icon 3 settings e 46216 Beam Receive all incoming beams Receive an infrared beam fram a Pocket PC 000 or HIPZ dev
219. e Access Points APs in the area When it locates a wireless LAN s the ESSID name displays in the Available WLAN Networks list 4 Tap the ESSID name and then tap Connect The Mobile Companion Mode tab appears MEE PERI Wireless LAN Mode Profile Mame 123456 602 11 ESSID 123456 Operating Mode Infrastructure bd Made Authentication Encryption IP col 4 gt E Figure 4 20 Mobile Companion Mode Tab 6 The profile name and ESSID name appears in the respective fields 7 Inthe Operating Mode list select Infrastructure Communications 4 23 8 Tap the Authentication tab AF Network 4 d2 1 22 Authentication EAP Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 gt E Figure 4 21 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab 9 Select an Authentication None Kerberos LEAP EAP TLS or PEAP from the Authentication drop down list that may be needed on the wireless network 10 Tap the Encryption tab 53 Mobile Companion 4 m2 1 39 cw keyLength 40 bit V 128 bit eese senes WEEE WEEE WEEE WEEE key Figure 4 22 Mobile Companion Encryption Tab 11 Select the encryption algorithm used on the wireless network Open System WEP or TKIP WPA 4 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG CO If an Authentication and or Encryption scheme is selected enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window See the network administ
220. e are more notification icons than can be displayed Tap to display remaining icons Only appears in the ime and Next Appointment dialog box 2 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Task Tray Icons You may see the task tray icons listed in Table 2 9 on the command bar located at the bottom of the screen Table 2 9 Task Tray Icons KERNEL M The Mobile Companion icon appears in the task tray and indicates mobile computer signal strength See Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Configuration for more information The Bluetooth icon appears in the task tray and indicates that the Bluetooth radio is on The icon disappears when the radio is off The icon is for display purposes only See Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology for more information The ActiveSync icon appears in the task tray and indicates an active connection between the mobile computer and the development PC See Using ActiveSync on page 4 21 for more information Operating 2 37 Speaker Icon You can adjust the system volume using the Speaker icon in the Navigation bar 1 Tap the Speaker icon The Volume dialog box appears Owner John Doe Suo 738 2 o upcaminc Wo Upcamine Figure 2 10 Volume Dialog Box 2 Tap and move the slide bar to adjust the volume 3 Select the On or Off radio button to turn the volume on or off The system volume can also be adjusted using the Sounds amp Notifications window See Sounds amp No
221. e mobile computer to ActiveSync failed Cause Mobile computer removed from the cradle while the LED was blinking green ActiveSync on the host computer has not yet closed the previous ActiveSync session 13 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Solution Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in the cradle This allows the cradle to attempt another synchronization Wait one minute and reinsert the mobile computer in the cradle This allows the cradle to attempt another synchronization Incorrect cable configuration Check your DHCP server and determine which IP address was allocated to the cradle then check connectivity by pinging the cradle Communications software improperly configured Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications Check your DHCP server and determine which IP address was allocated to the mobile computer slot then check connectivity by pinging the cradle Mobile computer ActiveSync disabled or not configured to accept network connection On the mobile computer tap Start ActiveSync Tools Options Options button Then uncheck the Enable PC sync using this connection check box Host ActiveSync disabled or not configured to accept network connection On the host computer check File Connection Settings Allow network Ethernet Server Connection with this desktop computer During communications no data was trans
222. e original manual are listed below Change 01 to 01 to 01 to 01 to 01 to 01 to 02 to 02 to 03 to 03 to 03 to 03 to 03 to 03 to 03 to 04 to 05 to 05 to 05 to 06 to 06 to Date 12 2003 12 2003 12 2003 12 2003 12 2003 12 2003 4 2004 4 2004 6 2004 6 2004 6 2004 6 2004 6 2004 6 2004 6 2004 7 2004 9 2004 9 2004 9 2004 11 2004 11 2004 Description Added Bluetooth wireless technology functionality Added new cold boot procedure Updated Spectrum24 Configuration to V 3 9 2 Added 9000 Demo sample application programs clarification note to Appendix B Demo Program Added ImagerSample to Appendix B Demo Program Added optimizing display note to Power on page 3 44 Updated Spectrum24 Configuration Add 28 key keypad Updated battery removal procedure Added Modem Module accessories Added keypad brightness display control color units Updated B uetooth wireless technology operation Updated battery voltage technical specifications Added registry settings for Enter Return and Green Red dot keys Added information for applying applications to F6 F7 keys Bluetooth wireless technology update Added RFID tag reading information demo program how to read tags RFID device tech specs Updated Parts to include RFID Added valid battery charging temperature ranges Added Rapid Deployment to Configuring the Mobile Computer Add
223. e power source see Chapter 10 Accessories for connection setups The accessory requires a dedicated port It cannot share a port with any other device Refer to the host computer user manual supplied to locate the USB ports eu Communications 4 13 Connect the mobile computer to the accessory being used for communication Power on the mobile computer If a partnership was already created between the host computer and mobile computer synchronization occurs automatically upon connection Ethernet Communication Setup To establish a connection between the mobile computer and the host computer to communicate over an Ethernet network perform the following Install MobileDox Cradle Manager Install eConnect Mobile computer configuration Host computer configuration DHCP server configuration Cradle configuration Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager CU MobileDox Cradle Manager is used only when establishing a connection using the Four Slot Ethernet cradle The Cradle Management software features View cradles that are attached to the network via MobileDox Net View cradle status Modify cradle settings including e P address settings e DNs and WINS settings e Identification settings e SB port specific settings Restart cradles connected to the network via MobileDox Net Update the firmware of MobileDox Net 4 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG To install the Cradle Management Softwa
224. e used for IPL downloads via all S24 radios If the partition is not present then an ESSID of 101 is assumed This partition is only used by IPL and Is not required by the Operating System Config Block Contains information to correctly configure the Operating System for the mobile computer This information is loaded by the manufacturer Note Great care should be taken to ensure that an incorrect config block is not loaded into the mobile computer Loading an incorrect config block prevents the correct operation of the computer Windows CE Contains the operating system for the mobile computer Contains the Monitor and IPL programs This partition is for internal use only oplash Screen Contains the splash screen that displays while booting the mobile computer Note Splash screens are generated from bmp images and must be less than or equal to 240 pixels wide and 296 pixels deep For mono displays the bmp image must be 4 bpp and for color screens the color depth must be 8 bpp Note 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel Power Micro The Power Micro is a small computer contained within the mobile computer that controls several system resources In the unlikely event that the Power Micro Firmware needs updating selecting this item allows the device to be programmed Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 15 Table 12 2 IPL Menu Partitions Continued Parti
225. ecifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client tests to determine if a file is in use before downloading If the n use Testfeature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client downloads a temporary copy of any files that are in use If any temporary in use files are downloaded the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically resets the client to complete the copy of the in use files If the In use Test feature is disabled the synchronization process fails 813 if any download files are in use Wait Welcome This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client waits for the WELCOME windows to be completed before automatically launching the synchronization process after a reset Close Apps This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically attempts to close non system applications prior to resetting the mobile unit If enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client sends aWM CLOSE message to all non system applications before resetting the mobile unit This feature offers applications the opportunity to prepare i e close open files for the pending reset Misc 3 Tab This tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Misc 2 Misc 3 Use DHCP server C Use DHCP bootfle AirBEAM Smart 7 9 a rs Use DHCP server This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 66 to specify the P address of the FTP TFTP server If enabled special RF network registry settings are re
226. eck the host system for updates and if necessary to transfer updated software Most often AirBEAM Smart Client is used with wireless networks but any TCP IP connection can be used For more information refer to the AirBEAM Smart Windows CE Client Product Reference Guide p n 72 63060 xx see Access Point An interface by means of which one software component communicates with or controls another Usually used to refer to services provided by one software component to another usually via software interrupts or function calls Aperture Application Programming Interface ANSI Terminal ASCII Autodiscrimination Bar Bar Code Bar Code Density Bar Height Bar Width Baud Rate Glossary GL 3 The opening in an optical system defined by a lens or baffle that establishes the field of view See API A display terminal that follows commands in the ANSI standard terminal language For example it uses escape sequences to control the cursor clear the screen and set colors Communications programs support the ANSI terminal mode and often default to this terminal emulation for dial up connections to online services American Standard Code for Information Interchange A 7 bit plus parity code representing 128 letters numerals punctuation marks and control characters It is a standard data transmission code in the U S The ability of an interface controller to determine the code type of a scanned bar code After
227. ecurity software licensed From RSA Data Security Inc Portions of this software are based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Portions of IPSec and related services jointly developed by Microsoft Corporation and Cisco Systems Inc Figure 3 22 About Window Copyrights Tab 2 Tap ok 3 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Backlight Use the Backlight window to conserve battery power to turn off the backlight when the mobile computer is idle and to adjust the brightness level You also have options to turn on the backlight when you tap the screen or press a key Battery Power To set the backlight settings when using battery power 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Backlight icon Battery Power tab 3 settings e 4 1004 ok Backlight Waring Using backlight while on battery power will substantially reduce battery life On Battery Power Turn off backlight if ie device is not used for Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Battery Power External Power Brightness Adjust power settings to conserve power E Figure 3 23 Backlight Window Battery Power Tab 2 Make the desired selections See Table 3 4 for backlight settings 3 Tap ok Display contrast monochrome units and display backlight intensity color units can also be controlled using the keypad See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypads special fu
228. ed Rapid Deployment Client information Chapter 8 Rapid Deployment Client Change 06 to 07 06 to 07 06 to 07 06 to 07 Date 11 2004 11 2004 11 2004 11 2004 Description Updated Radio Power window information Chapter 3 Settings Added Adaptive Frequency Hopping information Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology Added Rapid Deployment Client information Chapter 8 Rapid Deployment Client Added additional Reader Params descriptions in the Scanner Settings section Chapter B Demo Program Revision History About This Guide IV MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Installing and Removing the Main Battery 1 7 Installing the Main Battery 1 7 Removing the Main Battery 1 8 ERAS EIS MA dard cede anak Ra GASA 1 10 Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery 1 10 Charging the Main Battery 1 11 Mie MA 1 11 A A ec er ap a 1 12 coro M T 1 14 Starting the Mobile Computer 1 15 Won Ed iei c os ek peated esr eid DO TCI TT 1 16 Setting TimeandDate 1 18 Aja Battery SIA WG accede cin ced ik IEEE Raed ane Cee RR cc 1 19 Configuring the Mobile Computer
229. ed and are using the correct Encryption Key algorithm Adapters using Open System cannot associate to the MicroAP when the MicroAP has shared Key enabled Only when the MicroAP is using Open System can Open System mobile computers associate to it Use the Encryption Algorithm drop down list to select the adapter Encryption algorithm The Open System algorithm default setting does not encrypt packets over the network select Open System to disable Encryption for the WLAN adapter and allow for the transmission and receipt of data with no security Use the Shared Encryption Key option to enable 40 bit Encryption Select the Encryption Index key radio button to be used for the mobile computer and enter 10 hex digits for each key used Tap ok to save and implement the encryption key data select an Encryption Index key radio button and tap Reset Keys to clear the entries in the Shared Encryption Key fields 5 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG IP Config Tab Use the P Config tab to configure the following mobile computer profile network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS ae Symbol Spectrum2 Yi 2 10 ok IP Configuration Ea Symbol Spectrum2 Y a 2 10 ok IP Configuration Gateway DNS MicroAP Encryption IP Config wanaipa E MicroAP Encryption IP Config wana 4 gt E DHCP Static Figure 5 32 IP Config Tab Table 5 16 IP Co
230. ed on the screen such as adjusting the transparency level 1 In Pictures tap the picture you want to set as the background 2 Tap Jools Set as Today Wallpaper Applications 9 41 View Pictures Using Pictures you can view thumbnails of pg pictures stored in the My Pictures folder and select a picture that you want to see in full screen view 1 InPictures tap the thumbnail of the picture you want to view 2 Tap 8 to view pictures stored on a storage card 3 Tap El to view pictures stored in the My Pictures folder View Slideshow of Pictures You can view jpg pictures as a slideshow Pictures displays slides of the pictures shown in thumbnail view with 5 second intervals between slides 1 In Pictures tap ET to view pictures as a slideshow 2 lapanywhere on the screen to display the Slideshow toolbar which you can use to pause the slideshow rotate the view and more 3 Press the left right controls to move forward or backward through the slides 9 42 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents 10 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG SE BLA ko Rd dard KAG AR d AF wh KG dico dob dp WE EGER bak Rd dd IA c e eh dod 10 18 cs NGANGA b a PAANAN Du ded eR en EE r 10 18 Four Slot Spare Battery AMA 10 19 PD E EE E E E t Tem 10 20 Spare Battery Charging with the Four Slot Spare Battery Charger 10 20 Battery Charging D
231. een appears 74 Logon to Server ar aff 1 49 Network Log On Resource My Connection C Save password 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T caPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m F pad A Nil Figure 6 48 Network Log On Window 22 Enter the Password and tap ok 23 The mobile computer attempts to connect to the AP A Connecting to AP via Bluetooth Using Bluetooth Phone Dialing 555 1717 Settings Figure 6 49 Connecting Dialog Box Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 39 Automatic Connection some Bluetooth enabled phones allow automatic connections to be set up with devices they have successfully bonded with without requiring a password to be entered manual for each connection attempt To set up automatic connections between the phone and the mobile computer follow the appropriate instructions below for the specific phone 1 Motorola Timeport 270C O ee AO DU On the phone press MENU Scroll to Settings then press SELECT Scroll to Connection then press ON On Bluetooth Link press SELECT Scroll to Devices then press SELECT Choose the mobile computer then press EDIT Scroll to Access Ask then press CHANGE Scroll to Automatic then press SELECT Press DONE 2 Nokia 3650 7650 Dr a ig o Q h On the phone press MENU scroll to Connectivity then press Options The Open option should be highlighted Press Select The Bluetooth opti
232. effect Prevent Password Cache To prevent password caching edit the registry file using a text editor with the following changes 1 Change the LCachePwd value from 1 to 2 LCachePwd dword 2 2 Ensure that the UNAME and UPwd lines are commented out by putting a semicolon at the beginning of each line 3 After the changes are made use ActiveSync to copy the S24Profiles reg file overwriting the old file onto the mobile computer s Platform folder Then cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take effect LEAP Usage After LEAP setup is complete the only noticeable difference is the password dialog box If the caching method selected requires a user name and password then they appear when required If the user name is an NT domain user the domain can be entered in the domain field if necessary not normally required Spectrum24 Configuration 5 35 Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access The 3 9 3 wireless component set was developed to provide Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access WPA with Full Authentication and associated Credential Caching based on the Meetinghouse AEGIS Client These features as well as earlier wireless features are available through either the Mobile Companion application see Mobile Companion on page 5 4 or through the Meetinghouse AEGIS security Client application It is strongly recommended that wireless profiles be created and maintained in one application only and not shared Profile roa
233. egistry Create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKeyOverride dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation SPACE BKSP opace and backspace functions Cas Number or alpha value depending on the state of the ALPHA key Operating 2 11 Table 2 2 43 Key Descriptions Continued WAA GN Alpha Application These keys can have an application assigned to the function value and have an alpha value DIC assigned when used with the ALPHA function key F6 and F7 keys cannot be remapped and are dedicated by the Operating System to control volume level When these keys are pressed Shell exe traps them and displays the volume adjustment window To get these keys to an application call GXOpenlnput at the beginning of the application and call GXCloselnput at the end of the application This redirects all
234. egistry information in a reg file and save it in the Flash File System Refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers for details CO For more information about using Activesync start Activesync on the host computer and refer to the Activesync Help Serial Communication Setup For serial communication using accessories that can communicate with either a serial or USB connection connect only the serial cable Do not connect both the serial and USB cables If both serial and USB communication cables are required the host computers USB port must be disabled in ActiveSync before serial communication can be enabled Setting Up a Connection on the Mobile Computer 1 On the mobile computer tap Start ActiveSync to display the ActiveSync window ES ActiveSync ar PEBE ok PC Synchronization When syncing remately with a PC Use this PC symbol MC Use mobile schedule to sync with this PC Sync with this PC during manual sync PE Mobile Schedule E Figure 4 8 ActiveSync Window 4 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 Tap Jools Options on the ActiveSync window to display the PC Synchronization window PC tab e 46114 PC Synchronization When syncing remotely with a PC Use this PC Use mobile schedule to sync with this PC Sync with this PC during manual sync PE Mobile Schedule E Figure 4 9 PC Synchronization Window PC Tab 3
235. elete it to conserve space on the mobile computer If a copy of the book is stored on the host computer you can download it again at any time To remove a book from the device tap and hold the title in the Library list and then tap Delete on the pop up menu For more information on using Microsoft Reader tap Start Help 9 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Pocket Internet Explorer With Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer you can view Web or Wireless Application Protocol WAP pages in the following ways e During synchronization with the host computer download favorite links and mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in Internet Explorer on the host computer e Connect to an Internet service provider ISP or network and browse the Web First create the connection see Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 21 To select Pocket Internet Explorer tap Start Internet Explorer Mobile Favorites Items stored in the Mobile Favorites subfolder in the Favorites folder in Internet Explorer on the host computer are synchronized with the mobile computer This folder was created automatically when you installed ActiveSync Favorite Links oynchronization updates the list of favorite links both in the Mobile Favorites folder on the host computer and in Pocket Internet Explorer on the mobile computer Unless you mark the favorite link as a mobile favorite only the link
236. empts to achieve This feature is only meaningful when auto exposure is enabled Brightness The default value is 200 Allowed values are 2 254 opecifies the exposure time in microseconds The field is disabled and its current value is ignored if the auto exposure Is enabled The default value is 16320 Allowed values are 64 32 04 step 64 opecifies the amount of analog gain to apply The field is disabled and its current value is ignored if the auto exposure is enabled Analog Gain The default value is 95 Allowed values are 0 127 C 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 1 AcqCap Fields Continued mu Bem AA Defines the degree to which the auto exposure algorithm must settle before an image is returned This field has no effect if auto exposure is disabled Setting AF Settle too low may cause a fail to return an image under certain lighting conditions The default value should ensure adequate settling This feature may be disabled by setting the field value to 0 When this field is disabled the first acquired image Is returned regardless of the state of the auto exposure algorithm The default value is 2000 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 If the value is equal to 0 the capability is disabled and the image is returned regardless of how Auto Exposure works opecifies the number of frames to skip between auto exposure updates This feature is only meaning
237. en message Figure 2 31 Using My Text CO You can add text after inserting a My Text message before sending it To edit a My Text message tap Tools Edit My Text Messages Select the message you wish to edit and make the changes Entering Information Using Keypads The alphanumeric keypads produce the 26 character alphabet A Z numbers 0 9 function keys and assorted characters For detailed information about each keypad available for use with the mobile computer see Keypads on page 2 4 Keypad Special Functions on page 2 29 and Appendix E Keypad Maps 2 56 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Entering Data An integrated bar code scanner or imager on the mobile computer can scan data into data fields using a scan or image application in the same way data is entered via the keyboard In addition mobile computers with an integrated imager can capture and store still images For more information see page B 13 and Imager on page B 32 Finding Information The Find feature locates information Tap Start Find to launch this feature Enter the text you want to find select a data type then tap Go To find information taking up storage space on the mobile computer select Larger than 64 KB from the ype drop down list You can also use the File Explorer to find files and organize them into folders Tap Start Programs File Explorer to launch Explorer Tap to change folders ES File Explor
238. en with the stylus to exit the Welcome window Owner Information MT O my info John Doe Symbol One Symbol Plaza Holtsville New York 11742 531 738 2400 Figure 3 12 Welcome Window 3 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Passwords Use the Password window to set a password to disable unauthorized access to the mobile computer Password If the device is configured to connect to a network use a strong difficult to figure out password to help protect network security Password cracking tools continue to improve and the computers used to crack passwords are more powerful than ever and soft resetting doesn t work you must perform a cold boot Performing a t If you forget the password or if the mobile computer has become corrupted CAUTION k cold boot erases all files and data that you have created and programs you have installed Tap Start Settings Personal tab Password icon Password tab 3 settings e 46411 Password Prompt if device unused For C Simple 4 digit password KI Strong alphanumeric password Password Hint Figure 3 13 Password Window Password Tab select Prompt if device unused for check box to enable password protection From the drop down list select a time value for the protection to take affect after non use select either Simple 4 digit password or Strong alphanumeric password radio button to set a password For a simple pass
239. ence C 26 open file C 6 SENE TUB Lua cease E C 7 saving captured images C 13 A T SA i2 scanning C10 6 11 set defaults TOUT I visa bed VerCap Td hardware version 6 25 image api version C 25 image demo version C 25 jpeg library version C 25 mdd layer version 6 25 pdd layer version C 25 EE A C 4 ROT naaa pia parta C 21 OD SVG C 20 fix aspectratio 0 20 framerate A ey A E viewfinder mr C 20 imager RFID ono do PPP CUSE AWA LA imager See data capture imaging imagersample imaging 2 57 ImgCap TOME PUNTOS CA inbox application e 9 15 9 19 connecting to e mail server 9 15 LAA 9 20 Inessage NSE cars ir e B17 synchronizing e mail 9 15 information service POE ic AA waa uc ec A Initial Program Loader 12 31 NO ase scarce d xarcdaciota NGAGE dod 3 12 lalag NA AA APA 2 45 e AMA 2 47 letter recognizer 2 4 in AA 2 48 installing certificates 9 12 installing development tools 116 installing main battery 1 7 international roaming 5 36 5 38 Index interne
240. er a 10 45 e3 Select the sort J My Device order for the list Application Cj My Documents 3 Platform Tap the folder cy Program Files name to open it L Temp cy Windows mdmlog5 8 26 02 54B Refresh View All Files Paste Paste Shortcut Tap and hold to create Mew Folder a new folder Figure 2 32 File Explorer To move files in File Explorer tap and hold the item then tap Cut or Copy and Paste on the pop up menu e Operating 2 57 Data Capture Mobile computers with an integrated laser scanner allow you to collect data by scanning one dimensional bar codes Mobile computers with an integrated imager allow you to collect data by decoding one dimensional bar codes including RSS and two dimensional bar codes including PDFA17 and DataMatrix and capture and download images to a host for a variety of imaging applications Mobile computers with RFID technology MC906R G allow you to collect data by decoding in range RFID tags that beam back to the mobile computer the information they contain Laser Scanning Mobile computers with an integrated laser scanner have the following features e Reading of a variety of bar code symbologies including the most popular linear postal and 1 D code types e Advanced intuitive laser aiming for easy point and shoot operation Imaging Mobile computers with an integrated imager have the following features e Omnidirectional reading of a variety of bar code sym
241. ercharacter spaces Only numeric 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded See IP interface The connection between two devices defined by common physical characteristics signal characteristics and signal meanings Types of interfaces include RS 232 and PCMCIA Input Output Ports IP Address IPX SPX Kerberos Key LAN laser scanner LASER Glossary GL 11 I O ports are primarily dedicated to passing information into or out of the mobile computer s memory Series 9000 mobile computers include Serial and USB ports Internet Protocol The IP part of the TCP IP communications protocol IP implements the network layer layer 3 of the protocol which contains a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or subnetwork IP accepts packets from the layer 4 transport protocol TCP or UDP adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data link protocol It may also break the packet into fragments to support the maximum transmission unit MTU of the network Internet Protocol address The address of a computer attached to an IP network Every client and server station must have a unique IP address A 32 bit address used by a computer on a IP network Client workstations have either a permanent address or one that is dynamically assigned to them each session IP addresses are written as four sets of numbers separated by periods for example 204 171 64 2 Inte
242. erprise servers and creating RD bar codes refer to the MSP Users Guide Rapid Deployment Window The Rapid Deployment window displays bar code scan status and provides features for resetting and exiting the application To access the Rapid Deployment window tap Start Rapid Deployment Client or Start Programs Rapid Deployment Client icon rat Rapid Deployment 4 6 46 ok Please scan all of the bar codes Waiting Bar codes left to scan Waiting Figure 8 1 Rapid Deployment Window 8 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 8 1 Rapid Deployment Window Text Box Button Description Please scan all of the bar codes This text box displays the status of a scanned bar code Waiting indicates the mobile computer is ready to scan a bar code OK indicates the mobile computer successfully scanned a bar code The Indicator LED bar on the mobile computer turns green and a beep sounds If there are no bar codes left to scan the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays see Figure 8 3 Bar codes left to scan This text box displays a list of any remaining bar codes to scan 1 D bar codes only When all required bar codes are scanned successfully the Rapid Deployment Configuring window displays see Figure 8 3 Tap About to display the Rapid Deployment Client Info window Rapid Deployment Client v1 1 Build Date September 15 2004 Reset Tap Reset to remove any prev
243. ers from accessing transmitted information EAP TLS achieves this through secure authentication certificates PEAP select this option to enable PEAP authentication This method uses a digital certificate to see Figure 5 7 verify and authenticate a user s identity 5 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG eo When the mobile computer is associated to an EAP or PEAP WLAN the Microsoft window shown in Figure 5 8 may be available for Spectrum24 radio configurations Use only the Mobile Companion Utility located on the tasktray of the Today screen to configure the Spectrum24 radio y settings Y 42407 ok Mobile Compani Y 42 4 29 Configure Wireless Networks Multiple Networks Detected Wireless networks Add New Settings CEAP O sPR8206 i Available O codeblue 109 Available 350 Avalie This network connects me to The Internet Networks to access Q Work All Available X E If this network connects to work via a VPN _ Automatically connect to non preferred 1 ie Tap to hide window networks T Settings Ld Shift z x cjv b nim 7 Select a network to connect to Figure 5 8 Microsoft Spectrum24 Configuration Windows Installing and View Certificates he steps that follow explain how to install a user certificate EAP TLS only and a server certificate needed for EAP TLS and PEAP authentication 1 Onthe EAP TLS or PEAP Authentication window tap Install View Ce
244. ersion 01 03 Es lu fear Figure B 32 Audio Settings Window e Tap Beeper Volume to toggle the beeper volume between low 0 medium 1 high 2 and very high 3 As you change the value the beeper sounds to demonstrate the level e API Version displays the version number of the Audio API e Notify API Version displays the version number of the Notify API B 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Scanner Settings oelect Scanner Settings on the Control Panel to specify scanner related parameters ES CHPanel Example 4 f2 3 27 ES Scanner Settings Selected Scanner Reader Params Interface Params Scan Params Device Info Scanner Version Pom T T T2 Tc Teen Figure B 33 Scanner Settings Window e Selected Scanner displays the value of the selected scanner e Tap Reader Params to view and modify the values of various scanner reader parameters The reader parameter settings are dependent on the type of scanner used either a laser scanner or an Imager Imager Parameters e Reader Type displays the type of bar code reader used Imager type scan engine or laser type scan engine e Aim lype sets the type of aiming to use Tap to toggle between imed Release activation stops even if the trigger is still held after a specified period of time Timed Hold trigger can be released but it remains active for the specified period of time and Trigger on off controlled
245. es a selected item or function The default behavior of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications work properly create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 13 53 Key Keypad There are two physical configurations of the 53 key keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 53 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and function keys The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 3 on page 2 14 for key and button descriptions and Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions DO OO BOO eS Q SD O Q2 Q2 Q2 9 QO dDOCOA DOVOA OOO G2 C2 Q2 C2 GO
246. es in bold type with a check are supported on the mobile computer Select or deselect a check box as needed E Symbol Image Cap 4r ff 12 29 e On Screen Keyboard FAR Code 128 EAM 128 UPC EAN13 ISBT 128 Coupon Cade Codabar Bookland D2nf5 120f5 ATAS af 5 Figure C 17 Symbol Image Capture Scan 1Tab Scan 2 Tap the Scan 2tab to define the bar code types to support for scanning Bar codes in bold type with a check are supported on the mobile computer Select or deselect a check box as needed On Screen Keyboard Postnet pei PDF Planet Micro PDF Japan Postal Macro Micro PDF Aus Postal DataMatrix Dutch Postal Maxicode Canada Postal Code 32 RSS 14 Webcode RSS Limited ue RSS Expanded Figure C 18 Symbol Image Capture Scan 2 Tab C 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Crop The Crop option allows images to be cropped on the mobile computer s display through the viewfinder prior to capturing an image Ensure the ViewFinder option is enabled in the VFCap tab Advanced Settings VFCap tab to allow the image to appear on the mobile computer s display The settings defined in the Crop window can also be defined in the mgCap tab Advanced Settings ImgCap tab See Table C 2 on page C 17 for mgCap field descriptions cu To crop an image 1 Tap Advanced Crop to display the Crop window Crop Rect ix Av NV ZH Crop Style b Jo
247. esired the S24Profiles reg registry file in the Platform folder must be re configured Configuring Advanced Password Options All password caching options are configured in the file S24Profiles reg located in the Platform folder When the configuration is completed cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take effect The file must be edited on a PC and copied back onto the device after editing is complete The section of this file which needs editing reads HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Comm NETWLAN1 Parms Cache the Password To cache the password edit the registry file using a text editor with the following changes 1 Change the LCachePwd value from 1 to 0 LCachePwd dword 0 Spectrum24 Configuration 5 33 2 Uncomment the UNAME and UPwd values deleting the semicolons at the beginning of each line UNAME myLEAPUserName UPwd myLEAPPassword 3 Change myLEAPUserName and myLEAPPassword to the correct username and password Note that the user name and password should be in quotes If a domain name is required this can be entered in the user name as domain username A backslash is used and most setups do not require a domain name even if CO Microsoft Windows NT 2000 domains are used 4 After changing the S24Profiles reg file copy the file onto the mobile computer into the Platform using ActiveSync and overwriting the old file Then cold boot the mobile computer for the changes to take effect Cache the Passwor
248. ess Ethernet Settings 3 11 Buttons Use the Buttons window Up Down Control tab to customize Up Down key control Program Buttons The Program Buttons tab is currently not supported Refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers for information about keypad mapping Up Down Control To set the key repeat rate 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Buttons icon Up Down Control tab 9 Settings et 4 408 Customize the way your Up Down control repeats Delay before first repeat Figure 3 4 Buttons Window Up Down Control Tab 2 Adjust the Delay before first repeat slide bar to change the time elapsed before scrolling begins 3 Adjust the Repeat rate slide bar to change the time it takes to scroll from one item to the next 4 Tap ok 3 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Input Use the nput window to switch input methods and set input options Input Method To select an input method 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Input icon Inout Method tab 9 settings e 46408 Input method Large keys a Small keys djf g C Use gestures For the Following keys and remove them From the keyboari Space H Shift key Backspace ri Enter Input Method Word Completion Options IF stylus taps become inaccurate align the touch screen AE Figure 3 5 Input Window Input Method Tab 2 From the Input method drop down list
249. esses WINS Address The IP address of a server s that can resolve Windows network names into IP addresses This field must be populated correctly when using ActiveSync 4 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 6 Usethe Port Settings tab to modify the USB port settings of the cradle HIC ES Status General Settings TCPAP Settings Port Settings m Port Specific Settings PPP Port 1 m Port Name PPP Port 1 IP Address r Settings for All Ports J Use DHCP to obtain IP address T Use NAT Cancel Figure 4 17 Cradle Settings Window Port Settings Tab Table 4 3 Cradle Settings Port Settings Fields EMEN NENNEN GN Port Name A text string used to describe the device attached to the port Any 15 character string can be entered You can specify up to four port names one for each of the cradles slots IP Address The IP address assigned to the cradled device There should be one IP address per cradle slot This box is disabled for all devices if DHCP is used to obtain the IP address Use DHCP to obtain IP Address check The cradle uses DHCP to obtain an IP address for the handheld box Unchecking this selection allows the cradle to use Static IP address for the handheld Use NAT check box The cradle uses Network Address Translation NAT when forwarding handheld traffic onto the network No IP addresses are necessary for the handhelds This must be disable when using Activesync
250. etwork RJ11 Jacks Dialing capability Tone and rotary pulse Public switched telephone network PSTN including international connections Operating environment Altitude up to 20 000 ft Humidity 10 to 90 non condensing Operating temperature Operating 32 to 122 F 0 to 50 C Storage 4 to 149 F 20 to 65 C Operating modes Asynchronous full duplex automatic and manual call originate Performance Line speed up to 33 600 bps HHC to modem speed DTE speed up to 57 600 bps V 42bis data compression V 42 LAPM error correction Current consumption 100 mA active lt 10 mA sleep Pulse dialing rate 10 pulses per second except where prohibited under TBR 21 Pulse dialing duty cycle 39 61 US make to break ratio rules Ringer equivalence 0 1 dBm standards amp protocols Bell 103 Bell 212A Hayes AT command set and ITU Vs 17 21 22 A amp B 22bis 23 25bis 27 ter 29 32 32bis 42bis Tone detected Dial busy ring back modem answer tones Blind dialing based on time out periods available for incompatible tones AC Adapter 9V 2 amp regulated AC DC adapter allows unlimited modem use Do NOT substitute an AC adapter using an incorrect AC power supply causes electrical damage to the mobile computer and voids warranty Specifications D 9 Mobile Computer Pin Outs Figure D 1 Pin Locations Table D 4 MC9000 G Pin Outs Wess IC o Fam B m mm b Cr WAA B 8 CIN D 10 MC9000 G with Wind
251. ey Keypad Functions Display Backlight On Off Keypad Backlight On Off Contrast monochrome Func F1 Brightness color Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt F5 gt Brightness color For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API information about F6 F7 keys see the keypad s description table in Chapter2 Operating eu F 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Default Numlock Alpha Shift Alpha State State State VK Code ASCII Value Decimal Decimal VK F14 Ox7d 125d Green Dot Key VK_F15 Ox7d 126d U U 1604 85 Clee je A m ELA CEE AE CA AO A Lo FOO O O CS m See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See lable 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 29 Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift ASCII Value Decimal Decimal LE mg mo AO OZ h paa mo NA a a Lo qz pes pm ee fh HUL ee PN CENE See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift ASCII Value Decimal Decimal AR ms ESE SO ARO ESA A ee MONOS MONO Ee WG hg apo pop pp gj m AAA pod apo
252. ey combinations and the longer it would take to break the code The data is encrypted or locked by combining the bits in the key mathematically with the data bits At the receiving end the key is used to unlock the code and restore the original data see LAN See WAN Wireless Network Management Protocol This is Symbol s proprietary MAC layer protocol used for inter access point communication and other MAC layer communication See AirBEAM Manager GL 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG umerics WS HOD co dane pected xad aad eis 10 22 magnetic stripe reading 10 24 power connection 10 23 10 28 10 31 serial connection 10 22 10 24 PTT see ee 10 26 10 29 multi media card 1 6 10 5 printer Cable 1 6 10 6 A 1 6 10 5 Shelf slide 1 7 10 5 single slot serial USB cradle 10 11 10 35 LED indicators 10 13 10 20 AAA A 1 6 spare battery 1 7 spare battery charger 10 19 power connection 10 20 ENS each pa TERI HIEMS 1 7 UBC battery insertion 10 30 VB uc nrc Es 1 7 10 5 USB charger cable 1 6 10 6 wall mounting bracket 1 7 10 5 accessory keyboard 1 6 NUN gegen atque KAGAD NAN NA KAG E SERE A C 4 ActiveSy
253. ey three times to produce the letter T Space and backspace functions Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights Press and release the ALPHA key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the ALPHA key again to return to the normal keypad functions Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions 2 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 1 28 Key Descriptions Continued Kk AAA Executes a selected item or function The default behavior of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications work properly create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer In default state produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries In function key state produces
254. f update supported by the mobile computer partitions and files The file system used by the mobile computer is the same as the file system used on a desktop computer A file is a unit of data that can be accessed using a file name and a location in the file system When a file is replaced only the contents of the previous file are erased The operating system must be running for a file to be updated so the IPL cannot perform individual file updates as it is a stand alone program that does not require the operating system to be running A typical partition is a group of files combined into a single partition that represents a specific area of storage Examples of partitions are the flash file systems such as Platform or Application Using the desktop computer comparison these partitions are roughly equivalent to a C or D hard disk drive In addition to the hard disk partitions some partitions are used for single items such as the operating system monitor or splash screen Again using a desktop computer comparison these partitions are roughly the equivalent of the BIOS or special hidden system files When a partition is updated all data that was previously in its storage region Is erased i e it is not a merge but rather 12 31 12 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG a replacement operation Typically the operating system is not running when partitions are update so IPL can perform partition updates
255. following order Wlatform Application Regmerge continues to look for reg files in these folders until all folders are checked This allows folders later in the list to override folders earlier in the list This way it is possible to override Registry changes made by the Platforms partitions folders Take care when using Regmerge to make Registry changes The DCP for MC9000w contains examples of reg files eo Regmerge only merges the reg files on cold boots The merge process is skipped during a warm boot Typically do not make modifications to registry values for drivers loaded before RegMerge However these values may require modification during software development Since these early loading drivers read these keys before RegMerge gets a chance to change them the mobile computer must be cold booted The warm boot does not re initialize the registry and the early loading driver reads the new registry values Do not use Regmerge to modify built in driver registry values or merge the same Registry value to two files in the same folder as the results are undefined 12 30 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG CopyFiles Windows CE expects certain files to be in the Windows folder residing in volatile storage Windows CE maintains the System Registry in volatile storage CopyFiles copies files from one folder to another on a cold boot Files can be copied from a non volatile partition Application or Platform
256. for any desired usage examples are location asset ID etc Any 15 character string may be entered Require Admin Privileges to Modify Settings Selecting this check box requires users to have administrative privileges in order to modify MobileDox settings Administrative privileges are validated using standard Windows authentication Communications 4 19 5 Use the PC IP Settings tab to modify the DNS and WINS identification settings of the cradle Status General Settings TCP IP Settings Port Settings IP Address ME Iv Use DHCP IP Address AS Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 172 31 1 1 DNS Address Use DHCP DNS 1 1 0 02 DNS 2 0 0 0 0 WINS NENS Address Use DHCP WINS 1 172 31 1 199 WINS 2 0 0 0 0 Figure 4 16 Cradle Settings Window TCP IP Settings Tab Table 4 2 Cradle Settings TCP IP Settings Fields EE NENNEN GN Use DHCP If check box is selected necessary information is retrieved from the DHCP Server If check box is not selected static configuration is used information needs to be entered IP Address The IP address that the MobileDox uses when communicating on the network oubnet Mask The subnet mask that the MobileDox uses when communicating on the network Gateway Address The IP address that the MobileDox uses to send non local IP network data DNS Address The IP address of a server s that can resolve Internet names into IP addr
257. formation on creating notes see Notes on page 9 13 When finished tap OK to return to the Calendar If you select Remind me in an appointment the mobile computer notifies you according to the options set in Start Settings Personal tab Sounds amp Notifications 9 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Using the Summary Screen When you tap an appointment in Calendar a summary screen appears Tap Edit to change the appointment Lunch w adam 12 00p 1 00p Mon 8 26 2002 Corner cafe View appointment details Remember portfolio View notes Edit Tools Tap to change appointment Figure 9 3 Appointment Summary Screen Creating Meeting Requests You can use Calendar to set up meetings with users of Outlook or Pocket Outlook The meeting notice is created automatically and sent either when you synchronize Inbox or when you connect to the e mail server Indicate how you want meeting requests sent by tapping Tools Options lf you send and receive e mail messages through ActiveSync select ActiveSync To schedule a meeting 1 Create an appointment 2 Inthe appointment details hide the input panel then tap Attendees 3 From the list of e mail addresses you ve entered in Contacts select the meeting attendees The meeting notice is created and placed in the Outbox folder For more information on sending and receiving meeting requests refer to Calendar Help and Inbox Help on the mobi
258. ful if auto exposure is enabled AE Frame Skip The default value is 1 Allowed values are 0 20 opecifies the available focal focus length in millimeters The default value is 221 mm Allowed values are 123mm and Focal Length mm 221mm ImgCap Tap the mgCap tab to define and or control how images are formatted i Symbol Image Cap 4r m2 12 28 e On Screen Keyboard Crop Settings X Y Width Height Lise Video VF Crop Settings Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Negative Image CaponRal Rotate Image H Figure C 12 Symbol Image Capture ImgCap Tab RFID Demo Program C 17 Table C 2 ImgCap Fields ma i n AA opecifies the file format in which to encapsulate image data The default value is JPEG Allowed values are JPEG BMP DIB and TIFF specifies the desired JPEG image quality as a percentage No assumption is made about the meaning of the range 1 99 It may be derived from the JPEG standard or it may be optimized for the device However 100 implies a loss less form of compression Applications are not encouraged to use this value since it results in poor compression as well as a format that is not currently widely supported in the industry A value of 0 means no specific quality is requested and the default is used JPEG File Size takes priority over JPEG Quality JPEG Quality is ignored if the current value of JPEG Size is not 0 JPEG Quality The default value is 75 Allowed values
259. g bookmarks notes and drawings e Search for text and look up definitions for words To switch to Microsoft Reader tap Start Programs Microsoft Reader Getting Books on the Device You can download book files from the Web Just visit a favorite eBook retailer and follow the Instructions to download the book files Use ActiveSync to download the files from the host computer to the mobile computer as described in the Read Me file in the MSReader folder Using the Library he Library is the Reader home page it displays a list of all books stored on the mobile computer To open the Library 1 On the Reader command bar tap Library 2 Ona book page tap the book title and then tap Library on the pop up menu Applications 9 33 3 loopen a book tap its title in the Library list box Tap to scroll through libra ry the Library list Tap to select a sort order The Best American Short Stories he Ghost Writer espino The Hundred Secret Senses Tap to open a book books you want to emma display in the list Another World A inter cf the Wolf Moon The Last Precinct BY On Writing E Settings Tap here to navigate to other parts of the Reader Passage to Juneau Help Of Love and Other Demons Return Stranger in a Strange Land Figure 9 24 Using Windows Library Reading a Book Each book consists of a cover page an optional table of contents and the pages of the book Navigation options a
260. g typing and recording displayed on the View menu Tap the Show Hide Toolbar icon on the command bar to show or hide each modes toolbar To change the zoom magnification tap View Zoom Select the percentage Select a higher percentage to enter text and a lower one to see more of the document If youre opening a Word document created on a host computer tap View Wrap to Window to see the entire document Typing Mode Use the input panel to enter typed text into a document See Entering Information on page 2 45 for more information To format or edit text select the text using the stylus instead of the mouse to drag across the text To search a document for the text you want tap Edit Find Replace Tap to return to the document Tap and hold to see a pop list changes are saved up menu of actions Attendees Format Action Items Paragraph dcin E Tap to change Recognize formatting options Alternates Use buttons to format text Tap to show or hide the toolbar Figure 9 16 Formatting Text Applications 9 23 Writing Mode In writing mode use the stylus to write directly on the screen Ruled lines are displayed as a guide and the zoom magnification increases to allow you to write more easily For more information see Writing on the Screen on page 2 48 3 Pocket Word uz 2 43 jok With Space button selected drag to insert space An arrow appears showing the space direction and size Torn in
261. ge Cap ya 12 19 3 File Demo Advanced Help Brightness Focus Exposure j AE Aim Gain Ab lamp E Figure C 10 Symbol Image Capture Capture Window 2 Ensure the imager is enabled he imager is enabled when a video image appears on the mobile computer s display To enable the imager press the trigger 3 Adjust enable the following features as needed e Adjust Brightness Exposure and Gain by moving the appropriate slide bar with the stylus e Select a focal focus length from the Focus drop down list Near enables a close focal length Far enables a distant focal length e Select the AF auto exposure check box to automatically adjust the exposure settings light time etc Selecting this feature is recommended RFID Demo Program C 13 When AE is enabled Brightness is enabled Exposure is disabled and Gain is disabled When AEF is disabled Brightness is disabled Exposure is enabled and Gain is enabled CO e Select the Aim laser aim check box to create a targeting pattern e Select the Lamp illumination check box to illuminate the target 4 fthe image to acquire requires additional editing tap Advanced Crop or Advanced Edit to edit the image on the display prior to acquiring the image See Crop on page C 28 and Edit on page C 29 for information about editing images 5 Aim the exit window at the image to capture and align the document or signature within the corners of the target 6
262. ge definition file In addition an apd extension is appended automatically THP This check box specifies whether the THP protocol is to be used to download files By default the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the FIP protocol WNMS This check box specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uploads a WNMS information file at the end of each version synchronization 7 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Misc 2 Tab his tab is used to configure various miscellaneous features Misc 1 Misc 2 Misc gt Wait Welcome Auto retry b Retry Delay lo In use Test Close Apps Field Description Auto retry This field is used to specify whether the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries if there is a failure during the synchronization process If this feature is enabled the AirBEAM Smart Client displays a popup dialog indicating the attempt of a retry The popup dialog is displayed for the number of seconds specified in the Retry Delay field The valid values for this field are 1 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries indefinitely 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client does not automatically retry 0 the AirBEAM Smart Client automatically retries up to the number of times specified Retry Delay This field specifies the amount of time in seconds that the AirBEAM Smart Client delays before automatically retrying after a synchronization failure In use Test This check box sp
263. gn Screen Adjust the touch screen if your device is not responding accurately to screen taps To do so tap the Align Screen button or press the Action hardware button Align Screen ClearType ClearType smoothes the edges of screen Fonts for many programs C Enable ClearType Mote You must soft reset your device For changes to take effect Adjust input options to improve speed and accuracy E Figure 3 49 Screen Window Tap Align Screen The align screen appears lap each target with the stylus and following the on screen messages 4 Select the Enable ClearType check box to enable easier reading of text in programs that support ClearType 5 Tap ok Settings 3 55 Symbol Settings Use the Symbol Settings window to set specific settings for the mobile computer Wakeups The mobile computer can be configured to wakeup from sleep mode 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Symbol Settings icon Wakeups tab 53 Symbol Settings lt 7 m2 12 09 ok Trigger Any Kev Touch Panel Touch Panel Wakeups System confio Figure 3 50 Symbol Settings Window Wakeups Tab 2 select the Trigger Any Key and or Touch Panel check box in the Power Off or Auto Off list box See Table 3 6 for a list of wakeup conditions settings 3 lapok Only the default Trigger and Any Key wakeup condition settings are retained EN after a cold boot However all settings are maintained after a warm boot
264. gy 6 7 Adaptive Frequency Hopping Adaptive Frequency Hopping AFH is a method of avoiding fixed frequency interferers AFH can be used with Bluetooth voice All devices in the piconet Bluetooth network must be AFH capable in order for AFH to work There is no AFH when connecting and discovering devices Avoid making Bluetooth connections and discoveries during critical 802 11b communications AFH for Bluetooth can be broken down into four main sections e Channel Classification A method of detecting an interference on a channel by channel basis or pre defined channel mask e ink Management Coordinates and distributes the AFH information to the rest of the Bluetooth network e Hop Sequence Modification Avoids the interference by selectively reducing the number of hopping channels e Channel Maintenance A method for periodically re evaluating the channels When AFH is enabled the Bluetooth radio hops around instead of through the 802 11b high rate channels AFH coexistence allows Symbol mobile computers to operate in any infrastructure The Bluetooth radio in this mobile computer operates as a Class 2 device power class The maximum output power is 2 5mW and the expected range is 32 8 feet 10 meters A definitive definition of ranges based on power class Is difficult to obtain due to power and device differences and whether one measures open space or closed office space It is not recommended to perform Bluetooth wireless
265. h the source Bitmap file and the destination HEX file 6 A check is performed and if there are no errors the partition hex files are created If the build fails the hex files are not be created and TCM displays an error message Two of the most common reasons for a build failure are e Files defined in the script can not be found This error can occur when the files referenced by the script are no longer stored on the development computer or the folders where they are stored were renamed e The total amount of flash memory space required by the script exceeds the image size lo correct this reduce the number of files in the partition or increase the size of the partition see Defining Script Properties on page 12 8 for more information about setting the image size appropriately Sending the Hex Image Once the hex file is built it can be downloaded to the mobile computer To load the hex files on to the mobile computer 1 Fordownloads using a serial connection connect the mobile computer to the development computer using the Single Slot Serial USB cradle or CAM 2 Pressand hold the left scan button or the scan trigger and the Power button simultaneously until the mobile computer resets into IPL Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 13 The mobile computer must be inserted in the cradle or attached to the CAM both with their appropriate power supplies connected to a power source for the mobile computer to reset into IPL CO 3
266. h Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG MSR 9000 The MSA 9000 application is designed to work with the snap on MSR This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs 1 Attach the MSR 9000 to the mobile computer see Attaching and Removing on page 10 22 with the appropriate power supply 2 To access the MSR 9000 application tap the MSR 9000 icon on the Test Applications window The MSA 9000 Swipe Card window appears File Help MSR x Please Swipe Card stat 24 Figure B 9 MSR 9000 Swipe Card Window 3 Swipe a magnetic stripe card The content on the card displays in the window File Help MSR Press OK to swipe ag OK oTRACK17676760707077 676760707077676760707 077676760707077676760 707077676760707315 Figure B 10 MSR 9000 Data Window Demo Program B 11 4 Tap OK to swipe another card 5 Tap X to close the application MSR Cameo The MSA 9000 Cameo application is designed to work with the snap on MSR The application is identical to the MSR 9000 however it uses a different driver to support a different type of MSR This sample application illustrates how an application should handle MSR inputs 1 Attach the MSR Cameo to the mobile computer see Attaching and Removing on page 10 22 with the appropriate power supply 2 lo access the MSR Cameo application tap the MSR Cameo icon on the Test Applications window The MSA Cameo Swipe Card windo
267. h either an AP or another networked computer 802 11 ESSID Populated with the name and WLAN identifier of the network connection The ESSID is the 802 11 Extended Service Set Identifier The ESSID is 32 character maximum string identifying the WLAN The ESSID assigned to the mobile computer is required to match the AP ESSID for the mobile computer to communicate with the AP Spectrum24 Configuration 5 7 Table 5 2 Mode Tab Fields Continued aT Remp Operating Mode select the operating mode from the Operating Mode drop down list Infrastructure Select nfrastructure to enable the mobile computer to transmit and receive data with an AP Infrastructure is the mobile computer default mode when Mobile Companion initially appears Ad Hoc Select Ad Hoc to enable the mobile computer to form its own local network where mobile computers communicate peer to peer without APs using a shared ESSID select the Long preamble check box if the mobile computer and its profile are using a long preamble when transmitting data A long preamble is approximately 8 bytes of the packet header attached to the packet prior to transmission Devices in Ad Hoc mode are required to use the same preamble length to interoperate The mobile computer initiating the Ad Hoc network sets the channel using the Channel drop down list used by each peer in the Ad Hoc network Country select the country of operation for the mobile computer from the Country drop down l
268. ha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal wud de N ulum See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps F 23 reunoaq enfe OSV GL 2u193 Apo YA ca coma 7T cama ejes ynejeg s Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values E 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal N lt x See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps 25 euroeq anjey OSV GL NN NENNEN ca 7T coma IT cama 7T Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values F 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 43 Key Keypad Configuration he 43 key configuration contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key see able E 3 for key functions and Table E 4 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include e 43 key functions e 43 key character map Figure E 2 43 Key Keypad Keypad Maps 27 Table E 3 43 K
269. hand to the current minutes Settings 3 37 6 losetthe date tap in the date field 7 Tap the down arrow to the right of the date field The calendar appears 4 March 2003 M T W T F 5 23 24 25 20 27 28 1 3 4 5 6 7 B8 10 ii i2 Mia 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 31 1 2 3 4 5 Today 6 13 03 Figure 3 29 Calendar 8 loselectthe month and year tap the arrows to the right or left of the month until the current month displays 9 Tap the day of the month The calendar disappears 10 Tap ok If you visit a particular time zone often set it as your Visiting time zone so that you can quickly see the correct date and time A clock displays on the Navigation bar To view the current date and time tap the ime icon to see today s date See Time Icon on page 2 40 for more information E i e FK aT il ime and Next Appointment Wednesday June 11 20 T21P Figure 3 30 Time and Next Appointment Message To switch from analog to digital clock display tap and hold the Time icon Select Analog or Digital 3 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Alarms You can use the mobile computer as a travel alarm clock by setting a wake up alarm 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Clock icon Alarms tab AF Settings Wake Up 5 ICI 5 Call Supervisor d silt wir s 10 00 AM E z Description gt sMTwTiers lt Description gt smr wrrs Time Edit Figure 3 31 C
270. he accessory The battery usually fully charges in less than four hours Stylus Use the mobile computer stylus for selecting items and entering information The stylus functions as d MOUSE Tap Touch the screen once with the stylus to press option buttons and open menu items Tap and Hold Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for that item On the pop up menu that appears tap the action you want to perform Drag Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images Drag in a list to select multiple items To remove the stylus Getting Started 1 13 Pull the stylus cord down and outward to remove the stylus Figure 1 5 Removing the Stylus To replace stylus Push the stylus back into the storage position The stylus automatically locks in place 1 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Strap he strap may be moved to either the left or right side of the mobile computer to suit user preferences To reposition the strap 1 2 3 4 5 Strap Cord Loop Strap Disconnect Disconnect the strap disconnect clip Open loop and slide the disconnect clip through the loop Slide the loop out of the connector post Repeat the procedure on the remaining connector to remove the strap Reverse the procedure to re attach the strap Two strap connectors are provided on the mobile computers main body The strap cord may be a
271. he 802 11 protocol an ESS ID allows facilities to limit which Access Points a mobile computer can communicate with It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The mobile computer can only communicate with Spectrum24 Access Points that have matching ESS IDs Ethernet communication port Allows a wired interface to a radio network An additional megabyte of non volatile memory for storing application and configuration files Flash memory is nonvolatile semi permanent storage that can be electronically erased in the circuit and reprogrammed Series 9000 mobile computers use Flash memory to store the operating system ROM DOS the mobile computer emulators and the Citrix ICA Client for DOS A TCP IP application protocol governing file transfer via network or telephone lines See TCP IP Frequency Hopping FTP Flash Memory Gateway Address Hard Reset Hopping Sequence Hz Host Computer IDE IEC Glossary GL 9 The use of a random sequence of frequency channels to achieve spread spectrum compliance Stations that use frequency hopping change their communications frequency at regular intervals A hopping sequence determines the pattern at which frequencies are changed Messages take place within a hop See Hopping Sequence and Spread Spectrum See File Transfer Protocol Flash memory is responsible for storing the system firmware and is non volatile If the system power is interrupted the data is not lost
272. he mobile computers amber charge LED located in the Indicator LED Bar see Figure 1 1 on page 1 3 shows the status of the battery charging in the mobile computer See Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charging status indications The amber spare battery charging LED on the cradle see Figure 10 4 on page 10 11 shows the status of the spare battery charging in the cradle See Table 10 1 for charging status indications Batteries usually charge in less than four hours Table 10 1 Spare Battery LED Charging Indicators Spare Battery LED on cradle Indication No spare battery in well spare battery not placed correctly cradle is not powered Fast Blinking Amber Error in charging check placement of spare battery slow Blinking Amber spare battery is charging solid Amber Charging complete 10 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Four Slot Ethernet Cradle This section describes how to set up and use a Four Slot Ethernet cradle Figure 10 6 with the mobile computer For cradle communication setup procedures see Fthernet Communication Setup on page 4 13 Power Port Ethernet Communication Port Figure 10 6 Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Accessories 10 15 The Four Slot Ethernet cradle has the following attributes e Provides 12VDC power for operating the mobile computer e Enables data communication between the mobile computer up to four and a host computer over an Ethernet network using a
273. he operating time before the battery is recharged Manual Power Saving Mode Allows you to select a performance level suited to intended operation There are six settings ranging from the Best Network Performance using the most battery power to Acceptable Network Performance using the least battery power A network performance description is displayed for each power range 2 Tap OK to implement power consumption changes for the mobile computer profile 5 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Status To view the status of the wireless network connection select Status from the Mobile Companion menu 1 Select the Signal tab to display a real time graph of the signal quality of the mobile computer to the associated AP Infrastructure Mode only The number of times the mobile computer has roamed to and from APs the current data rate and the network status are displayed Signal quality is an indicator of how clearly the adapter can hear the associated AP Missed Beacons ae Tamil Retries Signal Signal Quality Excellent Roaming Count 1 AP MAC Address 00 40 F5 42 64 04 Network status In range Transmit Rate 11 Mbps Signal Info IP Status Ping APs E Figure 5 19 Mobile Companion Signal Tab CO The Signal tab is view only and is not available if the current operating mode is Ad Hoc Table 5 9 Signal Fields Sa HUN Missed Beacons Displays the amount of beacons
274. he other device the Name the Bluetooth Device window appears 9 settings et d 10 31 Name the Bluetooth Device amp Enter a name For the bonded device Mame BONDED 1 m31 2 5 4 516 7 6 9 01 i l ab q w e r t y u i o p T CA Pla s d fjg h j k I z shift z x c v b n m 7 cuj i te Figure 6 8 Name the Bluetooth Device Window 9 In the Name text box edit the name of the other device if desired 10 Tap Finish The bonded device appears in the list Ey settings et 4 1042 ok Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d f g h k T shift z x c v b n m F pal A hi Figure 6 9 Bluetooth Bonded Devices Window Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 11 Renaming a Bonded Device If it is necessary to rename a bonded device it can be done from the Bluetooth Bonded Devices window 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Bonded Devices tab 2 lap and hold the device to rename In the pop up menu select Rename AF Settings e 461103 ok Bluetooth To create a new bond tap New Tap and hold an existing bond For more options CIA a na aY Rename Mode Bonded Devices E Figure 6 10 Rename Device Selection Dialog Box 3 The Rename bonded device window appears AF Settings e 461113 GD Rename bonded device Nam
275. hecks and compares package version so that only updated packages are loaded AirBEAM Smart resides on radio equipped client devices and allows them to request download and install software as well as to upload files and status data Both download and upload of files can be accomplished in a single communications session The ability to transfer software over a radio network can greatly reduce the logistical efforts of client software management In an AirBEAM Smart system a network accessible host server acts as the storage point for the software transfer The AirBEAM Smart Client uses the industry standard FTP or TFTP file transfer protocols to check the host system for updates and if necessary to transfer updated software t For more detailed information about AirBEAM Smart refer to the AirBEAM Smart Windows CE Client Product Reference Guide p n 72 63060 xx AirBEAM Package Builder In a typical distributed AirBEAM system software to be transferred is organized into packages In general an AirBEAM package is simply a set of files that are assigned attributes both as an entire package and as individual component files The package is assigned a version number and the transfer occurs when an updated version is available An AIrBEAM package can optionally contain developer specified logic to be used to install the package Installation logic is typically used to update client device flash images or radio firmware Examples of co
276. hing other than the default if data payload size is larger than 128 bytes For further information on this structure refer to the Microsoft Help GetBA _1 53594D421722 amp pp device Set your slave s BDADDR here nindex 8 This must be the same as the COM port number For devices that expose the stream interface the drivers are DLL files Each driver is initialized by a call to the RegisterDevice function The Device Manager calls this function on behalf of the driver However applications can load their own special purpose stream interface in which case they also call this function to register the driver h RegisterDevice TU COM nIndex _T btd dll DWORD amp pp if h NULL Success hComPort InitSerial TEXT COM8 CBR 115200 Init port if hComPort NULL Failure ifdef DEBUG Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 41 LogData _I Failed to open Comport trying again endit hComPort InitSerial TEXT COM8 CBR 115200 Init port j Perform serial operations here j ifdef DEBUG else Failure LogData _I Failed to register Comport device j endit SetCursor LoadCursor NULL NULL Clear the wait cursor End KKXXKXXXXKXXXXKXKKXKXKKXKXXXXKXXXXKXXKXKXKKXKXXKXXXXXXKXXKXKKXKXKXXKXXX FUNCTION GetBA PROTOTYPE int GetBA WCHAR pp BT ADDR pba PURPOSE Form the BDADDR in a way the PORTEMUPortParams structure understands
277. hold the message you want to retrieve On the pop up menu tap Mark for Download The icons in the Inbox message list indicates message Status You specify downloading preferences when you set up the service or select synchronization options You can change them at any time e Change options for Inbox synchronization using Activesync options For more information refer to Activesync Help Applications 9 19 e Change options for direct e mail server connections in Inbox on the mobile computer Tap Tools Options On the Accounts tab tap the account you want to change Tap and hold the account and select Delete to remove it Creating E mail Messages To create an e mail message 1 Tap New 2 Inthe Jo field enter an e mail or SMS address of one or more recipients separating each with a semicolon or select a name from the contact list by tapping the Address Book icon All e mail addresses entered in the e mail fields in Contacts appear in the Address Book Tap to send the message Tap to show or hide the complete header New Edit My Text FF c E Tap to show hide the recording tool Tap to display the Address Book Tap to insert common messages Figure 9 14 Creating a Message 3 Enter the message lo enter preset or frequently used messages tap My Text and select a message 4 Tap Send when you re finished If you re working offline the message is transferred to the Outbox folder and sent the next time you synchro
278. ial transport method the Baud Rate Menu appears Baud Rate Menu 115200 5 600 30400 19200 9600 Previous Top Figure 12 9 Baud Rate Menu 8 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select the appropriate baud rate then press Enter 9 If you selected the Wireless S24XX transport method the Address Configuration menu appears Address Configuration DHCP EShell MXIP DHCP Previous Top Figure 12 10 Address Configuration Menu 12 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG For wireless downloads the ESSID partition must be loaded with the correct ESSID CO 10 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select DHCP then press Enter 11 The Download File menu appears Download File Download Cancel show Parms Previous Top Figure 12 11 Download File Menu Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 19 12 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Show Parms to verify the file to download Press Enter to display the Parameters screen Download Partition Name via Device Parameters Press Enter to Continue Figure 12 12 Parameters Screen Partition Name is the name of the partition selected in the Initial Program Loader menu Device Parameters is the device selected in the Select Transport menu with the baud rate for serial downloads or DHCP address for wireless downloads 13 Press Enter to return to the Download File menu 12 20 MC9000 G with Windows M
279. ialization proceeds in all modes Warm Boot When a warm boot is performed on the mobile computer Bluetooth returns to the last state after initialization Suspend When the mobile computer suspends Bluetooth turns off When the mobile computer is placed in suspend mode the Bluetooth radio mode powers off and the piconet Bluetooth connection is dropped see Table 13 2 on page 13 9 for more information When the mobile computer resumes it take approximately 10 seconds for the Bluetooth radio driver to re initialize the radio EO Resume When the mobile computer resumes Bluetooth turns on if it was on prior to suspend Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 5 Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode Off 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Bluetooth icon Mode tab 5 er 46155 o Bluetooth C n Bluetooth will locate and connect En bonded devices ap ctr Bluetooth will nat search Far bonded devices and no device can connect to your device KI Discoverable All devices can Find and connect to our device to create a bond Made Bonded Devices Devices E Figure 6 1 Bluetooth Window Mode Tab 2 Select the Off radio button to turn the Bluetooth radio transmitter off 3 Tab ok to return to the Connections tab or 1 Tap wt on the navigation bar at the top of the screen to display the Connectivity dialog box Pl Tap to turn Bluetooth on and off My Connection 1233456 PC connection Settings
280. ic to use the AP power level Automatic is the default mode for mobile computers operating in Infrastructure mode oelect Power Plusto set the mobile computer transmission power one level higher than the level set for the AP Spectrum24 Configuration 5 21 Table 5 8 Power Tab Fields Continued id es In Ad Hoc mode There are five transmission power options select Maximum power to set the mobile computer to the highest transmission power level Select Maximum power when operating in highly reflective environments and areas where other devices could be operating nearby Additionally use the maximum power level when attempting to communicate with devices at the outer edge of a coverage area select 50 25 or 10 to set the transmit power level to that percentage of the maximum power level select Minimum power to set the mobile computer to the lowest transmission power level Use the minimum power level when communicating with other devices in very close proximity Additionally select minimum power in instances where little or no radio interference from other devices is anticipated Automatic Power Saving switches to Best Network Performance when an AC power supply is detected If a battery Mode Is used an appropriate setting between Best Network Performance and Acceptable Network Performance is automatically chosen based on a real time analysis of network usage The Automatic Power Saving Mode is the default setting and extends t
281. ice E Figure 6 14 Beam Window 2 lap the Receive all incoming beams check box to clear the box 3 lapok Ensure the Receive all incoming beams check box is checked to receive all Incoming beams Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 15 Accepting a Bond 1 Ensure that the Bluetooth device is turned on and in discoverable mode 2 When prompted to bond with the other device tap OK A Firefly wants to bond with your device over Bluetooth Add Firefly to your bonded Cancel YA devices list Figure 6 15 Accept a Bond Request Window 3 Inthe Device PIN text box enter the same PIN that was entered on the device requesting the bond The PIN must be between 1 and 16 characters ES ME EFL Enter Device Bluetooth PIN amp Enter a Bluetooth PIN of your choice to bond With Firefly The same PIM must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how bo answer ko PIN requests Deep 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjU h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja ji te Figure 6 16 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN Window 4 Tap Next 6 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 Inthe Name text box edit the name of the device requesting the bond if desired 9 settings PET ETUR Name the Bluetooth Device P Enter a name For the bonded device Mame BONDED 1 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
282. icroAP Tap the Enable MicroAP check box to support MicroAP operations Tap the 7 or 2 Megabit Base Rate check boxes to specify the data rate within the MicroAP cell A MicroAP and the mobile computer are required to use the same data rate Frequency Hop Settings Tap the Frequency Hop Settings drop down list to establish the Hop Set Hop Sequence and DTIM Delay to be used within the MicroAP cell Encryption Tab Spectrum24 Configuration 5 41 Use the Encryption tab for configuring encryption settings The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security The firmware supports Open System and Shared Key 40 bit Encryption algorithms E Symbol Spectrum2 Y a 2 10 ok Micro AP Authentication Options S Open System Algorithm no encryption a Shared Kev Algorithm O Both Algorithms Mobile Unit Authentication Options Encryption Algorithm Open System no encryption Shared Encryption Keys it Wu 2021222324 O 3 O Reset Kevs Mobile Unit Encryption IP Con 4 F E Figure 5 31 Encryption Tab Table 5 15 Encryption Tab Fields DIN Remp MicroAP Authentication A MicroAP can use Open System Algorithm Shared Key Algorithm or both If Shared Key Encryption Algorithm shared Encryption Key is enabled and Open System is not the MicroAP grants access to adapters that have shared Key enabl
283. ifferent locations to connect to a Spectrum24 network Creating different profiles is a good way of having pre defined mobile computer operating parameters available for use in various Spectrum24 network environments select Find WLANs from the Mobile Companion menu to locate the APs in the area The Mobile Companion window displays the available WLAN networks Ei Network et 4 1042 ok Available WAN Networks Connect Clase E Figure 5 2 Available WLAN Networks 5 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 1 Selectan available WLAN network from the list box 2 Tap Connect The Mode tab appears ar aff 12 01 pum ive Network Wireless LAN Mode Profile Marne 123456 602 11 ESSID 123456 Operating Mode ME ERI Pm ive Network Wireless LAN Mode Profile Mame 23456 602 11 ESSID 23456 Operating Mode Infrastructure d Hac Country USA Long preamble Channel Number E E Infrastructure Mode Ad Hoc Mode Figure 5 3 Mobile Companion Mode Tab Mode On the Mode tab enter Profile Name 802 11 ESSID Operating Mode and Country settings Table 5 2 Mode Tab Fields Ra Remi Profile Name Populated with the name and WLAN identifier of the network connection You can change the Profile Name if desired Use the Profile Name field to enter the name of the mobile computer profile used to transmit wit
284. igure 10 39 Mounted Single Slot Cradle With Power Connection Accessories 10 51 Installing the Wall Mount Bracket To install the wall mount bracket for use with one or two single slot cradles or four slot chargers place the smaller surface of the bracket against the wall or vertical support structure and secure with four 1 4 screws use two of the three screw holes in each row Insert screws n EN e gt Insert screws Figure 10 40 Wall Mounting Bracket Mounting Screws If using the bracket and slide with a four slot cradle secure a second bracket to the wall next to the first aligning the horizontal screw holes on the second with those of the first Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger To attach the shelf slide to the wall mount bracket for use with one single slot cradle or four slot battery charger 1 Placethe slide on the bracket aligning the larger pan head screw holes in the slide with the center two screw holes on the bracket 10 52 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 secure the slide to the bracket by inserting the two pan head screws provided from below the bracket up through the brackets screw holes and then through the slide s pan head screw holes Insert screws from below Figure 10 41 Attaching One Shelf Slide Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers To attach the shelf slide to
285. ime Touch Calibrate Printer Settings Comm Settings Display Settings Audio Settings Figure B 22 Persist CO Not all options support Permanent Persistence Battery Tap Battery on the Control Panel to view the mobile computer s battery status ES CtlPanel Example 4 m2 10 41 3 Power Source AL Power Battery Type Lithium ION Battery Charge 100 96 Battery Level Good Backup voltage 4300 Backup level Good ox v 7 gt lt lence File Help EZ Figure B 23 Battery Window Demo Program B 21 Power Settings select Power Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use for the mobile computer s devices ES CtlPanel Example 4r 4 10 42 e Devices Value n Backlight Bluetooth serial Display Keyboard Keylight Power Key Resource Coordinato Real Time Clock Figure B 24 Power Settings Window Tap each device listed to select the appropriate settings where applicable Scroll through the device values to select the appropriate value eo Backlight settings bkl1 can be used to determine which Activities wake the backlight Trigger Touch Keyboard User If Touch or Keyboard activities are turned off Value No the User activity must also be turned off B 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Bluetooth Settings select Bluetooth Settings on the Control Panel to view version information for the mobile computer s Bluetooth rad
286. in the 2 4 GHz Industry ocientific and Medical ISM band 802 15 1 Bluetooth wireless technology is specifically designed for short range 30 feet 10 meters communications and low power consumption Mobile computers with Bluetooth capabilities can exchange information e g files appointments and tasks with other Bluetooth enabled devices such as phones printers access points and other mobile computers In addition a dial up modem connection can be created between the Bluetooth mobile computer and a Bluetooth enabled phone The Bluetooth phone can then be used as a modem symbol mobile computers with Bluetooth wireless technology use the Microsoft Bluetooth stack To program Bluetooth within the mobile computer refer to the Microsoft Embedded Visual C help Turning the Bluetooth Radio Mode On and Off Turn off the Bluetooth radio mode to save power or if entering an area with radio restrictions e g an airplane When the mode is off the mobile computer can not be seen or connected to by other Bluetooth devices Turn on the Bluetooth radio mode to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices within range Communicate only with Bluetooth radios in close proximity To achieve the best battery life in mobile computers with multiple radios turn off the radios that are not being used This can be accomplished via the DevicePowerNotify API refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers or via the 9000 Demo Control Panel
287. inal MCS000w v1 0 64M Y Partition Data Options Script File Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages4MC3000w1y0 15T CMS cripts Browse Flash File Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages4MC3000w v0 14Flash Folders Browse Hex File Build Path C Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MCSOO0w vO0 1 5Hex Images Browse Figure 12 3 Script Properties Window Options Tab 9 Set the paths for the Script File Flash File and Hex File Build 10 Click OK Creating the Script for the Hex Image On start up TCM displays the 7CM window with the Script window and File Explorer window pointing to the following directory Program Files Symbol Device Configuration PackagesMC9000w WO TM CMScripts The Script window directory pane displays two partitions Platform and Application Depending on the type of flash chip the number of partitions may change Files can be added to each of the partitions TCM functionality includes e Opening a new or existing script file e Copying components to the script window e Saving the script file 12 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Opening a New or Existing Script A script file can be created from scratch or based on an existing script file Click Create to create a new script or click Open to open an existing script for example a script provided in the DCP for MC9000w If an existing script is opened a
288. ings Figure 3 34 Contrast Window 2 Use the stylus to drag the slider to adjust the contrast on the screen 3 Tap ok to exit Settings 3 41 Memory Use the Memory window to adjust RAM allocation view storage card memory usage and stop active programs Main To temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Memory icon Main tab e PER Eok Memory is managed automatically To temporarily adjust the allocation of storage and program memory move Ehe slider Total main memory 61 60 MB Storage Program Ja 1 1 1 1 1 1 k 1 1 Allocated 30 80 MB Allocated 30 80 MB Inuse 1 55 MB Inuse 11 40 MB Free 29 25 MB Free 19 40 MB Main Storage Card Running Programs ES Remove programs ko free storage memory Find large Files using storage memory Figure 3 35 Memory Window Main Tab 2 To adjust RAM allocation move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If you don t have enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the mobile computer is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory 3 lapok Resetting the mobile computer can make additional storage or program memory available If you continue to experience memory problems reset the mobile computer Co Programs supplied with the mobile computer are located in ROM and remain after a cold boot Programs you install are located in RAM and nee
289. ings on the mobile computer and remove programs Chapter 4 Communications explains how to use Microsoft ActiveSync for communication between the mobile computer and host computer Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Configuration describes how to configure the Spectrum24 wireless connection Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology explains how to use the B uetooth wireless technology radio mode Chapter 7 AirBEAM Smart explains how to set up the mobile computer to synchronize with a server using the AirBEAM Client and AirBEAM otaging applications Chapter 8 Rapid Deployment Client explains how to use the Rapid Deployment Client to facilitate software downloads to the mobile computer from a Mobility Services Platform MSP Console s FIP server Chapter 9 Applications describes how to use the applications installed on the mobile computer Chapter 10 Accessories describes the accessories available for the mobile computer and how to setup power connections and battery charging capabilities where applicable Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC provides instructions for installing the Device Configuration Package DCP for MC9000w the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for eVC4 and the Symbol Mobility Developer Kit SMDK for NET on the host computer Chapter 12 Configuring the Mobile Computer describes how to install and use the Terminal Configuration Manager TCM and Initial Program Loader IPL Chapter 13 Maintenance amp
290. io ng CtPanel Example E 11 32 Dx Value Pass SymBth Ver 1 8 H W Yer 00000733 F W Ver 00000004 BD Addr DDADFBABDIA2 En Ext Ver 1 8 aff e feas File Help Figure B 25 Bluetooth Window Date and Time Tap Date and Time on the Control Panelto change the date and time The Date and Time window appears ES CtlPanel Example z m2 11 40 e Figure B 26 Date and Time Window Demo Program B 23 To change the time tap the Time field and up the up and down arrows to change the value To change the date tap the down arrow in the Date field A calendar box appears Select the month and then select the day ES CtlPanel Example 4 4 11 42 XO Thursday October 16 2003 4 October 7003 b SM TWTEF 5 28 29 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 B8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Mk 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Today 10 16 03 Cancel Figure B 27 Date Selection Touch Calibrate select Touch Calibrate to re align the window Press ESC to exit align screen Tap the target firmly and accurately at each location on the screen The target will continue to move until the screen is aligned Figure B 28 Align Window B 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Printer Settings oelect Printer Settings on the Control Panel to specify the settings to use for printing ES CtlPanel Example 4r 4 11 46 ES Printer Parameter Version Info CA M
291. ions occur Tap the icon to display the multiple notification icons E Start Tap here En set owner inForm ing ap Figure 2 17 Multiple Notifications Icon Selecting Programs Operating 2 43 To select a program tap Start Programs then the program name To select which programs appear on the Program menu see Chapter 3 Settings e 42631 ES ES start E E Today Jil 9000 Demo ty ActiveSync f8 Contacts 8 Inbox 4 Internet Explorer LE 5 Rapid Deployment Client Tasks Gi Windows Media fa Programs Settings En Find 2 Help PP E MEX E Games AirBEAM Calculator gt Y 4 File Explorer Microsoft MSN Reader Messenger o Bd y Pictures Pocket Excel Pocket MSN Mo E Pocket Rapid Terminal Word Deployment Services Client Client Figure 2 18 Start Menu a0 some programs have abbreviated labels for check boxes and drop down list To see the full label hold the stylus on the label Drag the stylus off the label so that the command is not carried out 2 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Using Pop up Menus With pop up menus you can quickly choose an action for an item For example use the pop up menu in the contact list to delete a contact make a copy of a contact or send an e mail message to a contact The actions in the pop up menus vary from program to program To access a pop up menu hold the stylus on the item you want to
292. iously scanned data Tap Exit to close the application A confirmation window displays Are you sure Tap Yes to exit or No to return to the Rapid Deployment window Note If the application is exited prior to scanning all required bar codes any scanned data collected up to that point is lost Rapid Deployment Client 8 5 Scanning RD Bar Codes When the mobile computer scans and successfully decodes a single or multiple RD bar codes the data encoded in the bar code can e Reset the mobile computers connection profile A connection profile is a set of Mobile Companion parameters that the mobile computer uses to access the wireless network e Initiate downloads of one or more software packages from an FIP server to the mobile computer Currently RD only recognizes AirBEAM software packages See Chapter 7 AirBEAM Smart for more information ae To scan an RD bar code 1 Obtain the appropriate RD bar code s from the MSP Administrator 2 Launch the RD application on the mobile computer by tapping Start Rapid Deployment Client Or Start Programs Rapid Deployment Client icon The Rapid Deployment window displays j Rapid Deployment q 6 46 ok EA mx 1 14 ok Please scan all of the bar codes Please scan all of the bar codes Waiting Bar codes left to scan 19010 11 012 Bar codes left to scan Waiting Ready to Scan Ready to Scan No Bar Codes Left to Scan Bar Codes 1 10 11
293. is downloaded to the mobile computer you must connect to the ISP or network to view the content For more information on synchronization refer to ActiveSync Help on the host computer Creating Mobile Favorites If you are using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 or later on the host computer you can download mobile favorites Synchronizing mobile favorites downloads Web content to the mobile computer so you can view Web pages while disconnected from the ISP and host computer Use the Internet Explorer plug in installed with ActiveSync to create mobile favorites 1 In Internet Explorer on the host computer click Tools Create Mobile Favorite 2 lochange the link name enter a new name in the Name field 3 If desired select a desired update schedule in Update 4 Click OK Internet Explorer downloads the latest version of the Web page to the host computer Applications 9 37 5 lodownload the pages linked to the mobile favorite you just created in Internet Explorer on the host computer right click the mobile favorite then click Properties On the Download tab specify the number of links deep you want to download To conserve mobile computer memory only go one level deep 6 synchronize the mobile computer and host computer Mobile favorites stored in the Mobile Favorites folder in Internet Explorer are downloaded to the mobile computer If you did not specify an update schedule in step 3 you must manually download content to keep
294. iscoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the mobile computer In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on 5 On the File window tap Tap to send to the Bluetooth device receiving the file s Tap Pending to cancel 6 The mobile computer processes and sends the file s Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 23 Bluetooth Communications To use a phone that has Bluetooth capabilities as a modem for the mobile computer create a Bluetooth modem connection on the mobile computer and send information to the phone using Bluetooth The phone relays the information over the phone line and sends back to the mobile computer any information that was requested over the connection Once a modem connection is created to the Bluetooth phone it can be reused Prior to creating a connection ensure the following e Bluetooth phone is turned on e Bluetooth phone is discoverable Some phones may also need to be pairable in order to accept a bonding request For more information refer to the phone documentation e Mobile computers and phone s Bluetooth radios are turned on e Mobile computer and phone are within range of each other 30 feet 10 meters Dial up to the Network Complete the following steps to create a new Bluetooth connection Before setting up dial up networking obtain dial up information and other necessary settings for the office network or ISP 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Co
295. ist This ensures the mobile computer is using country code information compatible with the country code data used by the associated AP Authentication select the Authentication tab to configure server based authentication Select one of the following Authentication options from the Authentication drop down list None Default setting when authentication is not required on the network The client adapter does not use any authentication scheme when Open System is selected on the Encryption tab Kerberos see Table 5 3 LEAP see Table 5 4 EAP TLS see Table 5 5 PEAP see Table 5 5 5 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG EF Network eo d 2 29 Authentication Prompt For Username Password at Reset Connect E Time Resume KDC krbtgt Kerberos Options O Atihh mm Add Mode Authentication Encryption IP col gt Ej Kerberos Authentication Credential Caching Settings Kerberos Options Figure 5 4 Mobile Companion Authentication Tab Kerberos Table 5 3 Authentication Tab Fields Kerberos Kerberos Kerberos is a different form of 128 bit data security An adapter is required to have its see Figure 5 4 request for access point resources authenticated with a Kerberos server before the server permits the access point to transmit and receive data with the associated adapter When Kerberos is selected the KDC and Realm e
296. ith Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG CO Before communicating through an Ethernet connection create a partnership between the mobile computer and the host computer via a USB connection see Setting up a Partnership on page 4 5 for detailed instructions DHCP Server Configuration If you use a DHCP server to distribute IP addresses and other network parameters the server setup should include the following CO IP address pool 1 or 5 IP address per cradle Router gateway address One or more DNS server addresses One or more WINS server addresses oubnet mask To assign the initial cradle IP address you can either use a DHCP server as shown above or use the MobileDox Cradle Manager see nstalling MobileDox Cradle Manager on page 4 13 The DHCP server is the preferred method Cradle Configuration The MobileDox Cradle Manager allows you to setup the Device IP Address and modify cradle settings See nstalling MobileDox Cradle Manager on page 4 13 for instructions to download and install the software See Figure 10 7 on page 10 15 for instructions on Four Slot Ethernet cradle connections Setting the Device IP Address By default the cradle uses DHCP to obtain its IP address However if DHCP fails the Cradle Manager can assign an IP address This is used if the cradle is connected to the network but fails to appear in MobileDox Enter the hardware device MAC address to locate the cradle and assign
297. k Recognizer 2 Write a letter in the left side of the box or a number in the right side using special character strokes New Edit Tools d Figure 2 23 Block Recognizer When you write a letter it is converted to typed text on the screen For specific instructions on using Block Recognizer with Block Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area or see Chapter A Block Recognizer Using the Letter Recognizer To use Letter Recognizer 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then Letter Recognizer 2 48 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 Write letters or numbers in the writing area just as you would on paper Write capital letters in the left side of the box numbers in the right side and lower case letters in the center Pl New Edit Tools E 4 FAE Figure 2 24 Letter Recognizer When you write a letter it is converted to typed text on the screen For specific instructions on using Letter Recognizer with Letter Recognizer open tap the question mark next to the writing area Using the Transcriber To use Transcriber 1 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel button then ranscriber 2085 7x New Edit Tools E Figure 2 25 Transcriber 2 Write anywhere on the screen When you write anywhere on the screen Transcriber changes the written characters to typed characters For specific instructions on using Transcriber with Transcriber open
298. k box To stop synchronization of that information clear its check box 4 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 9 Select Next The New Partnership Setup Complete mn Poor New Partnership N X Setup Complete You are now ready to start exchanging information between your mobile device and this computer Upon exiting this wizard Microsoft ActiveSync will open and If your device is a quest click Explore on the toolbar and start exploring your device If your device has a partnership synchronization starts Please wait until synchronization is complete before using your device Click Finish to exit this wizard Back Cancel Help Figure 4 6 Setup Complete Window 10 Select Finish The Microsoft ActiveSync window appears showing the connection status and the data synchronized 44 Microsoft ActiveSync a 150 x File View Tools 3 o Pocket PC2003 Connected Synchronized Information Type Status ica Favorites Synchronized Figure 4 7 ActiveSync Connected Window During the first synchronization information stored on the host computer is copied to the mobile computer When the copy is complete and all data is synchronized the mobile computer can be disconnected from the host computer Communications 4 9 The first Activesync operation must be performed with a local direct connection To retain partnerships after a cold boot capture partnership r
299. k into the audio connector on the top of the mobile computer Ensure that the mobile computer s volume is set appropriately before putting the headset on When a headset is plugged into the jack the speaker is muted Figure 2 7 Using a Headset Operating 2 33 Today Screen When you turn on the mobile computer for the first time each day or after 4 hours of inactivity the Today screen appears You can also display it by tapping Start Today On the Today screen you can see important information for the day Tap to switch to Tap to change volume or mute all sounds a program Tap to change the date and time Tap to open an item The day at a glance ap to create a new item mp to view connection status Figure 2 8 Today Screen The Today screen may vary depending on the mobile computer configuration The Today screen can be customized Tap Start Settings Today icon Use the Appearance tab to customize the background and the tems tab to change the list and order of items that appear on the screen 2 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Using the Navigation Bar and Command Bar The navigation bar at the top of the screen displays the active program various status icons see Table 2 8 and current time It also allows you to select programs and close screens Use the command bar task tray at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs The command bar includes menu name
300. kage The AirBEAM license key file contains a unique key and a customer specific banner that is displayed when the AirBEAM Smart Client version synchronization logic is invoked Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client 1 Tap Start Programs AirBEAM Smart Client The AirBEAM Smart CE window appears 2 Tap File Configure The AirBEAM configuration window appears Packagesil Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 5tat BA 2 22 em Figure 7 1 AirBEAM Configuration Window The configuration window is used to view and edit AirBEAM Smart Client configurations This dialog box has six tabs that you can modify Packages 1 Packages 2 Server Misc 1 Misc 2 and Misc 3 Packages 1 Tab his tab is used to specify the package name of the first four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server Description Package name of the first of eight packages This is an optional field Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 Package name of the second of eight packages This is an optional field Package name of the third of eight packages This is an optional field Package name of the fourth of eight packages This is an optional field AIrBEAM Smart Packages 1 Packages d gt Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 Package 4 oO No inadverte
301. l Communication Setup 4 9 setting Up a Connection on the Mobile Computer 4 9 setting Up a Connection on the Host Computer 4 11 Ethernet Communication Setup 4 13 Installing MobileDox Cradle Manager 4 13 InstallingeConnect 4 14 Host Computer Configuration 4 15 DHCP Server Configuration 4 16 ESO AA 4 16 A Ls cedo apt CURRERE dd pod Oa EE bcd dr d da 4 21 Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network 4 21 Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Configuration A e E EE 5 3 Mobile COmpanion 5 4 mnang P TP 5 5 Du d r m 5 6 AA 5 7 A AA RE 5 16 IF COTO acer odo aci e Sra A 5 18 FH sra APP A PA Es 5 20 sco A H ECTPPCCPREREPCT aces 5 22 Be C tod iene ost aoe das TL TIT 5 28 EOS POES AA bt brin A 5 31 SANA NG qusc eie d icr CER PEE NU RERO ERE RUE ROC AG 5 31 Creating a New Profile 5 31 DeletingaProfile 5 31 catla AA 5 32 Using LEAP for Wireless Network Security 5 32 Configuring Advanced Password Options 5 32 Cache the Password 5 32 Cache
302. lation package Any upgrades must be obtained from Symbol This partition Is mandatory for the mobile computer e Splash Screen a bitmap smaller than 16 Kb and limited to 8 bits per pixel is displayed as the mobile computer cold boots To download a customized screen to display see Creating a Splash Screen on page 12 27 Configuring the Mobile Computer 8 bits per pixel only applies to splash screen images Once Windows CE is running the color density is 16 bits per pixel CO e PL This program interfaces with the host computer and allows downloading via cradle or serial cable any or all of the partitions listed above as well as updated versions of IPL Use caution downloading updated IPL versions incorrect downloading of an IPL causes permanent damage to the mobile computer IPL is mandatory for the mobile computer e Partition Table Identifies where each partition is loaded in the mobile computer Downloading Partitions to the Mobile Computer TCM is used to specify a hex destination file for each partition and download each file to the mobile computer This download requires a program loader stored on the mobile computer The mobile computer comes with a program loading utility Initial Program Loader IPL stored in the mobile computer s write protected flash IPL IPL allows the user to upgrade the mobile computer with software updates and or feature enhancements Partition Update vs File Update There are two types o
303. le computer Applications 9 7 Contacts Contacts maintains a list of associates and friends so you can easily locate information at home or on the road Using Bluetooth or an infrared IR port if available you can share Contacts information with other users oelect the category of contacts you want displayed in the list Tap and enter part of a name to quickly find it in the list Tap to see additional phone numbers and e mail addresses Tap to display or edit the Create Copy contact details Delete Contact Barr Adam 205 555 1212 w Bready Rich rich proseware e Tap and hold to display a Send E mail to Contact pop up menu of actions Beam Contact New View Tools Tap to create a new contact Figure 9 4 Contact Application G0 To change the way information is listed tap Tools Options To create a contact 1 Tap Start Contacts to open the application 9 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 6 Tap New Tap to return to the contact list the contact is saved automatically Job title Department Company Work tel Work Fax work addr Scroll to see more fields Deis Notes Notes is a good place for maps and directions Figure 9 5 Creating a Contact Using the input panel enter a name and other contact information Scroll down to see all fields To assign the contact to a category scroll to and tap Categories Select a ca
304. leaved 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 MSI EAN 8 EAN 13 UPCA UPCE UPC EAN supplementals Coupon Code Trioptic 39 Webcode TLC39 Composite AB Composite C Micro PDF 417 PDF 417 Macro PDF 417 Macro Micro PDF 417 OR Code RSS Expanded RSS Limited RSS 14 Data Matrix Maxi Code US Postnet US Planet UK 4 state Australian 4 state Canadian 4 state Japanese 4 state Dutch Kix To be supported at a later date Go to http software symbol com for a list of the latest supported symbologies Specifications D 7 Table D 2 Technical Hardware Specifications Continued MC9000 G Series may include the following additional embedded radio capabilities 802 11b WLAN WLAN connectivity IEEE 802 11b Direct sequence topology Max data rate 11 Mbps Antenna Internal dual element supports spatial diversity Bluetooth WPAN WPAN Connectivity IEEE 802 15 Bluetooth Class 2 Encryption support Max data rate 1 Mbps Antenna Internal 802 11b WLAN standard internal antenna in MC906R G RFID mobile computers Bluetooth WPAN not supported in MC906R G RFID mobile computers D 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Modem Module Table D 3 Environmental Parameters and Technical Hardware Specifications Asynchronous character format Up to 10 bits including data start stop and parity bits Asynchronous data rates Transmission rate fallback through 300 bps Compatible public switched n
305. lect the files to download and the device to receive the files To load a device the status must be Active Click Download to begin the operation During download the Downloading screen on mobile computer displays the Device Status and a progress bar When complete Device Status displays Result was Success or in the case of an error the cause of the error On completion press Enter to return to the IPL menu to select the next partition to download To exit IPL select the System Reset item from the IPL menu see Figure 12 7 on page 12 13 12 21 12 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG TCM Error Messages TCM validates the cells in the partition table when the Execute button is clicked Cells highlighted in red contain an error Partition loading is disabled until all errors are corrected Table 12 3 TCM Error Messages Failed to build images flash file system DLL not loaded system Reinstall TCM or recover the DLL Failure finding directory xxx Failure adding system file to Build process failed because TCM failed to add a certain system file to the disk image Image INVALID PATH The path for the image file to build is not valid Nothing Selected To Build In the Config Build window no item is selected to build Illegal ESS ID In the Build ESSID Partition window no ESS ID was entered or the ESS ID entered was illegal Disk Full TCM failed to create Hex image file at the selected path
306. led keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 5 28 Key Keypad The 28 key keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and function keys The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computer s keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 1 on page 2 6 for key and button descriptions and Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions Figure 2 1 28 Key Keypad 2 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 1 28 Key Descriptions Power red Powers the mobile computer on and off c Performs a warm boot and a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 for information about performing a warn and cold boot Green Red Dot To use a key as an application key APP key on the keyboard a new keyboard remap table must be created and installed However the Green Red dot keys can be remapped as APP keys through the registry Create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKeyOverride dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the
307. lication in mobile computers with an integrated imager provides the user with the ability to capture and display image files To launch the Imager demo tap the mager icon on the Series 9000 Demo window The magerSample window appears ES ImagerSample 4t aff 17 25 e Display Window Trigger to View WA Trigger to Capture cabe us E Figure B 35 ImagerSample Window Table B 2 ImagerSample Window Options DIC GN Save As Allows the captured image to be saved as a bmp file see Save As on page B 34 Capture Allows the video image in the display window to be captured see Capture on page B 34 Viewer Turns on the video image in the display window to capture an image see Viewer on page B 34 Exit Exits the ImagerSample demo see Exit on page B 35 Demo Program B 33 Table B 2 ImagerSample Window Options Continued DIC GM Options Aim see Aim on page B 35 Lamp see Lamp on page B 35 Focus Near see Focus Near on page B 35 About see About on page B 36 Display Window This area contains the video image or a recently captured image Trigger to View Trigger to This message text shows the current mode in the display window Capture e Trigger to View Image in display window Is in capture mode Press any scan button to start the Image Acquisition process by enabling image capture A real time video image displays e Trigger to Capture Image in display window is a real time video image Press any
308. ling the Main Battery Before using the mobile computer install a lithium ion battery by sliding the battery into the mobile computer as shown in Figure 1 3 c Ensure the battery is fully inserted Two audible clicks can be heard as the battery is fully inserted A partially inserted battery may result in unintentional data loss When a battery is fully inserted in a mobile computer for the first time upon the mobile computers first power up the device boots and powers on automatically 1 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Figure 1 3 Installing the Main Battery Removing the Main Battery To remove the main battery 1 Prior to removing the battery press the red Power button to turn off the screen This sets the mobile computer to suspend mode Simultaneously press both primary battery releases The battery partially ejects from the mobile computer Pause 3 4 seconds while the mobile computer performs battery removal shutdown Press the secondary battery release on top of the battery and slide the battery out of the mobile computer Getting Started 1 9 Primary Battery Releases secondary Battery Release Figure 1 4 Removing the Main Battery 1 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Charging the Battery Charging the Main Battery and Memory Backup Battery Before using the mobile computer for the first time charge the main battery until the ambe
309. list box names e check box and radio button names e icons On a screen Bold text is used to highlight the following e key names on a keypad e button names on a screen Bullets e indicate e action items e lists of alternatives e lists of required steps that are not necessarily sequential xxiv MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG sequential lists e g those that describe step by step procedures appear as numbered lists Related Documents and Software The following documents provide more information about the MC9000 G mobile computer MC9000 G Quick Start Poster p n 72 63360 xx MC9000 G Licensing Patent and Regulatory Information p n 72 65259 xx SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers p n 72E 38880 xx Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for eMbedded Visual C v4 0 SMDK for eVC4 available at http www symbol com mc9000 g Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET SMDK for NET available at http www symbol com mc9000 g Device Configuration Package for MC9000w DCP for MC9000w available at http www symbol com mc9000 g eConnect software available at http devzone symbol com ActiveSync software available at the Microsoft web site http www microsoft com Service Information If you have a problem with the equipment contact the Symbol Support Center for your region See page xxv for contact information Before calling have the model number serial number and several
310. livery is not required For example UDP is used for real time audio and video traffic where lost packets are simply ignored because there is no time to retransmit If UDP is used and a reliable delivery is required packet sequence checking and error notification must be written into the applications A solid state device which produces visible laser light WAN Warm Boot WEP WEP Encryption Wireless Local Area Network WLAN Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN WNMP WNMS was renamed to AirBEAM Manager Glossary GL 19 Wide Area Network A radio network that supports data communication beyond a local area That is information can be sent across a city state or even nationwide A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs All data that is not saved to flash memory is lost Wired Equivalent Privacy is specified by IEEE for encryption and decryption of RF wireless communications Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption The conversion of data into a secret code for transmission over a public network The original text or plaintext is converted into a coded equivalent called ciphertext via an encryption algorithm The ciphertext is decoded decrypted at the receiving end and turned back into plaintext The encryption algorithm uses a key which is a binary number that is typically from 40 to 128 bits in length The greater the number of bits in the key cipher strength the more possible k
311. lization String on page 10 41 To create a new modem connection on the mobile computer 1 Connect the modem to the mobile computer as described in Connecting to the Mobile Computer on page 10 34 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon In the Connections window select Add a new modem connection to create a connection et 461209 gt Connections To set up ar change connection information tap one of Ehe Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection Manage existing connections My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPM server connection Sek up my proxy server E Figure 10 27 Connections Window Accessories 10 37 4 Entera name for the connection In the Se ect a modem drop down menu select Hayes Compatible on COM7 then tap Next 23 Settings ar aff 12 04 Make New Connection Enter a name For the connection Wy Connection 1 Select a modem Hayes Compatible on COMI ilk shift z x c v b n m F chuja jV te Figure 10 28 New Connection Window 5 Enter the access phone number in the My Connection window and tap Next ar aff 12 04 My Connection Enter the number exactly as it should be dialed Include any extra numbers such as an outside line ar credit card 555 5553 IF you travel ar change area codes often use dialing rules 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p caPja s a f ajn ijkjij
312. load kaa Tap and hold to displ Ej Stuart Munad Reply All ap and hold to Ip ay a Forward pop up menu of actions j Linda Mitche 2 Reminder Delete E Jeff Smith FSP RE Working late Adam Barr 7 15PM 1K Don t Forget Inbox Activesync 11 Items New Tools Services El E Tap to connect and to send and receive e mail Tap to connect to the selected service Figure 9 12 Inbox Application 9 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG When you receive a message tap it in the list box to open it Unread messages display in bold Tapto return to the message list From Robert Brown Subject RE Today s Meeting Sent 4 23 01 8 45 47 AM Just a reminder ta bring your individual schedules for the next 2 quarters with vou We will be discussing projects and timelines Thanks Bob Tap to delete this message Tap to view the previous or next message Tap to reply to or forward this message Figure 9 13 Viewing a Message When you connect to the e mail server or synchronize with the host computer Inbox downloads by default only messages from the last three days the first 100 lines of each new message and file attachments of less than 100 KB in size The original messages remain on the e mail server or the host computer You can mark the messages that you want to retrieve completely the next time you synchronize or connect to the e mail server In the message list tap and
313. lock Window Alarms Tab 2 Inthe Description field enter a name for the alarm 3 Tap the letter s representing the day s of the week that the alarm be enabled 4 Tap the bell icon to set alarm features The alarm settings window appears 9 settings e 461233 D Play sound Repeat sound Display message Flash light Figure 3 32 Alarm Settings Window pe uw 195 OX co Settings 3 39 select the Play sound check box to enable a sound when the alarm starts From the drop down list select the sound that plays when the alarm goes off select Repeat sound check box to repeat the sound notification select Display message check box to enable a message to appear on the screen when the alarm goes oft Tap ok Tap the time field to set the alarm time The clock window appears Figure 3 33 Alarm Clock Setting Window Use the time field and arrow buttons to set the time lap ok eet up to three more alarms lap ok To change the way the date or time is displayed on the mobile computer see Regional Settings on page 3 50 3 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contrast Monochrome Devices Only Use the Contrast window to change the date time time zone and set alarms To adjust the contrast on the display 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Contrast icon 57 Settings ef 4 345 ok Contrast To adjust the contrast drag the slider Customize backlight sett
314. lots working range as a function of minimum element widths of bar code symbols e Angle ocanning angle is important for promoting quick decodes When laser beams reflect directly back into the scanner from the bar code this specular reflection can blind the scanner To avoid this scan the bar code so that the beam does not bounce directly back But don t scan at too sharp an angle the scanner needs to collect scattered reflections from the scan to make a successful decode Practice quickly shows what tolerances to work within Contact the Symbol Support Center if chronic scanning difficulties develop Decoding of properly printed bar codes should be quick and effortless CO Scanning Bar Codes 1 Ensure that a scan enabled application is loaded on the mobile computer 2 Aim the scan exit window at the bar code 3 Pull the trigger e For mobile computers with a laser scanner ensure the red scan beam covers the entire bar code The red scan LED lights to indicate that the laser is on The green scan LED lights and an audible beep sounds by default to indicate the bar code was decoded 2 60 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG successfully TERM Correct Incorrect e For mobile computers with an imager place the bar code in any orientation within the aiming pattern Ensure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by the brackets in the aiming pattern The red laser aiming patte
315. ma delimited fields such as an Excel spreadsheet The file contains a one line header and one line for each unique tag found The header line contains a comma separated list of field text descriptions The tag lines contain the Tag ID starting with H for hex and a number indicating how many times the tag was read To save tag data Tap Start 9000 Demo RFID icon Read a tag s See Reading Tags on page C 34 Tap Save Tap OK to save using the default name and directory or enter a custom name directory and then tap OK File Menu Tap the File menu to view version information about RFID log information reboot or exit the application T A Bue c RFID Demo Program C 37 About Tap File Aboutto view the application version number the RFID DLL version number the RFID reader module firmware version number date code and serial and port information 13 Gemini RFID e 4925 gt symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company Gemini RFID Version Copyright C 2003 2004 Symbol Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved RFIDDLL Version Firmware Version Datecode 20040517WISx2001 Seriallnfo 04200940790R0004 Port Log e 469 29 Pull Trigger to Start Reading Attenuation RFID Engine Busy Clear Log Log On Log Off Log File Figure C 26 RFID Log Menu C 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG From the Log menu tap e Clear Log to clear logged
316. me text box enter the user name for this connection 20 In the Password text box enter the password for this connection 21 In the Domain text box enter the domain for this connection if required 22 Tap Advanced he Advanced window appears Wait Far credit card o SEC Extra dial string modem commands Cancel if nat connected in sec General Port Settings TCP IP servers Figure 6 35 Advanced Window General Tab 23 Tap the General tab Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 29 24 n the Baud Rate drop down list select 775200 25 Un check the Wait for dial tone before dialing check box 26 If the network uses DHCP tap ok 27 fIP addresses are required tap the CP Pand Servers tabs to enter the necessary settings Tap ok 9 settings e 46444 Advanced Use server assigned IP address O Use specific IP address use slip Use software compression Use IP header compression General TCPYIP 12331 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab q w e r t v u i o p E CAP ajsjd f g h T k T shift 2 x c b n m 7 chuja j4 dejte En ES Settings e HEP Pok Advanced Use server assigned addresses O Use specific server address DNS Alt DNS WINS Alt WINS General Port Settings TCP IP Servers 12331 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab q w e r t v u i o p E AP a sjd f g h T k T shift z x c v b n m 7 chuja 14 O 4 t Ea Figure 6 36
317. me Servers E Figure 3 55 Wireless Ethernet Name Servers Window Settings 3 61 6 Enter the appropriate DNS Alt DNS WINS and Alt WINS server addresses 7 Tap ok The next time the adapter is used it will have the new settings If the adapter is currently in the device you can remove and re insert the adapter to have the changes take affect Figure 3 56 Adapters 8 Tap ok to confirm the setup 9 Tap ok to exit 3 62 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Contents 4 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Communications 4 3 Introduction The mobile computer is capable of communicating with a number of hosts including development computers serial devices printers etc The available accessories serve as essential data communication devices enabling the information to be synchronized on the mobile computer with the information on the host device using Activesync With the appropriate accessory and software the mobile computer can establish a number of connection types such as a serial connection a USB connection and an Ethernet connection For an Ethernet connection use the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle For a serial or USB connection use one of the accessories listed below e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle e Cable Adapter Module CAM e Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR This chapter provides information on installing the appropriate com
318. ming should be disabled in the application that is not being used AEGIS Security Client The AEGIS Security Client is an implementation of the client side of the IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control protocol 802 1X access control provides improved security for both wired and wireless networks It solves the problem of key distribution in wireless LANs by using public key authentication and encryption between Wireless Access Points and roaming stations to exchange dynamic WEP keys The Client supports both wireless 802 11b and Ethernet interfaces Additional information and support for the Meetinghouse AEGIS Client is available from the Meetinghouse Data Communications website at http www mtghouse com 5 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios CO FH settings are not supported on MC906R G RFID mobile computers The Spectrum24 FH Settings tabs are used to configure the mobile computer s wireless network settings for frequency hopping Tap Start Settings System tab Spectrum24 FH Settings icon to display the Symbol Spectrum24 FH settings window E Symbol Spectrum2 Yi 2 08 ok 802 11 Mobile Unit errinn RTS Threshold 1600 bd C International Roaming Power Management Power Made Beacon Algorithm Minimum Maximum Mobile Unit Encryption IP Con 4 Figure 5 28 Mobile Unit Tab Table 5 12 Spectrum24
319. mitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer removed from cradle during communications Replace mobile computer in cradle and retransmit Mobile computer has no active connection An icon will be visible in the status bar if a connection is currently active Mobile computer has successfully connected through the cradle but no data is being transmitted over the connection Data is being transferred over the S24 radio link Temporarily disable the radio link to force data transmission through the cradle Tap the wireless LAN icon from the systray on the Today screen Tap the Mode General tab Enter an in valid value in the ESSID text box and tap the OK button Power cycle the mobile computer Verify that your radio link has been disabled the wireless LAN icon has a red box with a on it Once you have completed your data transmission re enable your radio link Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Table 13 4 Troubleshooting the Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Continued All Communication Status LEDs are flashing red Communication Status LED does not light up The unit could not configure Itself or it has lost the lease on its IP address Failed automatic cradle configuration via local DHCP Service Connect the unit to an Ethernet network with a correctly functioning DHCP server Connect a properly configured DHCP server or DHCP relay agent to the subnet and power cy
320. mmand Syntax A command line is made up of three elements e Prefix consists of the characters AT or at or to repeat the execution of the previous command line A or a e Body made up of individual commands described later Space characters IA5 2 0 are ignored and may be used for formatting purposes unless they are embedded in numeric or string constants he termination character may not appear in the body The modem can accept at least 40 characters in the body e Termination character may be selected by a user option parameter S3 The default is CR The format of Basic Syntax commands except for the D and S commands is as follows lt command gt lt number gt where 10 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e command is either a single character or the 4 character followed by a single character per V 250 or the Yo character followed by a single character the character followed by a single character or the character followed by a single character e number is a string of one or more characters from O through 9 representing a decimal integer value Commands expecting a number are noted in the description of the command If number is missing from such a command command is immediately followed by another command or the termination character the value 0 is assumed If a command does not expect a number and a
321. mmon AirBEAM packages would include packages for custom client application software radio firmware and AirBEAM Smart Client software Once these packages are built they are installed on the host server for retrieval by the handheld device The AirBEAM Package Builder is a utility used to define generate and install AirBEAM packages to a server The packages are then loaded from the server onto a client device equipped with an AirBEAM Smart Client executable For detailed instructions on how to define generate and install AIrBEAM packages to the server refer to the AirBEAM Package Builder Product Reference Guide p n 72 55769 xx 7 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG AirBEAM Smart Client The AirBEAM Smart Client is installed on the handheld mobile computer It is configured with the server access information the names of the packages to be downloaded and other controlling parameters When the AirBEAM Smart Client is launched the device connects to the specified FIP server and checks the packages it is configured to look for If the package version was updated the client requests the transfer AirBEAM License The AirBEAM Smart Client is a licensed software product The AirBEAM Smart Client s version synchronization functionality is enabled through a license key file that is stored on the client device The license key file can be built into AirBEAM Smart Client s image or downloaded in a special AirBEAM pac
322. more information on using Pocket Word tap Start Help Applications 9 25 Pocket Excel Pocket Excel works with Microsoft Excel on the host computer to provide easy access to copies of workbooks You can create new workbooks on the mobile computer or copy workbooks from the host computer to the mobile computer Synchronize workbooks between the host computer and the mobile computer so you have up to date content in both locations To create a new workbook in Pocket Excel such as an expense report or mileage log tap Start Programs Pocket Excel New A blank workbook appears Or if you ve selected a template for new workbooks in the Options dialog box that template appears with appropriate text and formatting already provided You can open only one workbook at a time when you open a second workbook you ll be asked to save the first You can save a workbook in a variety of formats including Pocket Excel pxl and Excel xls Pocket Excel lists the files stored on the mobile computer Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of or send a file tap and hold a file in the list then select the appropriate action from the pop up menu Pocket Excel provides fundamental spreadsheet tools such as formulas functions sorting and filtering To display the toolbar tap View loolbar Tar dsus HC Cell contents appear here as you enter them Format button AutoSum button Zoom button shift c v e n m
323. mple application in MC906R G RFID mobile computers with an integrated imager provides the user with the ability to scan 1 D and 2 D bar codes and capture display and manipulate image files In addition the application allows the user to adjust a wide range of settings that affect image capture These settings are called capabilities CAPs Capabilities can be accessed via the Advanced menu Capabilities are grouped into the following categories based on function AcqCap Acquisition capabilities Settings that affect the acquisition process such as illumination and auto exposure see AcqCap on page C 14 ImgCap Image Capture capabilities Settings that affect the image captured such as image file format and image rotation see mgCap on page C 16 VFCap Video Viewfinder capabilities Settings that affect the video viewfinder such as enable disable viewfinder and video viewfinder cropping styles see VFCap on page C 19 DevCap Device capabilities Settings that affect the imager engine such as light sources and power modes see DevCap on page C 23 Many of these settings cannot be changed Version Version capabilities Version numbers of all imager software components see Version on page C 24 Misc Miscellaneous capabilities Miscellaneous settings such as file naming image file save path etc see Misc on page C 25 RFID Demo Program C 5 Launching Imager To launch the RFID Imager sample application tap
324. mputer s display Aim the exit window at the image to capture Press and release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful image capture The captured image appears on the mobile computer s display until the mobile computer is enabled to capture another image or another image is opened from the File menu If the image to capture requires editing edit the image on the display from the Advanced menu prior to acquiring the image See Edit on page C 29 for information about each mode To scan a bar code A co N gt CO Tap Demo Simple to display the Simple window see Figure C 8 on page 9 Tap MM to display the Scan window see Figure C 9 on page 11 Aim the exit window at the bar code Press and release the trigger A beep sounds to indicate a successful decode The scanned data appears on the mobile computer s display until another bar code is scanned or another file is opened from the Fi e menu see Scanning Bar Codes on page 2 59 for detailed information about scanning RFID Demo Program C 11 Scan The Scan option opens the Scan window to scan bar codes without exiting the Imager sample application See Data Capture on page 2 57 for additional scanning instructions There is no ability to configure the scanner in this mode To scan a bar code 1 Tap Demo Scan to display the Scan window zu 2 5ymbol Image Cap an m2 12 15 File Demo Advanced File Demo Advanced Help Facus FAR
325. munication software and setting up the appropriate accessory to enable communication between the mobile computer and the host device For more information about the accessories available for the mobile computer see Chapter 10 Accessories Installing Communication Software To successfully communicate with the various host devices Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher must be installed on the host computer Installing ActiveSync Use ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher to synchronize the information on the mobile computer with the information on the host computer Changes made on the mobile computer or host computer appear in both places after synchronization ActiveSync software e Allows the user to work with mobile computer compatible host applications on the host computer ActiveSync replicates data from the mobile computer so data can be viewed entered and modified on the mobile computer with the host application e Synchronize files between the mobile computer and host computer The files are automatically converted to the correct format 4 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e Back up the data stored on the mobile computer Synchronization is a one step procedure that ensures the data Is always safe and up to date e Copy rather than synchronize files between the mobile computer and host computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode e g set to sy
326. munications no CAM during communications data was transmitted E Incorrect cable configuration see the System Administrator or transmitted data was incomplete Communications software is not Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications installed or configured properly Magnetic Stripe Reader Table 13 8 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader Symptom Possible Cause Action MSR cannot read card Mobile computer detached from Re attach mobile computer to MSR and reswipe the card MSR during card swipe Faulty magnetic stripe on card oee the System Administrator MSR application is not installed or Ensure the MSR application is installed on the mobile configured properly computer Ensure the MSR application is configured correctly Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Table 13 8 Troubleshooting the Magnetic Stripe Reader Continued Symptom Mobile computer battery is not charging Possible Cause Mobile computer was removed from MSR or MSR was unplugged from AC power too soon Action Ensure MSR is receiving power Ensure mobile computer is attached correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power f a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that
327. n amp Enter a name For Ehe connection ISP via Bluetooth Select a modem BluetoothDUN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t y uj ij o p capPja s a f ajn ijkjij shift z x c v b n m chuja jV te Figure 6 28 My Connection Window 9 Inthe Enter a name for the connection text box enter a name such as SP via Bluetooth 10 In the Select a modem drop down list select B uetoothDUN 11 Tap Next er aff 12 23 My Connections gt Select a bonded Bluetooth phone ka use as a dialup modem Press Hew to bond with a new Bluetooth Device Hew Figure 6 29 New Dial Up Window 6 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 12 Ensure the Bluetooth phone is discoverable Tap New The mobile computer searches for other Bluetooth devices and displays them in the list ES Settings Ped PEE Select a Bluetooth device Searching complete 0002c71c0ed4c Figure 6 30 Select Bluetooth Device Window 13 In the list select the device and then tap Next EJ settings PE 2 00 Enter Device Bluetooth PIN de Enter a Bluetooth PIM of your choice to bond with 0002c71c9e4c The same PIN must be entered on both devices Please check your device s instruction manual to learn how to answer to PIN requests pese PIN 123 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Taba w e r t vju i o D L T LAP a s d fjG h k T shift z x c v b n m F chuja I
328. n about wireless profiles c he designated package s are downloaded from the FTP server Contents 9 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG edd AGT MESS Lus auae 42 dk t P RECEEREHEE RERO HR RU RHP ond AO kee brc a 9 19 Managing E mail Messages and Folders 9 20 Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server 9 20 WA eee TT CIT QI LETTO LTEM 9 21 Typing Mode 9 22 o e caw bp cae esi de cae nw Ee RR ee ees ORES GE EOE eee 9 23 O O irrita EE O pira da e 9 23 Recording Mode 2 aeaaaee 9 24 gi gk car APAPAP PA PP AA AA APP 9 25 Tips or Workind FOCAL EXCEL carreras di RC RR ERU ROC dans eR OR ERR ER eR 9 26 MA Liga dated pe bois be NAGLAKAD Fea eirca tar Fade acea d dC PAGA hi 9 27 Sei DEA POCO Leib aote detur e Rcx RR EORR eR Le REOR Oc E cio CERO 9 27 SOBRE ERES Lc oe eget ay dees eh be Gana adn ac EE RC HER Rea dd 9 28 het n with EORR ac eec a nhs haw PO PAP POPE PP wae Feed RR 9 29 Windows Media PLAYED oa uoa queue KG ERE ERR EROR OR RE ER RU RR CA SOR LU eR eda 9 31 Microsoft Reader RIRs 9 32 Getting Books on the Device RR 9 32 Oe An 9 32 Feng uH B BODL AAA 9 33 UNA MSA GS aoa or TET TOIT COT T eres eens Ge ceo ones 15701 AA E 9 34 A AA 9 35 Pockat Mome t A 9 36 o dans eh on a III AA AEE ARUGA 9 36 La ASS 9 36 resting Momie Favos Loci dd edo e Po ee di cti iia 9 36 Saving Memory on the Mobile Comp
329. n page 3 28 for instructions on changing the device name 4 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 Inthe ActiveSync window select File Connection Settings The Connection Settings window appears Connection Settings E x a Click Get Connected to connect your mobile device to this ais computer Status Device connected Get Connected Status COM port is available v Allow USB connection with this desktop computer Status USB is available Allow network Ethernet and Remote Access Service RAS server connection with this desktop computer Status Network is available Status icon M Show status icon in Taskbar Cancel Help Figure 4 12 Connection Settings Window 3 Inthe Connection Settings window select the appropriate check box for the type of connection being used If using a serial connection select the COM port from the drop down list If serial USB and Ethernet communication connections are used all check boxes can be selected to avoid having to update this window for different connections However if the same serial COM port is used for ActiveSync and TCM the serial COM port must be deselected in this window for it to be available for TCM downloads CO 4 Select the Show status icon in taskbar check box Tap OK to save any changes made Ensure the accessory being used to communicate is connected to the host computer and the appropriat
330. na Moving closer than during programing can damage tag and render it unreadable Maintenance amp Troubleshooting 13 9 Bluetooth Connection Table 13 2 Troubleshooting Bluetooth Connection MN oe Mobile computer cannot find any Bluetooth devices nearby Mobile computer keeps powering down to protect memory contents When trying to connect a Bluetooth phone and mobile computer the phone thinks a different mobile computer that previously paired with the phone is used Can t make my Ericsson R520 phone discoverable There is a delay in the Bluetooth stack re initializing during a resume from suspend Too far from other Bluetooth devices Move closer to the other Bluetooth device s within a range of 10 meters The Bluetooth device s nearby are not Turn on the Bluetooth device s you wish to find turned on The Bluetooth device s are not in Set the Bluetooth device s to discoverable discoverable mode mode If needed refer to the device s user documentation for help The mobile computer s battery is low Recharge the battery The Bluetooth radio is powered on for Using the SetDeviceState API refer to the a long time This mode requires SMDK Help File for Symbol mobile computers battery power and should be powered set the Bluetooth to D4 power state off whenever not needed The phone remembers the name and Manually delete the pairing device and name address of the mobile computer i
331. nc wanawa e 4 3 ARA PAP PP 2 3b ae A 4 4 HAS UNG ico dada eri dr Rr Kh Edd 4 21 Adaptive Frequency Hopping 6 7 BOUE osse pro RARE 5 4 5 7 5 21 BU IDETIBIWOIRE amag baa eut hap kat iiai 5 29 SIONI MORO E m ERRREO AA 3 41 adjusting mobile computer settings 3 b ae ame SKID cra ARES C 16 ERO IA II a E C 16 AEGIS security client 5 35 li PAA PUP 6 7 aiming options aming PANGIT cocci n 2 58 aiming pattern On C 15 aiming the imager 2 58 IN 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG AirBEAM Client 7 4 PO RAPE 7 4 package builder 1 3 rapid deployment 8 5 A 1 10 synchronization with server 1 9 AirBEAM configuration ISITE cias dano paid 7 7 PIG I uasa cheese xiii addas d ded 1 8 Packages 2 tab 7 5 DO TAY ar qa xia ps 1 6 ROMY II 3 38 align SCEE iuuenes 1 16 B 23 analog gain C 15 Pe aa 5 29 applications COREE Zhan ans nena PRSE S 9 4 meeting requests 9 6 summary screen 9 6 teg 9 7 summary screen 9 9 BN AA PAO PT 9 15 connecting to e mail server 9 15 creating messages 9 19 managing 9 20 message liSt 9 17
332. nchronize continually while the mobile computer is connected to the host computer or set to only synchronize on command e Select the types of information to synchronize and control how much data is synchronized To install ActiveSync on the host computer 1 Download the latest version of the software from the Microsoft web site at http www microsoft com Refer to the installation and RAS instructions included with the ActiveSync software 2 Set up a partnership via the Activesync connection using a serial or USB connection to the host computer Microsoft recommends installing ActiveSync on the host computer before connecting the mobile computer CO Communications 4 5 Setting up a Partnership After ActiveSync installation is complete the ActiveSync Setup Wizard helps the user to connect the mobile computer to the host computer set up a partnership to synchronize information between the mobile computer and host computer and customize synchronization settings Before setting up a partnership between the mobile computer and host computer see the communication setup sections in this chapter for detailed information about Serial USB and Ethernet communication setups To set up a partnership 1 Ifthe Get Connected window does not appear on the host computer select Start Programs Microsoft ActiveSync File Get Connected Get Connected Get Connected After installing batteries or plugging in the AC adapter do
333. nctions o When you perform a cold boot all settings selected in this view return to the default settings The settings are maintained after a warm boot Settings 3 31 Table 3 4 Battery Power Backlight Settings o Status Conditions of light On Off Default Cold Boot On Battery Power select the Turn off backlight if device is not used Check box is selected for check box to turn off the backlight after a Default time is one minute certain period of time has passed unused Period of time can be selected from the list Available timings are 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min and 5 min select the Turn on backlight when a button is Check Box is selected pressed or the screen is tapped check box to turn on the backlight when a key Is pressed or the screen is tapped co To change screen brightness level see Brightness on page 3 33 3 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG External Power To set the backlight settings when using external AC power 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Backlight icon External Power tab Ey settings e 4 10 05 ok Backlight On external Turn off backlight if E L device is not used for Turn on backlight when a button is pressed or the screen is tapped Battery Power External Power Brightness Adjust power settings to conserve power E Figure 3 24 Backlight Window External Power Tab 2 Make the desired selections See Table
334. nd WINS addresses used by the mobile computer profile ES Network 4 aff 3 59 XC IP Configuration Gateway DNS Authentication Encryption IF Config Pq 4 gt E Figure 5 17 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab Static Table 5 7 IP Config Tab Fields IP Address The Internet is a collection of networks with users that communicate with each other Each communication carries the address of the source and destination networks and the particular machine within the network associated with the user or host computer at each end This address is called the IP address Internet Protocol address Each node on the IP network must be assigned a unique IP address that is made up of a network identifier and a host identifier Enter the IP address as a dotted decimal notation with the decimal value of each octet separated by a period for example 192 168 7 27 oubnet Mask Most TCP IP networks use subnets in order to effectively manage routed IP addresses Having an organization s network divided into subnets allows it to be connected to the Internet with a single shared network address for example 255 255 255 0 The default gateway is a device that is used to forward IP packets to and from a remote destination DNS The Domain Name System DNS is a distributed Internet directory service DNS is used mostly to translate domain names and IP addresses It is also used to control Internet email delivery Most Internet service requi
335. nd changes are made saving the changes overwrites the original script To use an original or Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function to save the script using a different file name Updating TCM 1 X Scripts script files that were created with older versions of TCM can be upgraded to TCM 2 0 scripts Click Open to open an existing script created with an older version of TCM The Conversion window appears automatically Convert 9000 64M Script Save Script As ia J8aSTCMSenprssPDTSUDD B4M tem Select a Version Figure 12 4 Conversion Window Upgrading to TCM 2 0 Copying Components to the Script ocript contents are managed using standard file operations such as New Folder Delete and Rename Items can be added to the script by clicking files and folders in the File Explorer window and dragging them to the Script window The File Explorer window supports standard windows multiple files may be selected by clicking while holding the SHIFT or CTRL keys Saving the Script Modifications to a script file can be saved using the Save or the Save As function Saving changes to an existing script writes over the original script To use a Symbol supplied standard script as a base and save the changes in a new script use the Save As function Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 11 Building the Image Once the script is created the hex image defined by the script can be
336. nd respond to messages while connected to the e mail server Messages are sent as soon as you tap Send which saves space on the mobile computer When working offline once you ve downloaded new message headers or partial messages you can disconnect from the e mail server then decide which messages to download completely The next time you connect Inbox downloads the complete messages you ve marked for retrieval and sends the messages you ve created You can use multiple e mail services to receive messages For each e mail service you intend to use first set up and name the e mail service If you use the same service to connect to different mailboxes set up and name each mailbox connection Setting Up an E mail Service In Inbox on the mobile computer tap Accounts then New Account Follow the instructions in the wizard on the screen For an explanation of a screen tap Start then Help When finished tap Accounts then Connectto connect to the e mail server For more information on using the Inbox program see nbox on page 9 15 Applications 9 17 Using the Message List Messages you receive display in the message list box By default the most recently received messages are listed first select the service and folder you want to display Tr ES Inbox AU ENS Select the sort order for Robert Brown 5 45PM 15k a Messages RE Today s Meeting lap to open a message Mark as Unread RE Please rd Move To Mark for Down
337. nd this computer add and remove programs or restore a backup image on a device whose memory has been reset do notwantto synchronize data Back Cancel Help Figure 4 2 New Partnership Window 5 Click the Standard partnership radio button and then select Next The New Partnership Specify how to synchronize data window appears New Partnership Specify how to synchronize data Choose to synchronize with your desktop and or a server You can synchronize data such as e mail messages and calendar items between your device and this desktop computer However if you have access to a Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync you can also choose some information types to synchronize directly with a server getting the most up to date information even when your desktop computer is turned off How do you wantto synchronize with your device Synchronize with this desktop compute C Synchronize with Microsoft Exchange Server and orthis desktop computer Note Y ou must have access to Microsoft Exchange Server with Exchange ActiveSync or Microsoft Mobile Information Server Back Cancel Help Figure 4 3 How To Sync Window Communications 4 7 6 Click the Synchronize with this desktop computer radio button and select Next The New Partnership Select Number of Partnerships window appears New Partnership E X Select Number of Partnerships Select whether you want to synchronize with jus
338. nel accesses the Control Panel window B 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e PC Link sample PC mobile computer connection notification dialog e About OTL provides version number and other information for the Demo program If the demo program is already on the mobile computer tap Start 9000 Demo If the demo program was downloaded into the Application directory on the mobile computer navigate to the directory using File Explorer and tap the Blt file The Series 9000 Demo window appears e sd iJ series 9000 Demo 4212 33 3 ee Sounds Images Ctl Panel co 7 Imager PC Link About OTL Figure B 1 Series 9000 Demo Window Tap the Test Apps icon The Test Applications window appears AG ltest Applications 4211 58 3 x i pa Notify Keyboard 9 amp Display Memory MSR 9000 iS ISR Printing Back Cameo Figure B 2 Series 9000 Demo Window Test Applications Demo Program B 5 Test Apps Test applications include samples programs that test the functionality of various features on the mobile computer SelfTest SelfTest tests the functionality of the features on the mobile computer ja To access the Self Test application tap the Se f Test icon on the Test Applications window The Self Test window appears Ei self Test et W 11 59 Self Test Touch Panel Batteries com Ports Memory 5pectrum 24 Run Tests 7 a One Time se
339. nfig Tab Fields AC s IP Configuration Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP from the P Type drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server DHCP is the default setting for the mobile computer profile When DHCP is selected the IP address fields are read only oelect Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS and WINS addresses used by the mobile computer profile Spectrum24 Configuration 5 43 WLAN Adapter Tab Use the WLAN Adapter tab to configure hardware and radio settings Use the Card Type PCMCIA to specify the antenna type and the Radio Link Rate radio buttons to specify the data rate supported E Symbol Spectrum2 Y 2 11 ok Spectrumz4 Adapter Settings Card Type PCMCIA Diversity Antenna Radio Link Rate KI 1MB Support C 2MB Support 8 Both 1MB and 2MB Support Password Cancel Encryption IP Config WLAN Adapter ale E Figure 5 33 WLAN Adapter Tab Table 5 17 WLAN Adapter Tab Fields IN Wem AAA Diversity Antenna Select Diversity Antenna if dual antenna support is required Diversity improves communication in highly reflective environments Do not select diversity if a secondary antenna is not being used Using diversity in a single antenna application can cause poor wireless network performance Radio Link Rate Use the Radio Link Rate radio buttons to specify the data rate supported The mobile
340. nformation about loading the splash screen using TCM and IPL 12 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Flash Storage In addition to the RAM based storage standard on Windows CE mobile computers the mobile computer is also equipped with a non volatile Flash based storage area which can store data partitions that can not be corrupted by a cold boot This Flash area is divided into two categories Flash File System FFS Partitions and Non FFS Partitions FFS Partitions The mobile computer includes two FFS partitions These partitions appear to the mobile computer as a hard drive that the OS file system can write files to and read files from Data is retained even if power Is removed The two FFS partitions appear as two separate folders in the Windows CE file system and are as follows e Platform The Platform FFS partition contains Symbol supplied programs and Dynamic Link Libraries DLLs This FFS is configured to include DLLs that control system operation Since these drivers are required for basic mobile computer operation only experienced users should modify the content of this partition e Application The Application FFS partition is used to store application programs needed to operate the mobile computer Working with FFS Partitions Because the FFS partitions appear as folders under the Windows CE file system they can be written to and read like any other folder For example an application prog
341. nize 9 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG If you are sending an SMS message and want to know if it was received tap Edit Options and select the Request SMS text message delivery notification check box before sending the message Managing E mail Messages and Folders By default messages are displayed in one of five folders for each account you ve created Inbox Deleted Items Drafts Outbox and Sent Items The Deleted Items folder contains messages that have been deleted on the mobile computer The behavior of the Deleted and Sent Items folders depends on the options you selected In the message list tap Tools Options On the Message tab select the options To organize messages into additional folders tap ools Manage Folders to create new folders To move a message to another folder in the message list tap and hold the message then tap Move to on the pop up menu Folder Behavior with ActiveSync and Direct Connection to Server The behavior of the folders you create depends on whether you are using ActiveSync SMS POP3 or IMAP4 e f you use ActiveSync e mail messages in the Inbox folder in Outlook are automatically synchronized with the mobile computer You can select to synchronize additional folders by designating them for ActiveSync The folders you create and the messages you move are mirrored on the server For example if you move two messages from the Inbox folder to a folder named F
342. nnections icon The Connections window appears 9 Settings Pap PEP ok Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of the Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPN server connection Set Up my proxy server E Figure 6 25 Connections Window 6 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 3 SOs Tap the Advanced tab EF Settings Connections Networks are groups of settings used by programs to automatically connect to an ISP or private network Select Networks Dialing rules determine how a number is dialed from a specific location Select Location Select what your network card connects to Network Card Advanced Figure 6 26 Connections Advanced Tab Tap Select Networks The Network Management window appears Programs that automatically connect to the Internet should connect using Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using My Work Network hd Exceptions are needed if aur company uses periods in intranet addresses Figure 6 27 Network Management Window In the top drop down list select My SP In the bottom drop down list select My Work Network Tap ok Tap the asks tab Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 25 8 lap Add a new modem connection under My ISP The My Connection window appears Padi PAPAG My Connectio
343. ns a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The VI emulator configuration uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table E 6 for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions include e VI key functions e VI 100 emulator keys VI 220 emulator keys e VI HP character map A 40000 o m 2200000 N CESA c Ue gt Ls B e lo CE KS f JNE a A00606 eee E Q pul N y Ng AG s s fg 1 x I m c ts g O a a MM mn N m uH w 73 Sz Sa 35 N o 3 3 w J B Lee Figure E 6 VT Emulator Keypad CO For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API information about F6 F7 keys see the keypad s description table in Chapter2 Operating Keypad Maps E 65 Table E 13 VT Key Functions Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt D gt Brightness color Contrast monochrome Func l Brightness color E 66 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 14 VT 100 Emulator Keys Table E 15 VT 220 Emulator Keys Keypad Maps 67 F 68 MC9000 G with Windows Mo
344. ns demo applications and optional components The standard TCM scripts can be found in the following folder C Program FilesISymbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000W V1 0 TCM Scripts CO Before creating a script to build a hex image identify the files required system files drivers applications etc and locate the files source directories to make the script building process easier The required processes for building a hex image in TCM include e Starting TCM e Defining script properties e Creating the script for the hex image e Building the image e Sending the hex image e Creating a splash screen e Flash storage 12 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Starting Terminal Configuration Manager Click the Windows start menu TCM icon Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000w v1 0 to start TCM The 7CM window appears displaying two child windows Script and File Explorer The Script window contains a newly created script and the File Explorer window contains a file explorer view used for selecting files to be placed in the script TCM Script1 File Script View Window Help DE Qs gt e mo PA ees Pp IP Script amp 9 Platform amp Application f File Explorer 3 Online Services 3 Outlook Express 3 PowerArchiver ngg Pvcs Y Roxio 3 Symantec Symbol 2 9 Symbol Device Configuration Packages Mc9000w v0 1 gg v1 0 Ey Flash Folders 3 Hex Image
345. nt trailing spaces should be entered on the Packages 1 tab a Information entered in these fields are case and space sensitive Packages 2 Tab his tab is used to specify the package name of the last four of eight packages that are to be loaded during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server Packages 2 Server Package 5 Mi P Package 6 Package 7 Package 8 Upload Pkg KA 000000 Package name of a package that is to be processed for upload files during the AirBEAM synchronization process The specified package name must correspond to a package that is available on the specified package server This is an optional field Package 8 Upload Pkg 9 7 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG No inadvertent trailing spaces should be entered on the Packages 2 tab E ai Information entered in these fields are case and space sensitive Server Tab This tab is used to specify the configurations of the server to which the client Packages 2 Server wE T IP Address po connects during the package synchronization process prectoy User fe emma 00000 IP Address The IP Address of the server It may be a host name or a dot notation format Directory The directory on the server that contains the AirBEAM package definition files All AirBEAM package definition files are
346. ntry fields appear The KDC field should remain with the default KDC name krbtgt unless it is changed in the server Enter the name of the server that hosts the Kerberos KDC in the Realm field The KDC is located on a server and maintains information about the access points and users it supports The KDC also permits the transmission and receipt of data once the credentials of the user are verified Tap Kerberos Options to configure different caching modes for Kerberos credentials When connecting to a Kerberos supported profile the system can prompt for the associated user name and password at specified instances during the authentication process Caching of credentials is optional Spectrum24 Configuration 5 9 Table 5 3 Authentication Tab Fields Kerberos Continued Kerberos Options oelect any combination of the following Kerberos Credential Caching settings Reset When selected the system prompts the user for the username and password upon a warm boot Connect When selected the system prompts the user for login information when the system initiates a connection to the ESSID Time When selected the system requests a user name and password after the specified time parameter Available time parameters are specified as an Interval in minutes or At hh mm a specified time chosen with the pull down menu If a time option is not selected authentication continues without a user name and password verification Resume When enabled
347. number is present an error occurs All leading 0 s in number are ignored by the modem Additional commands may follow a command and associated parameter if any on the same command line with a separation character The actions of some commands cause the rest of the command line to be ignored S Parameters Commands that begin with the letter S are known as S parameters The number following the 9 indicates the parameter number referenced If the number is not recognized as a valid parameter number an ERROR result code issues Immediately following this number either a or character must appear is used to read the current value of the indicated S parameter sets the S parameter to a new value o parameter number S lt parameter_number gt lt value gt If the is used the new value to be stored in the S parameter is specified in decimal following the If no value is given i e the end of the command line occurs or the next command follows immediately the S parameter specified may be set to 0 or an ERROR result code issues and the stored value remains The ranges of acceptable values are given in the description of each S parameter If the is used the modem transmits a single line of information text to the DTE The text portion of this information text consists of exactly three characters giving the value of the S parameter in decimal with leading zeroes included
348. ny key event until GXCloselnput is called For example if the customer is using the APP1 key to run Calc exe this is disabled during this period Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk 2 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 4 3270 Emulator Descriptions Continued O MN Enter Executes a selected item or function The default behavior of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications work properly create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer t For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyb
349. oard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 21 5250 Emulator Keypad here are two physical configurations of the 5250 emulator keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 5250 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computers keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 5 on page 2 22 for key and button descriptions and lable 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions gt B I ea E PRN p lt 7 ME PRINT HELP ce Oe e 0 zo o o gt E a ae He OZ T LREO o 6 NN an Us la E ROLL UP SYSRQ E o 1 a lt um pd JS 9 E 0C Na JA ae le gu LL m OQ O D OE NA Aw o ce c m 1 eiue cete IG Ji e mm J m Jg lo EN TJ 3 JG OEE fe s3 9 m o a m 0 o J a 8 ja n o m e o NIA E o Ao G Ne f a N Figure 2 5 5250 Emulator Keypad The 525
350. obile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 14 Use the up and down scroll buttons to select Download Press Enter The Downloading screen appears Downloading Partition Name Device Parameters Device Status Figure 12 13 Downloading Screen Before the download starts if Serial was selected in the Select Transport menu Waiting for Data appears in the Device Status field If Wireless S24XX was selected in the Select Transport menu the IP address appears in the Device Status field 15 On the development computer click Load on the TCM toolbar The Load Terminal window Serial tab appears Load Terminal Load Terminal IMAGE FILES TO LOAD IMAGE FILES TO LOAD SOxxPlat_1 23 hex o 90kxPlat_1 23 hex a Serial Ethernet Serial Ethemet Available Devices Comm Port Baud Rate Flow Control IP Address C a COMI m 115200 None ASCTBD48531 157 235 22 242 Active RTSCTS e XONXOFF Close Window After Download Cancel Cancel Figure 12 14 Load Terminal Window Serial and Ethernet Tabs 16 17 18 19 20 Zi Configuring the Mobile Computer For Serial port connections click the Seria tab and select the mage Files To Load Comm Port and Baud Rate trom their respective drop down lists For Wireless connections click the Ethernet tab A list of available devices and their IP addresses appear Only those devices placed into the Wireless transport mode of IPL appear in this dialog Se
351. obile computer Once this file is loaded onto the mobile computer these settings are restored after a cold boot 5 46 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG IT100TN VVII PIC 26D0D0I0C Contents 62 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG PN amp BO os 64 he ee E t WG UE E o OC COE ACR ERR GA KP PANGGA NG UE ERU doof ka 6 15 PEO aga errada estra DAMBANA KANA ada DEO PA ERAI 6 17 Sending an Appointment or TAB acte qucd ab px o EX ORO ROC bt 99 ci oe 6 17 BOR RES COE ao oed vtr ee os oe AA FORE 6 19 Sending a File 6 21 Er ice pues ae edes deo eee Reed eg ed dene UTATU LIA o n RR d 6 23 Dialup TO Ah Louanicequ tu odio tt eb 23 2560045 4nd Re dris doter a ni id 6 23 Dial Automatically from an Application 6 32 are CT T ts a sai y ae bbs A IHRE ERES LP EV VIF PT 6 32 Connecting to a Bluetooth Access Point 6 33 PICO AAA 6 39 Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port 6 40 III ui dob Ed EORR NEUE Oe HERE RR Je CURRERE EE HER o E Ren 6 43 Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 3 Introduction Bluetooth wireless technology is not available on MC906R G RFID mobile computers Devices equipped with B uetooth wireless technology can communicate without wires using frequency hopping spread spectrum FHSS RF to transmit and receive data
352. obile computer into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated opare battery is not seated firmly in Remove and re insert the spare battery into the charging the cradle slot ensuring it is firmly seated Mobile computer battery is not charging Mobile computer was removed from cradle or cradle was unplugged from AC power too soon Ensure cradle is receiving power Ensure mobile computer Is seated correctly Confirm main battery is charging under Start Settings System Power If a mobile computer battery is fully depleted it can take up to four hours to fully recharge a battery if the mobile computer is off and longer if the mobile computer is operating Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully seated in the cradle Remove and re insert the mobile computer into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated Maintenance amp Troubleshooting Table 13 6 Troubleshooting the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle Continued Symptom opare battery is not charging Possible Cause Battery not fully seated in charging slot Action Remove and re insert the spare battery into the cradle ensuring it is firmly seated Battery inserted incorrectly Ensure the contacts are facing down and toward the back of the cradle Battery is faulty Verify that other batteries charge properly If so
353. of the key events to an application including the F6 and F7 keys Note Other applications cannot receive any key event until GXCloselnput is called For example if the customer is using the APP1 key to run Calc exe this is disabled during this period Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights Press and release the ALT key to activate the keypad ALT alternate functions Press and release the ALT key again to return to the normal keypad functions ALPHA orange The default keypad mode is the num lock number lock mode Press the orange ALPHA key I to de activate the num lock mode and to access the alternate ALPHA characters shown on LED C the keypad in orange Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Period Decimal Point Produces a period for alpha entries a decimal point for numeric entries and the alphabetic character X when the ALPHA function key is activated 2 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 2 43 Key Descriptions Continued WALA Rei Produces an asterisk and the alphabetic character Z when the ALPHA function key is activated Execut
354. ommunications equipment that manages communications between the host computer system and one or more wireless mobile computers An AP connects to a wired Ethernet LAN and acts as a bridge between the Ethernet wired network and IEEE 802 11 interoperable radio equipped mobile units such as a mobile computer The AP allows a mobile user to roam freely through a facility while maintaining a seamless connection to the wired network AirBEAM Manager is a comprehensive wireless network management system that provides essential functions that are required to configure monitor upgrade and troubleshoot the Spectrum24 wireless network and Its components including networked mobile computers some features include event notification access point configuration diagnostics statistical reports auto discovery wireless proxy agents and monitoring of access points and mobile units AirBEAM Smart Client is part of Symbol s AirBEAM suite which also includes AirBEAM Safe and AirBEAM Manager The AirBEAM Smart Client system uses the network accessible host server to store software files that are to be downloaded to the mobile computers The AirBEAM Smart Client provides the mobile computers with the smarts to request software from the host It allows them to request download and install software as well as to upload files and status data The AirBEAM smart Client uses the industry standard FIP or TFTP file transfer protocols to ch
355. omputer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow scan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Moves left and right from one item to another Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters SPACE BKSP Space and backspace functions Operating 2 27 Table 2 6 VT Emulator Descriptions Continued DISCS IN Application Function blue Control mee Y Period Decimal Point BCK TAB e a o These keys can be assigned to an application F6 and F7 keys cannot be remapped and are dedicated by the Operating System to control volume level When these keys are pressed Shell exe traps them and displays the volume adjustment window To get these keys to an application call GXOpenlnputf at the beginning of the application and call GXCloselnput at the end of the application This redirects all of the key events to an application including the F6 and F7 keys Note Other applications cannot receive any key event until GXCloselnput is called For example if the customer is using the APP1 key to run Calc exe this is disabled during this period Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the CTRL key to
356. omputer s wireless network settings The Mobile Companion utility starts automatically and appears as an icon on the task tray The status Icon changes in real time to reflect the signal strength and availability of the adapter and the wireless network Tap the icon on the task tray to open the Mobile Companion menu sd 9 Mobile Companion 44 m2 3 05 Ls e Wednesday October 15 2003 Tap here ka set owner information Mobile Companion Menu WLAN Profiles Find WLANs Mobile Options Companion Icon Figure 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu When the menu opens select Status WLAN Profiles Find WLANs or Options from menu Table 5 1 Mobile Companion Menu Descriptions Wem Remp O otatus Displays the current status and information for the wireless connection See Status on page 5 22 for more information Signal tab view displays radio signal transmission strength from the adapter using its current profile to the associated AP Info tab view displays mobile computer s software driver firmware and hardware versions as well as country information for the current WLAN profile IP Status tab view displays network address information Pingtab view displays signal strength data data rate and conduct data transmission tests between the mobile computer and associated AP or client APs tab view displays APs with the same ESSID within the current WLAN profile Peerstab view displays the BSSIDs power modes transmit rates
357. on handle 2 54 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Recording a Message You may record a message to capture thoughts reminders and phone numbers In Calendar Tasks and Contacts you can include a recording in the Notes tab In the Notes program you can either create a stand alone recording or include a recording in a written note To create a recording 1 Start the Notes application 2 Tap the Record icon to begin recording 3 Hold the mobile computers microphone near your mouth or other source of sound Indicates an embedded recording Quote from Adam Tap to begin recording UU A aa KILIO to show or a the recording toolbar Figure 2 30 Recording Screen 4 When you are finished tap the Stop button The new recording appears in the note list or as an embedded icon 5 To play a recording tap it in the list or tap its icon in the note Operating 2 55 Using My Text When using Inbox or MSN Messenger use My Text to quickly insert preset or frequently used messages into the text entry area lo insert a message tap My lext and tap a message ER MSN Messenger m 1 56 tok You are chatting with Adam Kim Akers says Hi Can you meek at 2 00 Adam says I have another appointment scheduled For 2 00 I can t talk right now I ll be right there I m running late Where are you Hi Goodbye Call me later Tools Chats My Text A Tap to select a prewritt
358. on key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift VK Code ASCII Value Decimal Decimal mL I TI TY EARL CT COS IS p pe LLL TEE L3 js bak LAA YA _ A gt ee am m qw LO O COS A CH IAS OS IN CO IS GS GC D CO o m See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See lable 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 35 Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Alpha Shift Alpha VK Code ASCII Value E E zm E EE Oxbb 187d 160 187 See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift VK Code ASCII Value Decimal Decimal tit tl A HR 3d2 WAA KAG KG ICO es GANG KA KAN IO RN AG CTTO AN o C i t t sess AH e PE FE SE bes s See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps 37 Figure E 3 53 Key Keypad Key Sequence lt Func gt lt Z gt 53 key functions 53 key
359. on should be highlighted Press Options The Open option should be highlighted Press Select scroll to the right tab to access the Paired devices list Highlight the mobile computer then press Options scroll to Set as authorised then press Select In the confirmation screen press Yes 3 Nokia 6310 8910 8910i d mon o On the phone press MENU Scroll to 70 Bluetooth then press SELECT Scroll to 4 View Paired Devices then press SELECT Highlight the Pocket PC then press OPTIONS Scroll to 3 Request Connection Authorization then press NO 6 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Creating a Bluetooth Virtual COM Port There are two ways to write an RFCOMM application The first is by creating a virtual legacy COM port he second is through Winsock Microsoft recommends using Winsock The sample code that follows demonstrates how to create a Bluetooth virtual COM port Begin SetCursor LoadCursor NULL IDC WAIT Set a wait cursor memset amp pp 0 sizeof pp Clear the PORTEMUPortParams structure pp uiportflags RFCOMM PORT FLAGS KEEP DCD DCD ON while in piconet pp channel 1 Set to either an explicit server channel or for a server application that wants the server channel to be autobound to RFCOMM CHANNEL MULTIPLE pp flocal FALSE Set to FALSE for a client port that is used to creating outgoing connections pp imtu should be set to somet
360. onri 12 28 downloading partitions 12 31 non FFS partitions 12 30 splash screen 12 30 PATOIS AAP 12 28 A LA A MEE ilash storage SA DEED o le D IN 5 LE EE MM C 18 focal length C 16 four slot charge only 1 6 10 5 four slot charge only cradle 10 17 four slot Ethernet cradle 10 14 four slot Ethernet USB 1 6 10 5 four slot spare battery charger 1 6 10 5 o A C 20 frequency hopping 5 36 G ig olo Mem 5 19 5 25 Ger mage TNO aviar rs C 24 H hard reset 1 15 1 18 2 6 2 8 2 10 2 12 2 14 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 22 2 24 2 26 2 28 2 31 2 62 2 63 TERRIER 3 20 3 30 3 31 3 32 3 33 Te 3 55 5 45 6 4 B 19 hardware layer version C 25 I OUI TRITT TT TET TO erin ae 1 6 2 32 10 5 DE IAA 1 6 WN A 5 25 icons PURO A E 2 36 A eee ae 2 35 DICTION es aura abe E RARE AY Xue GARI 2 36 A 2 35 Instant messages 2 35 mobile companion 2 36 5 3 multiple notifications 2 35 o Ac 2 35 2 7 eT 2 35 2 36 time and next appt 2 35 Image api version C 25 image DEMO VESION iua ideas ses eam nm nhe C 25 imager demo application for RFID mobile computers C 4 imager fo
361. ons 9 27 MSN Messenger With the MSN Messenger instant messaging program on the mobile computer you can e see who Is online e send and receive instant messages e have instant message conversations with groups of contacts To use MSN Messenger you need a Microsoft Passport M account or a Microsoft Exchange e mail account You need a Passport to use MSN Messenger Service If you have a Hotmail or MSN account you already have a Passport Once you have either a Microsoft Passport or a Microsoft Exchange account you can set up an account To switch to MSN Messenger tap Start Programs MSN Messenger icon Setting Up An Account Before you can connect set up the Passport or Exchange account and sign in 1 Tap Jools Options 2 Enter an e mail address and password 3 Tap Sign In If you use MSN Messenger on the host computer contacts automatically appear on the mobile computer 9 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Working with Contacts The MSN Messenger window is divided into Online and Not Online categories From this view while connected you can chat send e mail block the contact from chatting with you or delete contacts from the list using the pop up menu ES MSN Messenger m 5 09 LX Kim Akers Online Online A Adam Barr A Tap a contact to start a chat oh Randall Sway Not Online A Richard Bready A David Hodgson Tino Dein Send an Instant Message Send Mail
362. op up menu Enter the word you want to search for and tap the desired Find option Reader highlights found text on the page lo close Find tap outside the box To return to the original page tap the title and then tap Return on the pop up menu e Copy Text You can copy text from books that support this feature into any program that accepts text On a book page select the text you want to copy Then tap Copy Text on the pop up menu he text can be pasted into the program you choose e Bookmarks When you add a bookmark to a book a color coded bookmark icon appears in the right margin You can add multiple bookmarks to a book Then from anywhere in the book tap the bookmark icon to go to the bookmarked page Applications 9 35 e Highlights When you highlight text it appears with a colored background e Notes When you attach a note to text you enter the text in a note pad that appears on top of the book page A Note icon displays in the left margin To show or hide the note tap the icon e Drawings When you add a drawing a Drawing icon appears in the bottom left corner of the page and drawing tools appear across the bottom of the page Draw by dragging the stylus e lo see a list of a book s annotations including bookmarks highlights text notes and drawings tap Annotations Index on the book s cover page You can tap an entry in the list to go to the annotated page Removing a Book When you finish reading a book you can d
363. or Pocket PCs PRG 5250 Emulator Configuration The 5250 emulator configuration contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The 5250 emulator configuration uses the 53 key mapping when not in the emulator mode see Table E 6 for descriptions for the 53 key mappings The emulator mapping functions include e 5250 key functions e 5250 emulator keys e 5250 character map 5 O LG OIL DIE IES PRINT HEP E zx OM m o c S 0 Q ERINP CLREOF NIN A M z e E E E o 2 c za O z e P E 3 w lt a A Ifl A E EN e 90 006 e 9 1 Cm o E 0006 GC e SN INO My M s ji MJ S J wW JJ a Na ji m NG d Q UNA E LA nN a T zm a m zm mn N A A UL o n N 5 mI mn O E PI N NG y Qi NG y a G BB a e JE A NG o CI B gt M Jg gt AS Figure E 5 5250 Emulator Keypad CO For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API information about F6 F7 keys see the keypad s description table in Chapter2 Operating Keypad Maps 57 Table E 10 5250 Key Fun
364. or all bar codes e Pointer Timer sets the maximum beam timer in milliseconds 0 60 000 in increments of 100ms for pointer mode A value of 0 means infinite time out Tap to select the beam timer e faster Height is not supported e Tap Interface Params to view and modify the values of the following interface parameters e Interface Type e Power Settle Time e Enable Settle Time e Low Power Time e Tap Scan Params to view and modify the values of various scanner parameters e lap Device Info to see the values of the following parameters e Beam Width e Aim Mode e Scan Direction e Feedback e Supported Fmts e Max Image Rect e Tap Scanner Version to view the version numbers for the API MDD PDD decoder and hardware Refer to the SMDK Help File for Symbol Mobile Computers in the SMDK for eVC4 for details on the available parameter options Demo Program B 31 Symbol Security Tap Symbol Security on the Control Panelto view the security values of the mobile computer s features ES CtlPanel Example 41 m2 12 17 Xx Symbol Security Wavelink Gemini TelnetCE Ci Bad aff 3 e feas Figure B 34 Symbol Security Window B 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Imager et ImagerSample applications provided for the device can vary If the ImagerSample on the device does not match the ImagerSample described in this section see mager on page C 4 for additional information he ImagerSample app
365. or of the Enter Return key sends an extra character which causes a Microsoft Word or Notes application to exit To make the applications work properly create a registry file with the following entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD KeyKeypad SpecialEnterTabKey dword 0 where keyKeypad 28KEY 43KEY or 53KEY i e the number of keys on the keypad Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer t For detailed keypad information including ASCII values and VK codes see Appendix E Keypad Maps For information about using the soft keyboard input panel see Entering Information Using the Input Panel on page 2 45 Operating 2 17 3270 Emulator Keypad There are two physical configurations of the 3270 emulator keypad however both of the keypads are functionally identical The 3270 emulator keypad contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key The keypad is color coded to indicate the alternate function key blue values Note that keypad functions can be changed by an application so the mobile computers keypad may not function exactly as described See Table 2 4 on page 2 18 for key and button descriptions and lable 2 7 on page 2 29 for the keypad s special functions IY e ae E OL R5 pag O gt PA K Ol Q gt 3 un e UP HINP RDMR m
366. ossary GL 7 A server in the network or a service within a server that assigns IP addresses A bar code or symbol in which the spaces between characters intercharacter gaps are not part of the code A binary bar code symbology representing each character by a group of five bars two of which are wide The location of wide bars in the group determines which character is encoded spaces are insignificant Only numeric characters 0 to 9 and START STOP characters may be encoded The Control Panel allows you to set the IP address for a DNS Server if used This allows users to use server names rather than IP addresses It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel The Control Panel allows you to set a Domain Name for the DNS Server if used e g symbol com It is set on the Network tab of the Control Panel Disk Operating System This is basic software that allows you to load and use software applications on your computer Also see NetID Dynamic random access memory see Data Terminal Equipment European Article Number This European International version of the UPC provides its own coding format and symbology standards Element dimensions are specified metrically EAN is used primarily in retail see EPC Generic term for a bar or space Total linear dimension occupied by all characters of a code pattern including start stop characters and data ENO software handshaking is also supported for the data sent to the h
367. ost Encryption is the scrambling and coding of data typically using mathematical formulas called algorithms before information is transmitted over any communications link or network A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Decryption and Key GL 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG EPC ESD ESS_ID Ethernet Flash Disk Flash Memory File Transfer Protocol FTP The Electronic Product Code is an electronically coded tag that is intended as an improvement on the UPC bar code system The EPC is a 64 or 96 bit tag which contains a number called the Global Trade Identification Number GTIN Unlike a UPC number which only provides information specific to a group of products the GTIN gives each product its own specific identifying number giving greater accuracy in tracking The EPC was the creation of the MIT AutolD Center a consortium of over 120 global corporations and university labs The EPC system is currently managed by EPCGlobal Inc a subsidiary of the Flectronic Article Numbering International group and the Uniform Code Council UCC creators of the UPC bar code The EPC is used in the RFID system Electro Static Discharge Extended Service Set Identifier defines the coverage area Prior to the release of the 802 11 specification the ESS ID was called the Net ID or Network Identifier For mobile computers using Spectrum24 radios with t
368. other batteries charge properly If so replace the faulty battery The mobile computer is not fully attached to the MSR Detach and re attach the MSR to the mobile computer ensuring it is firmly connected During data communications no data was transmitted or transmitted data was incomplete Mobile computer detached from MSR during communications Incorrect cable configuration Reattach mobile computer to MSR and retransmit see the System Administrator Communications software is not installed or configured properly Perform setup as described in Chapter 4 Communications 13 17 13 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Modem Module Table 13 9 Troubleshooting the Modem Module Symptom Possible Cause Action Mobile computer is not communicating The modem cable is not fully connected Connect the modem cable securely to both the modem and the telephone jack through the modem Modem is not securely connected to the mobile computer Reconnect the modem firmly to the mobile computer Communication software is not installed or configured properly set up the communication software as described in the mobile computer s Product Reference Guide Problem in the telephone lines Mobile computer s battery is low or discharged which shuts off power to the modem Connect a conventional telephone and dial the remote modem to
369. ount Bracket 10 51 Attaching the Shelf Slide to the Wall Mount Bracket 10 51 One Single Slot Cradle Four Slot Battery Charger 10 51 Two Single Slot Cradles Four Slot Battery Chargers TT o 10 52 Four Slot Cradle V onda panes 10 53 Installing the Cradle Charger on the Bracket 10 53 XIV MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC rire ntn og hak tok Fe oS he KEE RHEE EEK Sede hE EES LEE Oo OO Required System Configurations NG ga Installation Requirements SMDK for eVC4 Contents and Locations UA UE o eso opea crack dun beeen Ga bone uit eve ae D KEEPER EC Installation Requirements SMDK for NET Contents and Locations UWA 10 OOO E Installation Requirements DCP for MC9000w Contents and Locations Installing Other Development Software Chapter 12 Configuring the Mobile Computer lina n mPPPX I Starting Terminal ConfigurationManager
370. ows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Accessory CAM and MSR Pin Outs Figure D 2 CAM and MSR Serial Connector Table D 5 CAM and MSR Serial Connector Pin outs PT NN o ew CO CON Kom AA so m so mm po po m mo LN LN LN LN NN Contents E MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Keypad Maps E 3 Introduction This appendix contains the keypad maps for the keypad configurations Each key is listed in the table with its value depending on the state of the keypad Keypads The mobile computer has five interchangeable modular keypads 28 key 43 key 53 key 32 0 Emulator 5250 Emulator VI Emulator The modular keypads can be changed in the field as necessary to support specialized applications E4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 28 Key Keypad Configuration The 28 key configuration contains a Power button application keys scroll keys and a function key See Table E 1 for key functions and Table E 2 for the keypad mappings The mapping functions include e 28 key functions e 28 key character map Figure E 1 28 Key Keypad Keypad Maps E 5 Table E 1 28 Key Functions Contrast monochrome Func 1 Brightness color Contrast monochrome lt Func gt lt 4 gt Brightness color For registry information about Enter Return and Green Red dot keys and API information about F6 F7 keys see
371. p OK when the process is complete The Synchronization Dialog box terminates automatically Background the AirBEAM Smart Client is invoked automatically during the boot sequence The package synchronization process is started automatically Nothing is displayed while the synchronization process is occurring RAM This check box specifies whether the automatic RAM management is enabled during the package Management synchronization process If enabled RAM management logic is invoked when there is not enough free disk space to download a package The RAM management logic attempts to remove any discardable AirBEAM packages resident on the client Suppress This check box specifies whether the automatic insertion of a file path separator character should be Separator suppressed when the client generated server package definition file names When enabled the parameter also disables the appending of apd to the package This feature is useful for AS 400 systems in which the file path separator character is a period When this feature is enabled the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 are appended as is when building the name for the server package definition file When this feature is disabled a standard file path separator is used to separate the server directory Directory and package name Package 1 Package 2 Package 3 and Package 4 when building the name for the server packa
372. page 3 53 for more information Remove Programs A Align the touch screen and enable ClearType fonts See Screen on page 3 54 for more information Screen Change 802 11 Mobile Unit settings See Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MB Radios on page 5 36 for detailed information about Spectrum24 FH settings Spectrum24 FH Settings Settings 3 9 Table 3 2 System Tab Applications Continued m II illi Change settings unique to the mobile computer See Symbol Settings on page 3 55 for more information Symbol Settings Connections Tab ES Settings Et 429 56 3 o 7 Beam Bluetooth Connections Br Wireless Ethernet Personal system Connections E Figure 3 3 Settings Connections Tab Table 3 2 lists the applications available in the System tab Table 3 3 System Tab Applications KA Detects incoming Bluetooth beams See Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology for more es information Beam oet up the Bluetooth radio to send and receive beams See Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology for more information Bluetooth 3 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 3 3 System Tab Applications Continued KA Change connection information See Connecting to the Internet on a Wireless Network on page 4 21 for more information Modify wireless Ethernet settings See Wireless Ethernet on page 3 59 for more information Wirel
373. perform the action on When the menu appears lift the stylus and tap the action to perform or tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action Priority Type minutes Buy birthday gift C Call Maria Proof new propasal Tap and hold to display Create Copy the pop up menu Delete Task Lift the stylus and tap the porem n action you want Tap outside the menu to close it without performing an action New Tools Figure 2 19 Pop up Menu Operating 2 45 Notifications The mobile computer notifies you when you have something to do For example if you ve set up an appointment in Calendar a task with a due date in Tasks or an alarm in Clock you ll be notified in any of the following ways e amessage box appears on the screen e asound which you can set is played To choose reminder types and sounds for the mobile computer tap Start Settings Personal tab Sounds amp Notifications icon Select the desired options See Sounds amp Notifications on page 3 23 for more information Entering Information To enter information you may e Use the keypad See Keypads on page 2 4 and Appendix E Keypad Maps for keypad functions e Use the input panel to enter typed text either using the soft keypad or writing characters e Write directly on the screen e Draw pictures on the screen e Speak into the microphone to record a message e Scan bar code data into data fields mobile computers with an integrate
374. ppears lap the word you want to use or tap the writing at the top of the menu to return to the original writing Tap to return to the original writing REPORTS report Or tap the word you Report want to use n RR S El New Edit Tools E Figure 2 28 Alternate List Writing Tips e Write neatly e Write on the lines and draw descenders below the line Cross off the t and write apostrophes below the top line so they are not confused with the word above Write periods and commas above the line e For better recognition try increasing the zoom level to 300 using the oo s menu e Leave large gaps between words so the mobile computer can easily tell where words begin and end e Hyphenated words foreign words that use special characters such as accents and some punctuation cannot be converted e f you add writing to a word to change it such as changing a 3 to an 8 after you attempt to recognize the word the writing you add is not included if you try to recognize the writing again 2 52 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Selecting Text To edit or format typed text select it by dragging the stylus across the text Cut copy and or paste text by holding the selected words then tapping an editing command on the pop up menu or by tapping the command on the Edit menu Selecting Writing To select writing to edit or format 1 Tap and hold the stylus next to the text you wan
375. priate file name in the list to open the file RFID Demo Program C 7 Saving a File Use the save option to save scanned data or save the currently loaded image file either as a new file name and or a new file format Saving an image file also applies any edit changes applied in edit mode If the file is not saved edit changes are lost when the application exits or another image is opened captured To save an acquired image 1 Tap File Save to display the Save As window it ng Symbol Image Cap ee 2 12 16 Marne Folder ka Type Text txt hd Location Main memory Figure C 4 Symbol Image Capture Save As Window Enter the name of the image to save in the Name text box select the folder in which you want to save the image from the Folder drop down list select the type of file to save e g Text BMP JPEG TIFF from the Type drop down list select the location in which to save the file from the Location drop down list Tap OK to save the image pe Iu ue xe iwi t By default all acquired images are automatically saved in Wy Documents see Misc on page C 25 for more information about the default location and naming convention of saved image files C 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Deleting a File Use the delete option to delete a saved image file To delete an image file 1 Tap Demo Capture to display the Capture window ng Symbol Image Cap 4e f 12 19
376. puter so that you have the most up to date information in both locations To create a new document in Pocket Word such as a letter meeting minutes or a trip report tap Start Programs Pocket Word New icon A blank document appears Or if you ve selected a template for new documents in the Options dialog box that template appears with appropriate formatting applied You can open only one document at a time when you open a second document you ll be asked to save the first You can save a document in a variety of formats including Word doc Pocket Word psw Rich Text Format rtf and Plain Text txt Pocket Word contains a list of the files stored on the mobile computer Tap a file in the list to open it To delete make copies of or send a file tap and hold a file in the list Then select the appropriate action on the pop up menu select the type of folder you want displayed in the list EU ES Tap to change the sort Blank Document 12 31 01 order of the list Meeting Notes 12 31 01 Memo 12 31 01 12 31 01 E 3 Create Copy Tap to open a document Delete Select All Tap and hold an item to see a Send via E mail pop up menu of actions Beam File Rename MorYe Mew Tools Tap to create a new item Figure 9 15 Using Pocket Word 9 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG You can enter information in Pocket Word in one of four modes writing drawin
377. quired to force the DHCP server to return the TETP server name field option 66 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid_xxxx_yy reg Use DHCP bootfile This check box control specifies whether the AirBEAM Smart Client uses the DHCP response option 67 to specify the Package and Package 1 parameters If enabled special RF network registry settings are required to force the DHCP server to return the Bootfile name field option 67 The special RF network registry settings are included but commented out in the radio network registry initialization files essid_xxxx_yy reg Synchronizing with the Server When the synchronization process is initiated the AirBEAM Smart Client attempts to open an FIP session using the AirBEAM Smart Client configuration Once connected the client processes the specified packages Packages are loaded only if the server version of a given package is different from the version loaded on the client Once the upload process is complete the AirBEAM Smart Client closes the FIP session with the server The AirBEAM Smart Client can launch an FIP session with the server either manually when initiated by the user or automatically Manual Synchronization 1 Configure the AirBEAM Smart Client See Configuring the AirBEAM Smart Client on page 7 4 2 From the main AirBEAM CE window tap File Synchronize 3 Once connecte
378. r For serial and USB communication setup procedures see Chapter 4 Communications Indicator LED Bar opare Battery Charging opare Well Battery opare Battery Charging Well opare Battery Charging m serial Port USB Port Power Port Figure 10 4 Single Slot Serial USB Cradle The Single Slot Serial USB Cradle has the following attributes e Provides 15VDC power for operating the mobile computer e Provides serial and USB ports for data communication between the mobile computer and a host computer or other serial devices e g a printer e synchronizes information between the mobile computer and a host computer With customized or third party software it can also be used to synchronize the mobile computer with corporate databases 10 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e Charges the mobile computer s battery e Charges a spare battery Setup o The cradle requires a dedicated port on the host Select either serial or USB for communications Do not connect the cradle to both serial and USB ports serial Port Serial Cable serial Port USB Port Power Port DC Cable USB Port USB Cable AC Line Cord Power Supply Figure 10 5 Single Slot Cradle Power Serial USB Connections Accessories 10 13 Battery Charging Indicators The the Single Slot Serial USB Cradle can charge the mobile computer s main battery and a spare battery simultaneously T
379. r NET Contents and Location Class library assemblies Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio NET 2003 XCompactFrameworkSDKW1 0 5000Windows CE Forms source code Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NETW1 1Windows CE Source sample applications Program FilesiSymbol Mobility Developer Kit for NETW1 1Windows CE Samples Help files Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE Help Files Updates to native drivers Program Filesisymbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE DriverUpdates CAB files Program Files Symbol Mobility Developer Kit for NET v1 1 Windows CE MassDeployment DCP for MC9000w Installation Requirements The DCP for MC9000w has no additional installation requirements 11 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG DCP for MC9000w Contents and Locations The DCP for MC9000w contains the components listed in Table 11 3 Table 11 3 DCP Contents and Locations Components Directory Location Files that make up the Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000wVW1 OV ash Folders flash partitions File used to create Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages WMC9000wW1 OV ash device splash screen Folders Splash Hex image default Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000w v1 0 Hex Images location Product Reference Guide Program Files Symbol Device Configuration Packages MC9000wW1 Readme Program Files
380. r o a AM symbol AM PM symbol PM we JT Figure 3 46 Regional Settings Window Time Tab oelect the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab select the Date tab Ey settings Pa PETE MO Regional Settings Short date 516 03 Long date Friday May 16 2003 Short date Midiy a PRU Long date dddd MMMM dd vyyy o Calendar type Gregorian Calendar x Figure 3 47 Regional Settings Window Date Tab 10 Select the desired options The characteristics available are determined by the region selected on the Region tab 11 Tap ok Settings 3 53 Remove Programs Use the Remove Programs window to remove programs that were loaded onto the mobile computer 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Remove Programs icon 9 settings e 4 438 D Remove Programs Programs in storage memory Microsoft Remote Display Control Remove Total storage memory available 2gasak Adjust memory allocation E Figure 3 48 Remove Programs Window 2 From the Programs in storage memory list box select the program you want to remove 3 Tap Remove eo You can only remove programs that you have installed in RAM 4 Tapok 3 54 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Screen Use the Screen window to align the screen and to enable ClearType fonts 1 Tap Start Settings System tab Screen icon e 46439 Ali
381. r Pocket PCs PRG Tasks Use Tasks to keep a to do list oelect the category of tasks you want displayed in the list oelect the sort order of the list Indicates high priority Priority Buy birthday gift Call Maria Proof new proposal Tap to display or edit the Create Copy task details Dekte Jas Tap and hold to display a Beam Task pop up menu of actions Mew Tools Tap to create a new contact Figure 9 7 Task Application To change the way information displays in the list tap Tools Options eu To create a task 1 Tap Start Tasks to open the application Applications 9 11 2 Tap New Tap to return to the task list the task is saved automatically Tap to choose from Subject predefined subjects Priority Normal Status Mot Completed Starts None Due Mone Occurs Once Reminder Mone Categories Mo categories Notes lace for d s a good place fo maps and directions Ct ati Edit Figure 9 8 Creating a Task 3 Using the input panel enter a description in the Subject field You can enter a start date and due date or enter other information by first tapping the field If the input panel is open hide it to see all available fields 5 To assign the task to a category tap Categories and select a category from the list In the task list you can display tasks by category 6 To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a
382. r charge indicator light remains lit see Table 1 1 on page 1 11 for charge status indications Charge time is less than four hours The mobile computer can be charged using a cradle the CAM with a charging cable or the MSR with the appropriate power supply The mobile computer is equipped with a memory backup battery which automatically charges from the fully charged main battery When the mobile computer is used for the first time the backup battery requires approximately 15 hours to fully charge This is also true any time the backup battery Is discharged which occurs when the main battery is removed for several hours The backup battery retains data in memory for at least 30 minutes when the mobile computer s main battery is removed When the mobile computer reaches a very low battery state the combination of main battery and backup battery retains data in memory for at least 72 hours Do not remove the main battery within the first 15 hours of use If the main battery is removed before the backup battery is fully charged data may be lost ES The following accessories can be used to charge batteries e Cradles The mobile computer slips into the cradles for charging the battery in the mobile computer and spare batteries where applicable For detailed cradle setup and charging procedures see e Single Slot Serial USB Cradle on page 10 11 e Four Slot Ethernet Cradle on page 10 14 and Four Slot Charge Only Cradles on page 10 17
383. r does not Scanning application is not Verify that the unit is loaded with a scanning accept scan input loaded application See the System Administrator Unreadable bar code Ensure the symbol is not defaced Distance between exit Ensure mobile computer is within proper scanning window and bar code is range Incorrect Mobile computer is not Ensure the mobile computer is programmed to accept programmed for the bar code the type of bar code being scanned Mobile computer is not If a beep on a good decode is expected and a beep is programmed to generate a not heard check that the application is set to beep generate a beep on good decode Battery is low If the scanner stops emitting a laser beam when the trigger is pressed check the battery level When the battery is low the scanner shuts off before the mobile computer low battery condition notification Note If the scanner is still not reading symbols contact the distributor or Symbol Technologies MC906R G RFID Only The following error message Corrupt or missing DLL wrong Ensure the latest RFIDAPI32 DLL file is being used appears when launching an RFID version of DLL Ensure the RFIDAPI32 DLL file is located in the application Windows directory Place a copy in the VPlatform Cannot find XXXXXXXXXX or folder as well since the cold boot process always one of it s components Make copies the RFIDAPI32 DLL file located in the Platform sure the path and filename are
384. r more information on using MSN Messenger tap Start Help Applications 9 3 Windows Media Player With Windows Media Player on the mobile computer you can play digital audio and video files that are stored on the mobile computer To switch to Windows Media Player tap Start Windows Media E i Windows Media LE C Xx o Windows Media 64 kbps f Windows Media Player Indicates the progress of the current track Slide to adjust volume Tap to turn volume on off Tap to skip to the next song Tap to play a previous song Tap to stop Tap to play or pause Figure 9 23 Using Windows Media Player Use the host computer to copy digital audio and video files to the mobile computer The mobile computer can play Windows Media and MP3 files For more information on using Windows Media Player tap Start Help 9 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Microsoft Reader Use Microsoft Reader to read eBooks on the mobile computer Download books to the host computer from a favorite eBook Web site Then use ActiveSync to copy the book files to the mobile computer The books appear in the Reader Library where you can tap them in the list to open them Each book consists of a cover page an optional table of contents and the pages of the book You can e Page through the book by using the Up Down control on the device or by tapping the page number on each page e Annotate the book with highlightin
385. r non RFID mobile computers B 32 imager sample PMN TTE ET EET TT TT B 32 IN 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG imagersample screens filesave B 34 imager RFID AcqCap ae frame skip C 16 ae settle C 16 aiming pattern ON sawsaw sa ka waaa ka C 15 analog gain 00 YA C 15 atQexDOSUIB ia wa C 15 DONES ncvevciceataadonndeea C 15 Mar xs qtia da qu abc es C 15 focal length C 16 AM porra rara C 15 0 ed ed ch ae een dee iced hes C 28 delete file C 8 PEN pr rra rr rada C 4 AS C 24 uv Jg E C 23 get image timeout C 24 NOME SOURS CONN ua cosa C 24 ce rr des C 23 powermode C 23 rgb data format C 24 Ball secon TEC C 29 BID eaa deco tees PE C 9 Image capture C 9 C 12 ImgCap C 4 co cpi E C 19 Crop SENS AA C 18 E METRE C 17 BID DOE serranas C 18 TD VERON kia C 18 peg TUE SPO ozu dca uh ue C 17 jpeg guality C 17 negative image C 19 rotateimage C 19 use video vf crop settings C 18 launching C 5 VI peepee CB GAN roe ov ee as C 4 asalak e escorias pere C 26 file name prefix C 26 file save path C 26 next file sequ
386. ram can write data to a file located in the Application folder just as it would to the Windows folder However the file in the Application folder is in non volatile storage and is not lost on a cold boot e g when power is removed for a long period of time standard tools such as ActiveSync can be used to copy files to and from the FFS partitions They appear as the Application and Platform folders to the ActiveSync explorer This is useful when installing applications on the mobile computer Applications stored in the Application folder are retained even when the mobile computer is cold booted just as the Demo 9000 program is retained in memory There are two device drivers included in the Windows CE image to assist developers in configuring the mobile computer following a cold boot RegMerge and CopyFiles Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 29 RegMerge dll RegMerge dll is a built in driver that allows registry edits to be made to the Windows CE Registry Regmerge dll runs very early in the boot process and looks for registry files reg files in certain Flash File System folders during a cold boot It then merges the registry changes into the system registry located in RAM since the registry is re created on every cold boot from the default ROM image the RegMerge driver Is necessary to make registry modifications persistent over cold boots RegMerge is configured to look in the root of two specific folders for reg files in the
387. ransferred one plane at a time first the entire red plane then the entire green plane and finally the entire blue plane In Chunky mode the RGB data for each pixel is transferred in an interface fashion one pixel at a time R G B R G B etc The default value is Chunky and cannot be changed Describes the general color characteristic of the integrated light source The default value is Red and cannot be changed Defines the maximum length of time in milliseconds for the hardware to capture an image based on capture settings i e exposure The default value is 4000 Any value is allowed Tap the Version tab to display read only hardware and software versions on the mobile computer 53 Symbol Image Cap z ff 12 29 e On Screen Keyboard ImageDemoa Version Image APT Version MOD Layer Version POD Layer Version Hardware version JPEG Library version Figure C 15 Symbol Image Capture Version Tab RFID Demo Program C 25 Table C 5 VerCap Fields ma asain 0000 Image Demo Version Provides the version number of the Image sample application Image API Version Provides the version number of the Image Capture API Provides the version number of the still image capture driver MDD Layer Version MDD layer Provides the version number of the still image capture driver PDD Layer Version PDD Provides the version number of the imaging hardware This is the version of the ImgOperations DLL currently being
388. rator for this Information 12 Tap the P Config tab AF Network e aff 3 59 X IP Configuration Gateway Authentication Encryption IP Config pf 4 b E Figure 4 23 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP 13 Select either DHCP or Static from the P Type drop down list 14 f you select Static IP enter the required data in the fields that appear in the window See the network administrator for this information 15 Tap ok 16 Tap ok 17 The Mobile Companion wireless status icon should indicate that the mobile computer is connected to the AP If the status icon does not indicate that the mobile computer is connected to the AP see the network administrator Communications 4 25 18 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon Advanced tab EJ settings e 46627 Connections Networks are groups of settings used by programs to automatically connect to an ISP or private network Select Networks Dialing rules determine how a number is dialed from a specific location Select Location Select what your network card connects to Network Card Advanced Figure 4 24 Connections Window Advanced Tab 19 Tap Network Card Ihe Configure Network Adapters window appears Tap an adapter to modify settings NE2000 Compatible Ethernet Driver L2TP NDISYWAN Miniport AsyncMac NDISW AN Miniport PPTP NDISYWAN Miniport 502 116 Wireless LAN Figure 4 25 Configure Network Adap
389. re listed in the bottom portion of the cover page The first time you open a book you ll probably want to go to the first page or to the table of contents if there is one Subsequently whenever you open the book you ll be automatically taken to the last page read 9 34 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG In addition to the text each book page includes a page number and book title Tap to select a navigation option The Call of the Wild were booming the find thousands Northland Thy Add Bookmark Drag to select text and icis eie Add Highlight then tap an option muscles by whig nil Mois coats to prote dd Drawing frost Find Buck lived Copy Text the sun kissed Sa 7 Judge Miller s place iti Was called It stood back from the road half hidden among the trees through which glimpses could be caught of the wide cool veranda that ran Tap arrows to turn the page 45b or tap and hold page to bring up page riffle Figure 9 25 Reading a Book You can also page through a book using the Up Down arrow keys on the keypad of the mobile computer Using Reader Features Reading a book electronically gives you several options not available with paper books These options are available from any book page e Select text by dragging across the text on the page Then tap an option on the pop up menu as described here e Search for Text Find text in a book by tapping Find on the p
390. re on the host computer download the latest version of the software from http devzone symbol com Refer to the instructions included with the software Installing eConnect CO eConnect is used only when establishing a connection using the Four Slot Ethernet cradle To install eConnect on the mobile computer Ne CU Ensure ActiveSync is installed and running on the host computer nstalling ActiveSync on page 4 3 Ensure a partnership was established between the host computer and the mobile computer see Setting up a Partnership on page 4 5 Download the latest version of the eConnect software from http devzone symbol com to the host computer On the host computer display the ActiveSync Explorer and copy the cab file to the My Pocket PC Temp folder On the mobile computer locate the cab file in the File Explorer Temp folder Tap the eConnect cab file once to install eConnect The cab file is removed from the File Explorer Temp folder automatically when the installation is complete Tap X to close File Explorer Warm boot the mobile computer to add the eConnect icon to the Settings System tab eConnect is reinstalled automatically after a cold boot Communications 4 15 9 Onthe mobile computer tap Start Settings System tab and tap the eConnect icon to display the Settings eConnect window EJ Settings eConnect 4x m2 1 56 ok ES Settings et 46155 9 EL eConnect Settings v3
391. recording For more information on creating notes see Notes on page 9 13 7 Tap OK to return to the task list CO To create a task with only a subject tap Tools Entry Bar Then tap in the Tap here to add a new task field and enter task information 9 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Using the Summary Screen When you tap a task in the task list a summary screen appears lo change the task tap Edit Send status report View task details Starts 6 18 2002 Due 8 19 2002 Tap to show and hide additional Send to whole team using new format summary information View notes Edit Tools Tap to change task Figure 9 9 Task Summary Screen Applications 9 13 Notes Capture thoughts reminders ideas drawings and phone numbers with Notes You can create a written note or a recording You can also include a recording in a note If a note is open when you create the recording it is included in the note as an icon If the note list is displayed it is created as a stand alone recording Tap to change the Li Business1 8 54 a sort order of the list Joutlook Motes1 8 54 a 8 54 a a 8 54 a ap to open a note Or play Create Copy a recording Delete Select All Send via E mail Tap and hold to display a Beam File pop up menu of actions Rename Mote Tap to record Tap to show or hide the Recording toolbar Tap to create a new contact Figure 9 10 Note
392. removing main battery 1 8 removing programs 3 8 KU A 3 11 reset hard 1 15 1 18 2 6 2 8 2 10 2 12 esses 2 14 2 16 2 18 2 20 2 22 2 24 esses 2 26 2 28 2 31 2 62 2 63 3 20 Reddere bte e pew UL D e Lo d i ats d Ud IN 9 A EE 5 45 6 4 B 19 A 2 31 2 62 3 20 CIA ig NA MAMBA 3 30 3 33 3 55 6 4 resetting 2 62 BIS APA PAPA 5 8 6 4 RHD os M C 37 cca iar PR C 35 END ai RE bamba e easiest e C 38 TUB NGO ia C 36 E AAA C 38 A AA C 32 locatetag C 39 KI T C 37 mode menu C 38 o ENT TE TEL Om C 40 o A 2 61 6 34 A C 38 savino tag dall PAA C 35 scan barcode C 41 BRIN DOES occa sas eh AWAKE 523442554 C 34 RFID sample application C 32 I corriera rare C 24 rogue AP detection 5 29 inc Mir PR C 19 RTSthreshold 5 36 5 38 S saving RFD tag dala uuesascetiaerenwdectera C 35 DEO SIMS oou esuada qax ex qu DE aed cotemaa i 2 62 scan status See a so data capture scanner ERUNT B 28 IN 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG scanning barcodes 2 59 21 kai II B 13 imagerdemo C 10 C 11 Imager sample C 4 WONG erario jade 2 57 ro
393. res DNS to operate properly If DNS is not configured Web sites cannot be located and or email delivery fails WINS WINS is a Microsoft Net BIOS name server WINS eliminates the broadcasts needed to resolve computer names to IP addresses by providing a cache or database of translations 5 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Power 1 Select the Power tab to set the Radio Transmission Power level and the Power Saving Modes for the mobile computer profile e 46403 X Radio Transmission Power Infrastructure e 46403 X ES Radio Transmission Power Ad Hoc Maximum Automatic Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Automatic Power Saving Mode Manual Power Saving Mode Excellent Network Performance Uses less battery power Encryption IP Config Power ale E Excellent Network Performance Uses less battery power Encryption Power Infrastructure Mode m AdH oc Mode Figure 5 18 Mobile Companion Power Tab Adjusting the Radio Transmission Power level enables you to expand or confine the transmission area with respect to other wireless devices that could be operating nearby Reducing a coverage area in high traffic areas improves transmission quality by reducing the number of noises in that coverage area Table 5 8 Power Tab Fields KC AA GM Radio Transmission Power In Infrastructure mode There are two transmission power Options Select Automat
394. rk 45 7020 1718 Outside Denmark Finland Suomi Oy Symbol Technologies Kaupintie 8 A 6 FIN 00440 Helsinki Finland 9 5407 580 Inside Finland 358 9 5407 580 Outside Finland Canada symbol Technologies Canada Inc 5180 Orbitor Drive Mississauga Ontario Canada LAW 5L9 1 866 416 8545 Inside Canada 905 629 7226 Outside Canada Asia Pacific Symbol Technologies Asia Inc Singapore Branch 230 Victoria Street 05 07 09 Bugis Junction Office Tower singapore 188024 Tel 65 6796 9600 Fax 65 6337 6488 Austria Osterreich symbol Technologies Austria GmbH Prinz Eugen Strasse 70 2 Haus 1040 Vienna Austria 01 5055794 0 Inside Austria 43 1 5055794 0 Outside Austria Europe Mid East Distributor Operations Contact your local distributor or call 44 118 945 7360 France symbol Technologies France Centre d Affaire d Antony 3 Rue de la Renaissance 92184 Antony Cedex France 01 40 96 52 21 Inside France 33 1 40 96 52 50 Outside France MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Germany Deutschland oymbol Technologies GmbH Waldstrasse 66 D 63128 Dietzenbach Germany 6074 49020 Inside Germany 49 6074 49020 Outside Germany Latin America Sales Support 2130 University Dr Coral Springs FL 33065 USA 1 800 347 0178 Inside United States 1 954 255 2610 Outside United States 954 340 9454 Fax Netherlands Nederland oymbol Technologies Kerkplein 2 7051 CX Po
395. rn turns on to assist in aiming If necessary the mobile computer turns on its red LED to illuminate the target bar code he green scan LED lights and an audible beep sounds by default to indicate the bar code was decoded successfully Linear bar code PDF417 symbol p 1 yw EM Aa gt View Finder ee Aiming Pattern Correct Figure 2 34 Bar Code Centered in Aiming Pattern E NEL IF F Correct Incorrect Figure 2 35 Bar Code Not Centered in Aiming Pattern 4 Release the trigger Operating 2 61 Imager decoding usually occurs instantaneously The mobile computer repeats the steps required to take a digital picture image of a poor or difficult bar code as long as the trigger remains pulled CO Scanning Tips Optimal scanning distance varies with bar code density and scanner optics e Hold the scanner farther away for larger symbols e Move the scanner closer for symbols with bars that are close together scanning procedures depend on the application and mobile computer configuration An application may use different scanning procedures from the one listed above Reading RFID Tags 1 Ensure that an RFID tag reader enabled application is loaded on the mobile computer 2 Aim the scan exit window at the tag For a successful tag read the allowable read distance from the front of the mobile computer s scan exit window to the tag is 2 ft 10 ft 061 m to 3 1 m Rea
396. rnet Package Exchange Sequential Packet Exchange A communications protocol for Novell IPX is Novell s Layer 3 protocol similar to XNS and IP and used in NetWare networks SPX is Novell s version of the Xerox SPP protocol Kerberos is a network authentication protocol It is designed to provide strong authentication for client server applications by using secret key cryptography A free implementation of this protocol is available from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology Kerberos Is available in many commercial products as well A key is the specific code used by the algorithm to encrypt or decrypt the data Also see Encryption and Decrypting Local area network A radio network that supports data communication within a local area such as within a warehouse of building A type of bar code reader that uses a beam of laser light Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation The laser is an intense light source Light from a laser is all the same frequency unlike the output of an incandescent bulb Laser light is typically coherent and has a high energy density Laser Diode LCD LED Indicator Liquid Crystal Display LCD Light Emitting Diode MAC Address also called IEEE Address MC MIL Misread Misdecode Mobile Computer NCU NetBeui GL 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG A gallium arsenide semiconductor type of laser connected to a power source to generate a
397. ro could not be written to Retry the download If the failure persists it is most likely due to a hardware failure the mobile computer requires servicing Transmission checksum error 11 An error occurred during transmission from the source device either radio card or Serial port and the checksum check failed Check source device connectivity and retry Can t write to the destination device Readback checksum error 12 A checksum generated from reading back data that was written to the destination device was incorrect An error during transmission or a write error to the destination device could cause this There is no more heap space 14 There is no more heap space available for the available download procedure Restart IPL and retry the download If the failure persists contact service with details of what is being downloaded Insufficient data available to 2 A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file format complete record Invalid Symbol HEX file 23 A Symbol HEX file download was attempted but the HEX file is invalid Ensure the file is in Symbol HEX file format Unrecognized or unsupported HEX 24 The Symbol HEX file being downloaded contains an record invalid or unrecognized HEX record Ensure the file is in proper Symbol HEX file format 12 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 12 4 IPL Errors Continued
398. ro static discharge e mail connection creating messages 9 19 ai A SA ea 9 15 e 4 23 5 5 5 36 open system 4 23 5 16 TKIP WPA 0c cece ee eee 5 17 WEF ccciiavcasedncedecanedexese A2 6 17 ENE PUONAMONUTN Wa 5 41 Index entering characters 2 47 entering information 2 45 drawing on screen 2 53 recording message 2 54 still image capture C 13 writing on screen 2 48 Cee a ae 2 45 enterprise level wi fi protected access 5 35 error messages 12 22 12 24 Ei carrasco ore YI 5 5 5 27 5 36 5 38 A Ethernet communication NOS COMO aa 4 16 modifying cradle settings 4 18 setting IP address 4 16 DHCP server config 4 16 o Wa 4 15 installing eConnect 4 14 Ethernet settings 3 99 Excel DOT Le aso eee eee E UPANA 9 25 GIS II II sie ie external power 332 F TACO IPIS ooa santana vedas anas 9 36 fil explorer csse 2 58 12 4 B 14 EPUM gana PA PA PAA kg F file name prefix C 26 file save path 0 0 26 finding information 2 56 Tix aspect GUO IA aa sasa shell flashcard 1 6 10 5 10 9 ASA TUE SVG c
399. rogram files reside in the Application partition on the mobile computer If this partition was not loaded to the device it can be obtained from the Symbol Web site and loaded using TCM see Chapter 12 Configuring the Mobile Computer for instructions on using TCM The sample application programs included in the 9000 Demo are provided for the purpose of demonstration and are to be used as is Although each program was thoroughly tested there always exists the possibility of coding errors The source code for each sample application is provided in the SMDK for eVCA to allow a jump start into mobile application development In the unlikely event a coding error is found in one of the sample applications having access to the source code allows the customer to fix the error If the demo program is already on the mobile computer tap Start 9000 Demo f the demo program was downloaded into the Application directory on the mobile computer navigate to the directory using File Explorer and tap 9000 Demo The Series 9000 Demo window displays ES Series 9000 Demo 4 4211 12 EY FH Test Apps Scan Files Op ua Sounds Images Cti Panel r 1 a Imager PC Link RFID 2 About OTL Figure C 1 Series 9000 Demo Window eo For information about the other sample applications in the Series 9000 Demo program see Appendix B Demo Program C 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Imager The Imager sa
400. rtificates EF Manage Certificate ee 2 29 ok ES Manage Certificates Existing certificates aaa Root Class 2 Public Primar Root Class 3 Public Primar Root Entrust net Certifica Root Entrust net Secure S Details Delete Tap and Hold Install new certificate 82 User client y3 Root server TLS only TLS and PEAP Figure 5 9 Manage Certificates 2 E EN we KO Spectrum24 Configuration 5 13 Tap User client on the Manage Certificates window to request the retrieval of a User Certificate EAP TLS only E3 Manage Certificat e 2 11 47 ok peg Install User Certificate User domainluser name Figure 5 10 EAP TLS Install User Certificate Enter the User Password and Server information in their respective text boxes A Progress dialog appears to indicate the status of the certificate retrieval On the Manage Certificates window tap Root server to request the installation of a Server Certificate EAP TLS and PEAP E9 Manage Certificat e M2 11 49 ok 4 Install Root Certificate Issued By Issued To Valid From Valid To Browse Install Certificate Figure 5 11 EAP TLS PEAP Install Root Certificate 5 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG CO The Server Certificate must be downloaded to the mobile computer prior to installation 8 Tap Browse to locate the Server Certificate on the mobile compuer B
401. rything outside the cropped region is darkened FRAME The whole image is displayed and the cropped region is framed with a rectangle RFID Demo Program C 21 Table C 3 VFCap Fields Continued ma Mem X Coordinate Specifies in pixels the X coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle that is used to crop the viewfinder Image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Y Coordinate Specifies in pixels the Y coordinate of the top left corner of the rectangle that is used to crop the viewfinder image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Width Specifies in pixels the width of the rectangle that is used to crop the viewfinder image If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses a width that encompasses the entire viewfinder image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 Height Specifies in pixels the height of the rectangle that is used to crop the viewfinder image If the current value is set to 0 this capability is ignored and the device uses a height that encompasses the entire viewfinder image The default value is 0 Allowed values are any value equal to or greater than 0 C 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 3 VFCap Fields Continued meen X Coordinate Specifies in pixels the X coordinate
402. s Launching RFID To launch the RFID sample application tap Start 9000 Demo RFID icon If the demo program is not already running on the mobile computer it can be launched from the Application folder by tapping Start Programs File Explorer Application folder When the RFID sample application is launched the main ags window displays bt Ey Gemini RFID e E Mol List of unique tags tags read Attenuation Pul Trigger ta Start Reading m Attenuation value n slide bar Menu buttons File Mode Figure C 23 RFID Main Tags Window RFID Demo Program C 33 Table C 7 Main Tags Window Icons Menus em TO bai Launches the Locate Tag window see Locate Tag on page C 39 Launches the Program Tag window see Program Tag on page C 40 Clears the tag list see Clearing the Display on page C 35 Launches the bar code Image Capture application see Scan Bar Code on page C 41 Saves the complete list of tags see Saving Tag Data on page C 35 Previous and Nextbuttons appear on the menu when read tags exceed the amount of tags that can fit in the tag list display Tap to display the previous page Tap to display the next page File and Mode menus see File Menu on page C 36 and Mode Menu on page C 38 Tap to disable enable the sound when a tag is read The RFID Module Power On icon displayed next to the Speaker icon indicates that the RFID radio module is powered on and attempting
403. s 3 TCMscripts Tools Add ons Application Platform Splash MC9000w v1 0 64M Figure 12 1 TCM Startup Window Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 5 The following table lists the components of the TCM window Table 12 1 TCM Components km Comore nc Displays the files to be used in the creation of the partition s D o File Explorer Window Create button Open button Save button Large icons button Small icons button Used to select the files to be added to the script Create a new script file Open an existing script file save the current script file View the current script items as large icon View the current script items as small icon 12 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 12 1 TCM Components Continued CEN ICON WAA WA List button View the current script items as a list Details button View the current script items with more details About button Display version information for TCM Properties button View change the current script properties Check button Check the script for errors files not found Download the hex image to the mobile computer ry Build button Build the current script into a set of hex files Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 7 Table 12 1 TCM Components Continued ke Comore ncn WA Tile button Arrange the sub windows in a tiled orientation Build and Send Build the current script into a set of hex image
404. s buttons and the Input Panel button It can also include icons of active radios or programs where applicable see Table 2 9 To create a new item in the current program tap New To see the name of a button hold the stylus on the button Drag the stylus off the button so the command is not carried out Tap to change volume or mute all sounds PR Start Tap to close program Eg E Tap to quickly select a program G Today recently used Jil 9000 Demo a ActiveSync BB Contacts in Inbox Tap to select a program 4 Internet Explorer LE t Rapid Deployment Client Tasks G Windows Media fa Programs 3 Tap to see additional programs Le Settings Tap to customize the device Es Find Input Panel Help H New button button Mew Edit Tools E T Ty Menu names Buttons Figure 2 9 Screen Navigation Operating 2 35 Status Icons You may see the status icons listed in Table 2 8 on the navigation bar located at the top of the screen Table 2 8 Status Icons DI NN Turns all sounds on and off Battery Backup battery is very low Main battery is charging Main battery is low Main battery is very low Main battery is full oynchronization is occurring Instant Message Notification that one or more instant messages were received E Mail Notification that one or more e mail messages were received Time and Next Displays current time in analog or digital format Appointment Multiple Notifications Ther
405. s Application To create a note 1 Tap Start Notes to open the application 2 lap New 9 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3 Create a note by writing drawing typing and recording For more information about using the input panel writing and drawing on the screen and creating recordings see Chapter 2 Operating Tap to return to the task list the task is saved automatically Team meeting notes Adam will send current status to core team Julie will get the revenue numbers Tanner is back from the conference and reports that the product was a big hit 12331 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tabu wj e r t v uji o p aP ajs d f H h j k T Shift z x c v b n m F DU DING cuj tl V Ela Tap to show or hide New Edit Tools 53 lA the input panel Tap to write on the screen Tap to add a recording to the note Figure 9 11 Creating a Note Applications 9 15 Inbox Use Inbox to send and receive e mail messages in the following ways e synchronize e mail messages with Microsoft Exchange or Outlook on the host computer e Send and receive e mail messages by connecting directly to an e mail server through an Internet service provider ISP or a network Synchronizing E mail Messages To synchronize e mail messages first enable Inbox synchronization in ActiveSync options For information on enabling Inbox synchronization refer to Activesync Help on
406. s F 43 Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default VK Code ASCII Value State Decimal Decimal i M Ca IA C S C _A SO A Y pi 4 fl frag ka See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 44 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Sl ms em State Decimal Decimal Bo qo pj J EC p opo m p lo fs fg Op O p o oq ko qp o pj qe p o COIN o m Jg poo JI p LL e o CI Fo po p o 6 pm LE LLL m m yo p qe lg LOL Rem S mo j j 2p p DANI CON m IT TO CO ff a E CO IR CITE TO fe le CITI O js fp See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps 45 Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued pepe wr ms em State Decimal Decimal li KN OW lg m L E m jd ps m m pe m l l1 m P gJpee Jm NNNM m ecc LUI ILE ee A oo le lug A A OA C D O a BOE A Ca AAA EA A EA pop po s TE A OA 14CC A ESA MA AA a a KAA qw wo See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 46 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 6 53 Key Keypad Mapping Continued 10
407. s and send the hex images to the mobile computer Preferences button View change the global TCM options 12 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Defining Script Properties Before a script IS created the script properties must be defined This defines the type of mobile computer flash type number of disks being created and the memory configuration of each disk partition To define the script properties 1 Select the Script window to make it active 2 Click the Properties button The Script Properties window Partition Data tab appears Ill SCRIPT PROPERTIES Terminal x Partition Data ptions Flash Type Disks 8080C 2 m Partition T able Properties Volume Label Access Disk 1 Platform 19968 a Read wiite y Disk2 Application 12032 Read Write v DK Cancel Figure 12 2 Script Properties Window Partition Data Tab In the Terminal drop down list the MC9000w v1 0 64M entry is already selected Use the default Flash Type In the Disks drop down list select the number of disk partitions to create select the memory Size for each partition Note that adding space to one disk partition subtracts it from another Inthe Access drop down list for each disk partition determine and select the Read Write access option no P c Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 9 8 Click the Options tab The Script Properties window Options tab appears L SCRIPT PROPERTIES Term
408. s v vi MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Feroimim LINO POOL IIIA oe ORO 2 63 Chapter 3 Settings Laba An 3 5 a AA 3 5 Personal TaD 3 5 o AA e PAPAG REPE 3 7 Connections TaD 3 9 coh dna pea ee ERIS bree as ote oe bee eeu canoe ede dunes ees 3 11 atere A rra iris ie a Rad eee aes 3 11 Uta E A 3 11 A 3 12 OU PARTIDO ercer res E ES ee EGO HERE nieder 3 12 Word Completion 3 13 Nini AAA 3 14 q LL recep bag oon na pared diui we ee ne EN 3 15 scudo a once cae J creta cheek dns das aa 3 15 MES RI raqueta raid et ac pend Gs areas drena iaa 3 16 Owner Information 3 17 IAE erre ddr TETTE TOTO TTE 3 17 Notes 3 18 Passwords AAA 3 20 PI ops ep oad os TI RTT TOTIS 3 20 ae ee pee ae a ke Se ke oe oe ee ee WAG aed 3 22 sala AR APP A de E 3 23 AMIE amd hed ea os INI EIA ree 3 23 o cee ee na ence EUR TT TETTE 3 24 no WO bbaekenaesbewets 3 25 Appearance 3 25 Dos 3 26 A 3 27 b ETC cy iden TOT TTE heen AP 3 27 bf P 3 28 WA KI a noe ieee EE E USE KARIN HORROR ARE ERE DEOR ER ER Y 3 29 Backlight
409. sically safe even if all laser output were directed into the eye s pupil There are no special operating procedures for this class CDRH Class 2 Cellular Digital Packet Data Character Character Set Check Digit Codabar Code 128 Code 3 of 9 Code 39 Code 93 Code Length Cold Boot COM port Glossary GL 5 No additional software mechanisms are needed to conform to this limit Laser operation in this class poses no danger for unintentional direct human exposure See CDPD A pattern of bars and spaces which either directly represents data or Indicates a control function such as a number letter punctuation mark or communications control contained in a message Those characters available for encoding in a particular bar code symbology A digit used to verify a correct symbol decode The scanner inserts the decoded data into an arithmetic formula and checks that the resulting number matches the encoded check digit Check digits are required for UPC but are optional for other symbologies Using check digits decreases the chance of substitution errors when a symbol Is decoded A discrete self checking code with a character set consisting of digits 0 to 9 and six additional characters A high density symbology which allows the controller to encode all 128 ASCII characters without adding extra symbol elements A versatile and widely used alphanumeric bar code symbology with a set of 43 char
410. splays them in the WEP fields These are the new WEP keys for the adapter profile Once displayed in the WEP key fields the adapter profile behaves as if the keys were entered manually TKIP WPA Select this option for the client adapter to use Wireless Protected Access WPA via TKIP Manually enter the pre shared keys in the edit boxes Tap ClearKey to clear all previous keys and enter new key values lap Passkey to display the Passkey screen Enter an easy to remember 8 to 63 character string 5 18 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG IP Config select the P Config tab to configure the following mobile computer profile network address parameters IP address subnet gateway DNS and WINS Changes made within the P Config tab only impact the profile selected in the Mode tab and do not impact the network address parameters configured for other profiles ES Network ar PETE IP Configuration Authentication Encryption IP Config Pq 4 gt E Figure 5 16 Mobile Companion IP Config Tab DHCP e Select Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP from the P Type drop down list to obtain a leased IP address and network configuration information from a remote server DHCP is the default setting for the mobile computer profile When DHCP is selected the IP address fields are read only Spectrum24 Configuration 5 19 e Select Static to manually assign the IP subnet mask default gateway DNS a
411. stbus 24 7050 AA Varsseveld Netherlands 315 271700 Inside Netherlands 31 315 271700 Outside Netherlands Italy Italia symbol Technologies Italia S R L Via Cristoforo Columbo 49 20090 Trezzano S N Navigilo Milano Italy 2 484441 Inside Italy 39 02 484441 Outside Italy Mexico Mexico symbol Technologies Mexico Ltd Torre Picasso Boulevard Manuel Avila Camacho No 88 Lomas de Chapultepec CP 11000 Mexico City DF Mexico 5 520 1835 Inside Mexico 52 5 520 1835 Outside Mexico Norway Norge oymbol s registered and mailing address symbol Technologies Norway Hoybratenveien 35 C N 1055 OSLO Norway oymbol s repair depot and shipping address symbol Technologies Norway Enebakkveien 123 N 0680 OSLO Norway 47 2232 4375 XXVII South Africa Spain Espa a symbol Technologies Africa Inc symbol Technologies S L Block B2 Avenida de Bruselas 22 Rutherford Estate Edificio Sauce 1 Scott Street Alcobendas Madrid 28108 Waverly 2090 Johannesburg Spain Republic of South Africa 91 324 40 00 Inside Spain 11 809 5311 Inside South Africa 34 91 324 40 00 Outside Spain 27 11 809 5311 Outside South Africa Fax 34 91 324 4010 Sweden Sverige Letter address symbol Technologies AB Box 1354 S 171 26 SOLNA Sweden Visit shipping address symbol Technologies AB solna Strandvag 78 S 171 54 SOLNA Sweden Switchboard 08 445 29 00 domestic Call Center 46 8 445 29 29 international support E
412. synchronizing e mail 9 15 Oe H 9 13 oo qoc 9 10 sumrmary Screen ii Ka us 9 12 A 9 4 SING C 1 14 SUI SATIS uis wacked exu uode aeqne B 27 authentication 5 5 A A 5 11 kerberos 5 8 KA AA ee E 5 10 1 0 A b ER ere ens ANAY FX RARE 5 11 auto charge cable 1 6 10 6 PROT PEE C 15 automatic power saving mode 5 21 AvantGo channels 9 37 B WACKO aasa banayad parara raras a c Ed sou backlight intensity 2 29 backup battery 3 44 MIN crono ass nre nga FU bar codes one dimentional 2 57 two dimentional Ll T 2 5 battery DOKN ETE ees serpere Fl EET AA mecs MIO check status 1 19 MSAND caw optimizing battery life VERA ee TOT eee removing 1 8 battery and backup battery status ll beaming information via bluetooth 6 17 beeper volume 2 29 bitorder C 24 1 IAA 2 47 bluetooth si kaaa a A T A PPP kAGAa Gad PT beaming information C EF discoverable mode 6 6 6 15 Morro renders 2 36 receiving beams 6 14 A DM UE A Po REPRE REP UD bluetooth versions 3 49 boot cold 1 15 1 18
413. t wireless connection 4 21 IP address 4 24 5 19 5 25 GONG A 5 5 5 36 gateway A o ns gt subnet mask pat ae wa a 5 19 NINS rag Kex edic o TM li EEEE TEETE error messages 12 24 error screen 12 24 J jpeg filesize C 17 jpeg library version C 25 o e E E i E K kerberos 02e 0eeee TTE 9 8 key descriptions PONEN caricia dde ed y E vu 2 18 E 48 NG KON IA 2 10 E 27 OO Al AN EA D3 key 2 14 E 38 NGO IAA 2 29 UPO MU AA NBA YAPO MYA OPEN OTA AMAR 2 26 E 64 AA Lbs keypads 28 key IS A A he daa aed 43 key T n AI AA haer rel o TP 2 13 entering information arar aro espia ae MC9000 K O ee ee eS oe special functions 2 29 OOS doe TIG Wa 2 25 IN 7 L MDO cccacuscepteaieced ridera herres C 15 laser scanning Seedatacapture 2 57 ico IA E E E E 5 10 letter recognizer 2 4 NAN SOCO ODOT NNNM 6 24 lithiumeon Datterv mGa rcr Re 1 5 ur WLAN TE 5 4 M MAC address 5 25 magnetic stripe reader 1 6 10 6 10 21 B 10 o nc reds a 3 44 tiran MEER ERREUR 1 7 1 10 EIA 1 7 MANANE Wa 13 3 manage certificates ESPA ec a rasa
414. t PCs PRG Encryption oelect the Encryption tab to set the adapter profile security level by configuring the encryption scheme and corresponding keys 1 Select an option Open System WEP TKIP WPA from the Encryption drop down list See Table 5 6 on page 5 16 for Encryption option descriptions T 3 Network et EI 3 Mode Authentication Encryption IP Col 4 gt E Figure 5 15 Mobile Companion Encryption Tab The absence of a physical connection makes wireless links vulnerable to information theft Encryption is an efficient method of preventing data theft and improving data security he AP and the mobile computer are required to use the same encryption algorithm to associate and transmit data If an AP is set to Open System and an adapter is set to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place Similarly if an adapter is set to Open System and an AP is set to 40 bit or 128 bit no association takes place If an AP is set to 40 bit and an adapter is set to 128 bit the adapter can associate to the AP but no data transmission and reception can take place Table 5 6 Encryption Tab Fields e Bei Open System Use the Open System option as the default setting when no data packet encryption is needed over the network Selecting this option provides no security for the data being transmitted over the network The window displays only the OK and Cancel buttons Spectrum24 Configuration
415. t last from the phone Refer to the phone s user paired with via the Bluetooth radio documentation for instructions You attempted to bond with the Reset the phone by removing its battery phone and when the phone presented a pairing query you entered No This prevents the phone from being discoverable until it is reset This is the normal behavior No solution required 13 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 13 2 Troubleshooting Bluetooth Connection Continued O Peo TO tao O sam Piconet the connection When the mobile computer suspends An application can register for notification of a between a Bluetooth master and the Bluetooth radio power is mobile computer resume by creating a message and one or more Bluetooth turned off piconet is dropped queue using the CreateMsgQueue API and slaves drops power notifications using the RequestPowerNotifications API see the Symbol SMDK Help file After an application receives a resume notification it should close previously open Bluetooth sessions and reopen them This reestablishes the piconet lost during the suspend One of the devices may be out of range My application created a Device went out of range or was shut Check the return value of APIs for errors Look successful RFCOMM session off for a DCD state change event in the Microsoft with another Bluetooth device Bluetooth stack DCD window of the Bluetooth but the RF
416. t this computer Your device can have up to two partnerships or a partnership with only this computer Do you want your device to have a partnership and synchronize with only this computer Yes wantto synchronize with only this compute Remove any existing partnerships on my device and set up a new partnership with just this computer C No lwantto synchronize with two computers Set up a partnership with this computer but do not remove any existing partnerships on my device Figure 4 4 How To Sync Window 7 Click the Yes want to synchronize with only this computer radio button and then select Next The New Partnership Select Synchronization Settings window appears TE New Partnership Nr Select Synchronization Settings Selectthe type of information you wantto synchronize To synchronize a particular type of information select its check box To stop synchronization of that information clear its check box AvantGo Channels ER Calendar Not Installed EJ Contacts Not Installed v EZ Favorites Intemet Explorer Files Synchronized Files v Inbox Microsoft Outlook TA Nintes Nat Installer To find out more about and to customize what gets synchronized click on that information type in the list and then click Settings lt Back Cancel Help Figure 4 5 Select Synchronization Settings Window 8 To synchronize a particular type of information select its chec
417. t to select until the insertion point appears 2 Dragthe stylus across the text If you accidentally write on the screen tap Fdit Undo Ink and try again You can also select text by tapping the Pen button to deselect it then dragging the stylus across the screen You can cut copy and paste written text in the same way you work with typed text tap and hold the selected words then tap the command from the pop up menu or select the command from the Edit menu Operating 2 53 Drawing on the Screen Drawing on the screen is similar to writing on the screen To create a drawing cross three ruled lines on the first stroke A drawing box appears Subsequent strokes in or touching the drawing box become part of the drawing Drawings that do not cross three ruled lines are treated as writing The drawing box indicates the boundaries of the drawing Mew Edit Tools Pen button Figure 2 29 Drawing on the Screen CO To change the zoom level select a zoom level from the Tools menu Selecting a Drawing To select a drawing to edit or format tap and hold the stylus on the drawing until the selection handle appears To select multiple drawings deselect the Pen button then drag to select the drawings you want To cut copy and paste drawings tap and hold the selected drawing then tap an editing command on the pop up menu or tap the command from the Edit menu To resize a drawing deselect the Pen button and drag a selecti
418. tegory from the drop down list In the contact list you can display contacts by category To add notes tap the Notes tab You can enter text draw or create a recording For more information on creating notes see Notes on page 9 13 When finished tap OK to return to the contact list You may find a contact in one of four ways In the contact list enter a contact name in the box under the navigation bar To show all contacts again clear text from the box or tap the button to the right of the box In the contact list tap the category list labeled All Contacts by default and select the type of contact to display To show all contacts again select A Contacts To view a contact not assigned to a category select None To view the names of companies contacts work for in the contact list tap View By Company The number of contacts that work for that company appears to the right of the company name Applications 9 9 e ap Start Find enter the contact name select Contacts for the type then tap Go Using the Summary Screen When you tap a contact in the contact list a summary screen appears lap Fditto change the information Adam Gabor Programmer l RAD View contact details Inspired Technologies 206 555 1212 Work tel 111 First St Work addr Tap to view notes Edit Tools Tap to change contact information Figure 9 6 Contacts Summary Screen 9 10 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software fo
419. ter Inspect the equipment for damage If you are missing any equipment or if you find any damaged equipment contact the Symbol Technologies Support Center immediately See page xxiv for contact information 1 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Accessories Cable Adapter Module CAM Snap on required to connect the following cables to the mobile computer e AC line cord country specific and power supply charges the mobile computer e Auto charge cable charges the mobile computer using a vehicle s cigarette lighter e DEX cable connects the mobile computer to a vending machine e Serial cable adds serial communication capabilities e USB cable adds USB communication capabilities e Printer cable adds printer communication capabilities Four Slot Charge Only Cradle Charges the mobile computer main battery Four Slot Ethernet Cradle Charges the mobile computer main battery and synchronizes the mobile computer with a host computer through an Ethernet connection Four Slot Spare Battery Charger Charges up to four mobile computer spare batteries Headphone Use in noisy environments Holster Holds the mobile computer when not in use Keypads Optional Application specific keypads Magnetic Stripe Reader MSR Snaps on to the mobile computer and adds magstripe read capabilities Modem Module Enables data communication between the mobile computer and a host computer remotely through the
420. ter 4 Communications To configure the mobile computer for Spectrum24 see Chapter 5 Spectrum24 Configuration To set up AirBEAM to synchronize the mobile computer with the host server see Chapter 7 AirBEAM Smart To configure the mobile computer using the Rapid Deployment Client see Chapter 8 Rapid Deployment Client To install development software on the development PC see Chapter 11 Software Installation on Development PC To configure the mobile computer using the Terminal Configuration Manager see Chapter 12 Configuring the Mobile Computer Contents 2 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG TOR TAL AAA 2 36 Be E eae is doris ge WA MEYA O DERE REF CUPS 2 37 BRIDE a oA OEE EE EEN tds E E E bed 2 38 WA A E mcr 2 39 Timelcon AAA E EE EEEE 2 40 acid e ASS 2 41 ei A O IIS 2 42 Multiple Notification ICON 2 42 CEDERE oe id Dieta ed AA 2 43 A 2 44 o AA AA PAA AA 2 45 mius SEDIT IA ea TTD eee ae eer eer rT eee 2 45 Entering Information Using the InputPanel 2 45 NM a o A 2 46 Using the Block Recognizer 2 4 Using the Letter Recognizer 2 4 a RTT UTRIUS TTE 2 48 Oe OO RECTE TT OTI CT 4 A 2 48 Gomerning OOO BREL auae ria AA 2 49 A A A 2 51 A 2 52 Selecting Writing 2 52 er Oe Mea reo AA AP
421. terfering signals A radio protocol that may be used by the Symbol Spectrum24 radio card Symbol Radio cards that use the opring protocol also have an Net ID A pattern of bars and spaces that provides the scanner with start and stop reading instructions and scanning direction The start and stop characters are normally to the left and right margins of a horizontal code oymbol Terminal Enabler Program A subset of nodes on a network that are serviced by the same router See Router Subnet Mask Substrate SVTP Symbol Symbol Aspect Ratio Symbol Height Symbol Length Symbology TCP IP Glossary GL 17 A 32 bit number used to separate the network and host sections of an IP address A custom subnet mask subdivides an IP network into smaller subsections The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the host ID address field into a field for subnets Default is often 255 255 255 0 A foundation material on which a substance or image is placed oymbol Virtual Terminal Program A scannable unit that encodes data within the conventions of a certain symbology usually including start stop characters quiet zones data characters and check characters The ratio of symbol height to symbol width The distance between the outside edges of the quiet zones of the first row and the last row Length of symbol measured from the beginning of the quiet zone margin adjacent to the start
422. ters Window 20 Select The Internet from the My network card connects to drop down list 21 lap ok 4 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 22 Tap Start Programs Internet Explorer The Pocket Internet Explorer window appears ES Internet Explorer 4 m2 9 35 e file windows default htm Microsoft Pocket Internet Explorer Welcome ta Packet Internet Explorer Mat online yet Find aut how to get cannected and save offline content y E 9l amp 6 AvantGo PocketPC com Figure 4 26 Pocket Internet Explorer Window 23 Inthe address bar enter the URL for a web site Contents 4 5 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG di ASA 5 32 Using LEAP for Wireless Network SecUrity 5 32 Configuring Advanced Password Options 0 00 0 cece ee n 5 32 iovis AAA 5 32 Cache the Password until a Warm Boot 5 33 Prevent Password Cache 5 34 A 5 34 Enterprise Level Wi Fi Protected Access 5 35 a Kape a dst o astern cheeK api PRORA 164 S DR sea pend 5 35 Spectrum24 Frequency Hopping FH Settings 1 and 2 MBRadios 5 36 alo CA DIT ERE ioa qp or a cn ERO OR o UR RO
423. the AvantGo information type 9 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 2 n Pocket Internet Explorer on the mobile computer tap the Favorites icon to display a list of favorites 3 lap AvantGo Channels Tap Activate Follow the directions on the screen You must synchronize the mobile computer with the host computer then tap My Channels to complete setup When synchronization is complete tap AvantGo Channels in the list of favorites to see a few of the most popular channels To add or remove channels tap Add or Remove Using Pocket Internet Explorer With Pocket Internet Explorer you can browse mobile favorites and channels downloaded to the mobile computer without connecting to the Internet You can also connect to the Internet through an ISP or a network connection and browse the Web EJ Internet Explorer 4 m2 9 35 ES file windows default htm h Microsoft c Pocket Internet Explorer Welcome ta Packet Internet Explorer Mat online yet Find aut how to get connected and save offline content ema 7 eee n 6 AvantGo PocketPC com view Tools 4 E Favorites button Home button Refresh button Back button Figure 9 26 Pocket Internet Explorer Applications 9 39 To view mobile favorites and channels tap the Favorites icon to display the list of favorites then tap the page to view Hy Internet Explorer 47 a 2 43 ok lt Mobile Favorites lt A Avant
424. the Test Applications window The KeyCheck Example window appears EJ KeyCheck Example 4 12 03 e Hit any key to see its code WM_KEYDOWN 0042 WM CHAR 0062 b WM_KEYUP 0042 Figure B 6 KeyCheck Example Window 2 Press a key on the mobile computer s keypad 3 The keys codes display 4 Tap X to close the application B 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Display Display is a test of the shades and colors displayed in the touch panel when the mobile computer is In use On mobile computers with a monochrome display black white and shades of gray appear On mobile computers with a color display colors appear 1 Toaccess the Display test application tap the Display icon on the Test Applications window The Display Test window appears ES DisplayTest Revis 4 m2 9 00 3 The shade above is Blue Figure B 7 DisplayTest Window 2 lap X to close the application Demo Program B 9 Memory Memory displays memory usage and allocation on the mobile computer 1 To access the Memory application tap the Memory icon on the Test Applications window The MemTest Example window appears ES MemTest Example 4 2 12 05 e Free mem KB 14884 Usage To Allacs KB 2 512 Hibernates Figure B 8 MemTest Example Window 2 Tap Alloc to allocate memory 3 Tap Free to free previously allocated memory 4 Tap Exit to close the application B 10 MC9000 G wit
425. the host computer During synchronization e E mail messages are copied from the Inbox folder of Exchange or Outlook on the host computer to the ActiveSync folder on the mobile computer By default you receive messages from the last three days only the first 100 lines of each message and file attachments of less than 100 Kb in size e E mail messages in the Outbox folder on the mobile computer are transferred to Exchange or Outlook then sent from those programs e E mail messages in subfolders must be selected in ActiveSync on the host computer to be transferred Connecting Directly to an E mail Server You can set up a connection to an e mail server to send and receive e mail messages using a network connection and Inbox on the mobile computer ea The ISP or network must use a POP3 e mail server and an SMTP gateway When you connect to the e mail server new messages are downloaded to the mobile computer Inbox folder messages in the mobile computer Outbox folder are sent and messages that were deleted on the e mail server are removed from the mobile computer Inbox Messages that you receive directly from an e mail server are linked to the e mail server rather than the host computer When you delete a message on the mobile computer it s also deleted from the e mail server the next time you connect 9 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG You can work online or offline When working online you read a
426. the information updated on the host computer and mobile computer Before synchronizing in Internet Explorer on the host computer click Tools Synchronize Note the last time content was downloaded to the host computer if necessary manually download content You can add a button to the Internet Explorer toolbar for creating mobile favorites In Internet Explorer on the host computer click View Toolbars Customize Saving Memory on the Mobile Computer Mobile favorites take up storage memory on the mobile computer To minimize the amount of memory used e nthe settings for the Favorites information type in Activesync options turn off pictures and sounds or stop some mobile favorites from downloading For more information refer to ActiveSync Help e Limit the number of downloaded linked pages In Internet Explorer on the host computer right click the mobile favorite you want to change then select Properties On the Download tab specify 0 or 1 for the number of linked pages to download Using AvantGo Channels AvantGo Is a free interactive service that gives you access to personalized content and thousands of popular Web sites Subscribe to AvantGo channels directly from the mobile computer then synchronize with the host computer or connect to the Internet to download the content For more information visit the AvantGo Web site To sign up for AvantGo 1 ln ActiveSync options on the host computer turn on synchronization for
427. the keypad s description table in Chapter2 Operating CO E 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal Default State LO D LI IL ee O O II l See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps ASCII Value Decimal sal N ti e See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values E E 8 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued Shift Alpha State 1 Tap Shift Alpha State 2 Taps Shift Alpha State 3 Taps Shift Alpha State 4 Taps Alpha State 1 Tap Alpha State 2 Taps Alpha State 3 Taps Alpha State 4 Taps VK Code Decimal ASCII Value Decimal N mE jum o e 7 See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values Keypad Maps E 9 Table E 2 28 Key Mapping Continued cama 9J8 S n8J8 q co co O co
428. tifications on page 3 23 for more information eu 2 38 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Battery Icon Battery icons display on the Navigation Bar when the main battery or backup battery power falls below a predetermined level A Battery dialog box also appears indicating the status of the main or backup battery E e rz Due P Es Main E Main Battery Yery L L To prevent possible data lass replace or To prevent possible data loss replace or recharge your battery according to the 7 recharge your battery according to the owner s manual owner s manual Figure 2 11 Battery Status Dialog Box The battery status can also be viewed using the Power window See Power on page 3 44 for more information Operating 2 39 Connectivity Icon The Connectivity icon indicates the communication status of the mobile computer when it s connecting to the internet or host computer 240 E Internet Explorer 4 7 6 43 e Cannot Connect Cannot connect with current connection settings To change vour connection settings tap Settings Settings 4 a Symbol stepped up to the plate and completed the install on time more David Myers project manager Coca Cola Bottling Co 47 0 View Tools lt A 4H Cal Ye Figure 2 12 Connectivity Dialog Box 2 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Time con The Time icon displays the
429. tifier guaranteed Byte order Byte format across all mobile computers with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs OEM Name Name of manufacturer s device XXXXXX where X is an alphanumeric character IPL Version Version of IPL X XX where X is an alphanumeric character OEM Version Manufacturer s version X XX where X is an alphanumeric character Platform Name Platform and Version of Platform en 3 0 SSDK 4 2 and Version Platform ID Version of platform hex image BE where X is an alphanumeric character 3 lapok 3 58 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Config The Config tab displays mobile computer options installed in the device 1 Tap Start Settings Systemtab Symbol Settings icon Config tab ES Symbol Settings lt 7 m2 12 03 ok ConfigType Scanner Display Keyboard UART Terminal Trigger Audio Touch Bluetooth USG DSP 524 CLD WAMN Hex Data 0x40 SES24 001 Color 001 53Kev x40 Present fOx02 Brick 0x40 T751 fOx02 Codec fOx02 Production fOx00 None 0x01 PRAZSSLISB fOx00 None fOx00 None fOx00 None fOx00 None config Figure 3 52 Symbol Settings Window Config Tab 2 Inthe Config tab you can view the configuration data 3 Tap ok Settings 3 59 Connections Use the Configure Network Adapters window to modify IP and server addresses for a wireless Ethernet connection Wireless Ethernet The
430. tion 10 40 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Modem Country Setup Edit the Extra dial string modem commands text box in the mobile computer to set country parameters The syntax used is GCl lt country_code gt Supported Countries Table 10 4 Supported Countries Gems too tomy too mmy Geo hum s We Bem em Rem Denmark FD or 31 Luxembourg TBR 21 FD Europe Finland FD or 3C Mexico United FD or B4 Kingdom France FD or 3D Netherlands FD or 7B United States B5 Default Note Use FD where possible If connection problems occur use the alternate code where provided F F 7 D D 3 Accessories 10 41 AT Commands The AT Command Set allows you to custom configure the modem eo Only experienced users having difficulty with default settings should use this feature Changing the Initialization String To enter AT commands 1 Tap Start Settings Connections tab Connections icon 2 f creating a new connection select Add a new modem connection in the Connections window Then follow steps 1 through 6 in Configuring the Mobile Computer for the Modem on page 10 36 and proceed to Step 6 et 4 1209 5 Connections To set up or change connection information tap one of Ehe Following links My ISP Add a new modem connection Manage existing connections My Work Network Add a new modem connection Add a new VPM server connection Sek up my proxy server E Figure 1
431. tion Bluetooth wireless technology memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM 28 key 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VI Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display Rapid Deployment MC906R RFID Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs operating system performs1 dimensional and 2 dimensional bar code scanning with an integrated imager and Radio Frequency Identification RFID 802 11b Spectrum24 wireless technology to perform local area network LAN communication memory configuration 64 MB ROM 64 MB RAM 28 key 43 key 53 key 3250 Emulator 5250 Emulator and VT Emulator interchangeable keypads QVGA monochrome or color touch panel display Rapid Deployment ocreens and windows pictured in this Product Reference Guide are samples and may vary XXI xxi MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Chapter Descriptions Topics covered in this guide are as follows Chapter 1 Getting Started lists the accessories for the mobile computer and explains how to install and charge the batteries replace the strap and start the mobile computer for the first time Chapter 2 Operating explains the physical buttons and controls on the mobile computer how to use the mobile computer including instructions for powering on and resetting the mobile computer using the stylus and a headset entering information and scanning Chapter 3 Settings explains how to adjust sett
432. tion Table Contains the partition information for all other partitions Note The partition table should never need changing unless the sizes of the platform and application images are changed within TCM If this is done then the new partition table should be loaded first followed by both platform and application in any order selecting this item provides a simple method to exit IPL and to boot the operating system Auto Select selecting this item allows one or more files to be downloaded without having to manually select the destination The content of the files being downloaded automatically directs the file to the correct destination For technical reasons Auto Select cannot be used to download Monitor Power Micro or Partition Table These items must be specifically selected If the platform or application partition sizes are changed you must download a new partition table first eu 12 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 IPLdisplays the Select Iransportmenu which lists the available methods of downloading the file select Transport Wireless S24 XX Serial Previous Top Figure 12 8 Select Transport Menu CO If the mobile computer does not have a radio then the Wirelesss24XX selection is not available on the ransport menu 6 Usethe up and down scroll buttons to select the method of transport then press Enter Configuring the Mobile Computer 12 17 7 If you selected the Ser
433. tions Continued Description Numeric Application Numeric value keys can have applications assigned with function key s F6 and F7 keys cannot be remapped and are dedicated by the Operating System to LM AL VC control volume level When these keys are pressed Shell exe traps them and displays the volume adjustment window To get these keys to an application call GXOpenlnput at the beginning of the application and call GXCloselnput at the end of the application This redirects all of the key events to an application including the F6 and F7 keys Note Other applications cannot receive any key event until GXCloselnput is called For example if the customer is using the APP1 key to run Calc exe this is disabled during this period Function blue Press and release the blue function key to activate the keypad alternate functions shown on the keypad in blue The keypad LED lights Press and release the CTRL key to activate the keypad alternate CTRL functions The keypad LED lights Press and release the SHIFT key to activate the keypad alternate SHIFT functions Press and release the SHIFT key again to return to the normal keypad functions Produces a period for alpha entries and a decimal point for numeric entries Produces an asterisk 2 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 2 3 53 Key Descriptions Continued es 00000 Executes a selected item or function The default behavi
434. to lock a tag and kill a tag In the Password box enter a number from 0 255 Remember the password Once a tag is locked it cannot be killed without a password 4 Tap Program Tags lt might take more than one attempt to program the tag 5 When a tag is successfully programmed a status message displays in the Status Message text box 6 Tap Read to read a newly programmed tag RFID Demo Program C 41 e0 For a successful tag read the allowable read distance from the front of the mobile computer s scan exit window to the tag Is 0 2 ft 10 ft 0 061 m to 3 1 m 7 Tap Erase to erase an unlocked tag 8 lap Lock to lock a tag so that it cannot be changed A password is required to lock a tag See Program lag on page C 40 9 Tap Kill to make a tag unreadable A password is required to kill a tag See Program Tag on page C 40 10 Tap Back to Global Scroll to return to the main Tags window To successfully write data to a tag the tag must be no less than 1 ft 31 m from JN the antenna and no greater than 2 ft 61 m from the antenna WARNING Scan Bar Code This option launches the Imager sample application to scan bar codes and capture images 1 lap ET in the main Tags window or tap Mode Scan Barcode 53 Symbol Image Cap e m2 12 08 MO File Demo Advanced Help Return to RFID Demo E Figure C 29 Symbol Image Capture Scan Window 2 See Imager on page C 4 for information about scanning
435. ttached to either connector Clip otrap Connectors Loop Connection Details Figure 1 6 Reposition the Strap Getting Started 1 15 Starting the Mobile Computer Press the Power button to turn on the mobile computer If the mobile computer does not power on perform a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 CO When a battery is fully inserted in a mobile computer for the first time upon the mobile computer s first power up the device boots and powers on automatically When the mobile computer is powered on for the first time it initializes its system The Symbol splash screen Figure 1 7 appears for a short period of time followed by the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC window symbol The Enterprise Mobility Company Figure 1 7 Symbol Splash Window Remove the stylus from the handle and tap the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC window with the stylus to display align screen Figure 1 8 where the screen is calibrated Note that these windows also appear every time you perform a cold boot 1 16 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Calibrating the Screen To calibrate the screen so the cursor on the touch screen aligns with the tip of the stylus 1 Using the stylus carefully press and briefly hold the tip of stylus on the center of each target that appears on the screen align screen Tap the target firmly and accurately at each location on
436. ttings O Continuously write Log File Figure B 3 Self Test Window oelect as many check boxes to test as desired In the Run Tests box select the One Time radio button to run one test for each checked item or select the Continuously radio button to run tests for each checked item continuously Tap Settings he Self Test Settings window appears Self Test Settings Response timeout sec Pixel colors En test 2 16 Stepped test duration sec Default record time sec Prompt for status after each test Figure B 4 Self Test Settings Window B 6 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 5 Enter the desired settings and tap OK 6 Tap Start to run the test s 7 Tap Exit to close the application Notify Notify tests the functionality of the green decode LED function shift and control key LEDs keypad dependent communication LED where applicable and beeper of the mobile computer 1 To access the Notify application tap the Notify icon on the lest Applications window The Notify Example window appears EN amp Notify Example Figure B 5 Notify Window select one of the items from the list Tap the On button The selected item is activated Tap the Off button Tap Exit to close the application of dm Se TY Demo Program B 7 Keyboard Keyboard displays the values of a key on the keypad 1 To access the Keyboard application tap the Keyboard icon on
437. u to set the Aim Lamp and Focus Near selections Aim Tap Options Aim laser aim to create a targeting pattern when aiming the exit window E q B J Figure B 37 Aiming Pattern Lamp Tap Options Lamp to turn the lamp on during the exposure phase of image acquisition Focus Near Tap Options Focus Nearto enable a close focal focus length Help The Help menu provides software and hardware information and enables defaults to be reset B 36 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG About lap Help About The About window appears ES ImagerSample at aff 12 27 ok r About Imagersample L CAPI Version 1 0 MOD Version 1 0 POD Version 1 2 Hardware Version 1 18 Copyright 7 2003 Symbol Technologies Inc The sample application is supplied to demonstrate various device features and programming practices It is not intended for production use and warranty of usability For any other purpose made Figure B 38 ImagerSample About Window The About window provides software and hardware version information for the ImagerSample application on the mobile computer PC Link oelect the PC Link icon to connect to a host computer with the appropriate power connections Demo Program B 37 About select the Abouticon on the Series 9000 Demo window to view information about the demo program Ei Series 9000 Demo 4 4 9 01 ok Otl Example Otl version 4 1 7 1 Copyright
438. uetooth devices within range 49 Calendar Padi PESE ok Ey Padi PESE ok PalMeet with Joe 9 Call John To beam select a device To beam select a device 4 Infrared Align ports 4 Infrared Align ports 000207 1c9e4c Tap to send 0002071 9e4c Tap to send amp Searching amp Searching Figure 6 20 Calendar Tasks Windows Beam If the mobile computer is bonded to a device but it does not appear in the list ensure it is turned on in discoverable mode and within range 30 feet 10 meters of the mobile computer In addition ensure the mobile device s Bluetooth radio is turned on Co Bluetooth Wireless Technology 6 19 On the Calendar or Tasks window tap Tap to send to the Bluetooth device receiving the appointment or task Tap Pending to cancel 7 The mobile computer processes and sends the file s 6 Sending a Contact 1 Ensure the other Bluetooth device Is set up to receive a contact 2 Tap Start Contacts The Contacts window appears 3 Tap and hold the contact s to send In the pop up menu select Beam Contact y Contacts en 2 3 22 x All Contacts y sab cde foh ik imn ona rst Law SS iB 555 1379 Ww Beam Contact Delete Contact New View Tools Figure 6 21 Contact Windo 6 20 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 4 The mobile computer begins to search for Bluetooth devices within range T AF Contacts ar aft 3 76 ok PE Doe John To
439. us variable focal lengths e support for aiming e different exposure settings For detailed information about Still Image Capture C API functions and capabilities refer to the SMDK Help file for Symbol mobile computers eu AcqCap Tap the AcgCap tab to define and or control how the imaging hardware acquires images AutoExposure Aim Pattern On L Be saa Figure C 11 Symbol Image Capture AcqCap Tab RFID Demo Program C 15 Table C 1 AcqCap Fields opecifies if auto exposure is enabled or not Enabling this field affects the exposure time and analog gain When AutoExposure is enabled Exposure Analog Gain and AE settle are disabled The default value is On Allowed values are Enabled TRUE or AutoExposure Disabled FALSE opecifies if the lamp should be used during image acquisition If enabled the lamp is turned on during the exposure phase of image acquisition The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled Lamp On TRUE or Disabled FALSE specifies if the aiming reticule should be enabled If enabled the aiming reticule is turned on as image acquisition is started Theaiming reticule automatically turns off during the exposure phase of image acquisition so that it does not appear in the captured image The default value is Disabled Allowed values are Enabled Aiming Pattern On TRUE or Disabled FALSE opecifies the target brightness that the auto exposure algorithm att
440. ustomize the Today screen tap one of the Following themes and tap OK WA n d o s DO E fa LU t Beam Delete Use this picture as the background Browse Appearance Items Figure 3 18 Today Window Appearance Tab 2 Select the desired theme for the Today screen background To use your own background select Use this picture as the background check box and tap Browse to locate the desired file on the mobile computer 3 To beam a theme to another mobile computer select the desired theme and tap Beam See Chapter 6 Bluetooth Wireless Technology for detailed information To delete a theme select the desired theme and tap Delete Tap ok 3 26 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Items To select items that appear on the Today screen 1 Tap Start Settings Personaltab Today icon Appearance tab 9 Settings wa EN ok Checked items appear on the Today screen Display Today screen if device is not used For hours Figure 3 19 Today Window Items Tab 2 Select the items you want to appear on the Today screen To customize the information further select an information type and then tap Options not available for all information types 3 lapok Settings 3 27 About Use the About window to view general system properties change memory settings input device name and view copyright information Version he Version tab view displays general system settings
441. uter 9 37 Using AvantGo Cannel MAA 9 37 Using Pocket internet EXDIDIBE LL uie da GAB APA Bode PESCE cria 9 38 pec BGM MA E DEA E I E EES T 9 39 ai ETE ne EEE E EE ET E cos prat E EE 9 40 Copy Pictures to the Device LA dtir drn idd RR 9 40 Zell Ce AA TEE es aug E E E E EEE PA 9 40 RA I ERE AP E TOT E RET E EE E TEE 9 40 set PICAS CaN rarr rriren Ear EEEE ardid 9 40 View Pictures o 9 41 View Slideshow of Pictures a 9 41 Applications 9 3 Introduction The mobile computer includes Calendar Contacts Tasks Inbox and Notes applications You can use these programs individually or together For example e mail addresses stored in Contacts can be used to address e mail messages in Inbox Using ActiveSync you can synchronize information in these applications between the host computer and the mobile computer Each time you synchronize ActiveSync compares the changes you made on the mobile computer and host computer and updates both with the latest information For information on using ActiveSync see Chapter 4 Communications and ActiveSync Help on the host computer You can switch to any of these programs by tapping them on the Start menu 9 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Calendar Use Calendar to schedule appointments such as meetings You can view appointments in different ways Agenda Day Week Month and Year and easily change views using the
442. uter screen e Although the mobile computer is water and dust resistant do not expose it to rain or moisture for an extended period of time In general treat the mobile computer as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument e The touch sensitive screen of the mobile computer contains glass Take care not to drop the mobile computer or subject it to strong impact e Protect the mobile computer from temperature extremes Do not leave it on the dashboard of a car on a hot day and keep it away from heat sources e Donotstore or use the mobile computer in any location that is extremely dusty damp or wet e Use a soft lens cloth to clean the mobile computer If the surface of the mobile computer screen becomes soiled clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution 13 4 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Troubleshooting Mobile Computer Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer DO Pobim OT NENNEN GN MC9000 G Series MC906R G RFID Mobile computer does not turn Lithium ion battery not Charge or replace the lithium ion battery in the mobile on charged computer Lithium ion battery not Ensure battery is installed properly See nstalling and installed properly Removing the Main Battery on page 1 7 system crash Perform a warm boot If the mobile computer still does not turn on perform a cold boot See Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2
443. vCap tab to define and or control the actual imaging device This includes resolution of the imager its available power modes etc E Symbol Image Cap 4r m2 12 28 63 On Screen Keyboard RGB Data Format Light Source Color Get Image Timeout Figure C 14 Symbol Image Capture DevCap Tab Table C 4 DevCap Fields LEE NN Powermode Native Res X Y Color Format Defines the power mode that the imaging device enters when it is locked but not acquiring The default value is Off Allowed values are Off Standby Halted Running and Acquiring The native optical resolution along the X axis and Y axis of the imaging device The default value of the X axis is 640 The default value of the Y axis is 480 These capabilities cannot be changed The color format of the pixel data the imaging device is capable of acquiring The default value is Gray 8bit Mono 8 bit and cannot be changed C 24 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table C 4 DevCap Fields Continued Pa i n opecifies how the bytes in an image are filled by the source MSB indicates that the leftmost bit in the byte usually bit 7 is the byte s most significant bit The default value is MSB and cannot be changed Bit Order RGB Data Format Light Source Color Get Image Timeout Version opecifies the available color data formats There are two options Planar and Chunky In Planar mode the RGB data is t
444. ve The mobile computer turns off after a period of inactivity If the mobile computer is running on battery power this period can be set from 1 to 5 minutes in one minute intervals If the mobile computer is running on external power this period can be set to 1 2 5 10 15 and 30 minutes Check the Power window by selecting Start Settings System tab and tap the Power icon Select the Advanced tab and change the setting if you need a longer delay before the automatic shutoff feature activates Battery is depleted Replace the battery Battery is not inserted Insert the battery properly see nstalling and properly Removing the Main Battery on page 1 7 LCD screen not aligned correctly Re calibrate the screen See Figure 1 11 on page 1 18 The system is hung Warm boot the system To perform a warm boot see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 Too many files stored on the mobile computer Too many applications installed on the mobile computer Delete unused memos and records You can save these records on the host computer If you have installed additional applications on the mobile computer remove them to recover memory select Start Settings System tab and tap the Remove Programs icon Select the unused program and tap Remove 13 6 IMC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table 13 1 Troubleshooting the Mobile Computer Continued mmm me Rm The mobile compute
445. ved when not in use Latches Pogo Pin Pass through Connector Latch Grip Communications Port Power Port Figure 10 17 Cable Adapter Module When attached to the mobile computer the CAM can perform the following functions e Provides power for operating the mobile computer with the appropriate power connection e Provides serial connection through the serial pass through port for communication with a serial device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 e Provides USB connection through the USB pass through port for communication with a USB device such as a host computer For communication setup procedures see Serial Communication Setup on page 4 9 e Charges the mobile computer s battery when used with the appropriate power supply Accessories 10 27 Attaching and Removing To attach snap the CAM onto the bottom of the mobile computer Latch Grip one on each side Figure 10 18 Attaching the CAM To remove squeeze the latch grips and pull the CAM from the mobile computer Remove the CAM from the bottom of the mobile computer before using a cradle for charging and communication CU 10 28 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Setup Into Cigarette Lighter Supply Supply Serial Port r o Device Serial USB Port Figure 10 20 CAM Serial Connection Accessories Battery Charging
446. ver and AirBEAM packages must be setup Ideally a staging network and server should be setup to match the default AirBEAM Staging client configuration The AirBEAM Smart staging utility is invoked from the Applications directory tap Start Programs File Explorer Application The AirBEAM Staging support provides several benefits e Many devices can be simultaneously loaded over the RF network e The AirBEAM staging utility provides a simple single dialog user interface that Is used to quickly start the software Installation process Contents Introdu ctl on 8 2 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Rapid Deployment Client 8 3 Introduction The Rapid Deployment RD Client facilitates software downloads to a mobile computer from a Mobility Services Platform MSP Console s FTP server The MSP Console is a web based interface to the wireless infrastructure monitoring and management tools provided by the MSP Lite or MSP Enterprise server When software packages are transferred to the FIP server the mobile computer on the wireless network can download them to the mobile computer he location of software packages are encoded in RD bar codes When the mobile computer scans a bar code s the software packages is downloaded from the FIP server to the mobile computer A single RD bar code can be scanned by multiple mobile computers eo For detailed information about the MSP Console MSP Lite MSP Ent
447. w Scanning Data Fields After a bar code is scanned the following data appears in the screen e Data displays the data encoded in the scanned bar code e Type indicates the hex type scanned e SRC indicates the scanner being used and the bar code type scanned e g Code 128 e ime displays the time the bar code was scanned e enindicates the number of digits in the bar code e vt indicates the status of the application Waiting for Trigger or Scanning Scanning Options The following options are available in the Scan window e Scan provides an alternative to the trigger buttons on the mobile computer e View displays the bar code content in a separate window B 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG e Params is used to change scanning parameter options such as beep time length of decode beep beeper frequency tone LED on time length of time LED remains on upon decode Code ID AIM Symbol Wav File sound of decode beep e Codes selects the code types the mobile computer is able to decode and sets the options for each code type e ancelcloses the Scan window Files To access the Files demo tap the Files icon on the Series 9000 Demo window for a file browser utility InkWiz Example lt provides similar Windows Explorer like functionality and allows the user to browse cut copy paste and delete files as well as execute the program ES InkWiz Example ga m2 1 72 ES
448. w jpg format pictures stored on the mobile computer send pictures to others view a slideshow of pictures or set a picture as the background on the oday screen Copy Pictures to the Device You can copy jpg pictures from the PC and view them in Pictures Copy the picture files from the PC to the My Pictures folder within the My Documents folder on the mobile computer For more information on copying files from the PC to the mobile computer refer to ActiveSync Help on the PC Edit Pictures You can rotate crop zoom and adjust the brightness and color contrast of pg pictures 1 Tap to rotate a picture 90 degrees counter clockwise 2 Tap F to crop a picture by dragging and selecting the crop area Tap outside of the box to stop cropping 3 Tap 2 to display the Zoom panel from which you can zoom in or out of a picture or return a picture to full screen size 4 Tap Edit Brightness and Contrast to adjust the brightness and contrast levels of a picture Send Pictures You can send a jpg picture to others as an e mail attachment The picture is resized to approximately 30 KB making it easier to send over wireless connections 1 InPictures tap the picture you want to send as an e mail attachment 2 Tap Tools Send via E mail to create an e mail message with the picture attached Set Picture as Background You can use one of your own jpg pictures as the background on the Today screen and specify how you want it display
449. w appears x Please Swipe Card x a Figure B 11 MSR Cameo Swipe Card Window B 12 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG 3 Swipe a magnetic stripe card The content on the card displays in the window File Help MSR Press OK to swipe ag 0K x Yo TRACE17676760707077 6 6 60 7070776 6760707 07707070070707 7676750 FOO 7676750707315 Start E Figure B 12 MSR Cameo Data Window 4 Tap OK to swipe another card 5 Tap X to close the application Printing Printing tests the functionality of a printer 1 To access the Printing application tap the Printing icon on the Test Applications window The BasicPrint v7 0 window appears BasicPrint v1 0 Select a Printer MES T Barcode 123456 Figure B 13 BasicPrint v1 0 Window select a printer from the Select a Printer drop down list Enter the text to print in the Text box Enter the bar code to print in the Barcode box Tap Print to print the information entered Tap X to close the application Oo fF WON Demo Program B 13 Scan The Visual C C sample scanning application enables the mobile computers scanner allows the user to change scan parameters and displays scanned data To access the Scan demo tap the Scan icon on the Series 9000 Demo window The ScanSamp2 Example window appears ES ScanSamp2 Example 4 9 32 e ii BEEN Src Len C1 CC Figure B 14 ScanSamp2 Example Windo
450. wer connection 10 20 scanner settings B 28 Creating Messages iilis sess n res 9 19 symbol security B 31 CUNA splash SCEE a 2 ovde every er eite 12 27 system versions B 18 crop settings WA C 18 touch calibrate B 23 WA Me H C 21 display o B 8 A NON P C 20 file explorer B 14 Dio PCR T UTE TT TT B 32 Id RU PETERET TE TOT CUu imager RFID C 4 aoc B 15 keyboard BA a a a ana a a nba aa GG ba BG B 9 Higa Ems MOD OMIT re B 11 I A A B 6 A B 36 padang 132342443 AA B 12 scan B3 si AA RA PAP PAP PIPE B 5 COO WI aw aci lores O DevCap C 4 Device Configuration Package for MC9000w xxiv 1 6 5 45 11 3 Ku 11 6 12 3 12 10 12 27 12 29 12 30 device ID Gaan 3 28 device name 3 28 DEX cable 1 6 10 6 pH MM 4 24 5 18 5 42 discoverable mode 6 6 6 15 display optimizing display performance 3 46 display backlight intensity 2 29 3 30 display CONE ear 2 29 3 30 display settings B 26 diversity antenna 5 43 DNS 549 5 25 5 42 drawing onscreen 00 2 53 E EAP TLS occ cece eee mnn 5 11 elect
451. wing entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE HARDWARE DEVICEMAP KEYBD GreenKeyOverride dword xx where xx is the new APP key code RedKeyOverride dword yy where yy is the new APP key code Copy the registry file to the Platform folder then cold boot the mobile computer This sends an APP key code instead of their original key codes when the green or red dot key is pressed Scan yellow ocan key used for scanning applications this key has the same function as pulling the trigger Moves up and down from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Moves left and right from one item to another Increases decreases specified values Exits the current operation Use the alpha keys for alphabetic characters SPACE BKSP opace and backspace functions Operating 2 19 Table 2 4 3270 Emulator Descriptions Continued Ta Application Function blue m O Control w Period Decimal Point These keys can be assigned to an application F6 and F7 keys cannot be remapped and are dedicated by the Operating System to control volume level When these keys are pressed Shell exe traps them and displays the volume adjustment window To get these keys to an application call GXOpenlnput at the beginning of the application and call GXCloselnput at the end of the application This redirects all of the key events to an application including the F6 and F7 keys Note Other applications cannot receive a
452. word In the Password field enter a four digit password For a stronger password Settings 3 2 a In the Password field enter a seven character password A strong password must contain at least seven characters that are a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters numerals and punctuation Password Prompt if device unused For C Simple 4 digit password a Strong alphanumeric password Password 12331 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 Tab a w e r t v u i o p T T caPa s difiginiykitizi shift z x c v b n m 7 cala ete Ela Figure 3 14 Alphanumeric Password b Inthe Confirm field re enter the password 7 Tap ok 3 22 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Hint To set hint so that you can remember the password 1 Tap Start Settings Personal tab Password icon Hint tab 9 settings e 46411 Password Provide a password hint in case vou Forget our password This hint may be visible by others 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 4 qjw e r t v u i o p T aPja s d f g h j k I z hift z x c v bjnim 14 uj 1 EE Tel E Figure 3 15 Password Window Hint Tab 2 Inthe text box enter a password hint that would remind you of the password you set 3 Tap ok Settings 3 23 Sounds amp Notifications Use the Sounds amp Notifications window to set event sounds and volume options Volume To adjust the system volume and enable event
453. y Blue function key Blue function key Decreases scan decode beeper volume and 6 Or Blue function key SHIFT and 6 Blue function key Not Available Blue function key Enables Alt keypad functions and CTRL and CTRL Use of display and keypad backlighting can significantly reduce battery life CO Mobile computers with color screens do not have contrast settings Operating 2 31 Using the Power Button Press the red Power button to turn the mobile computer screen on and off suspend mode The mobile computer is on when the screen is on and the mobile computer is in suspend mode when the screen Is off For more information see Starting the Mobile Computer on page 1 15 The Power button is also used to reset the mobile computer by performing a warm or cold boot e Warm Boot Soft Reset Resets the mobile computer e Cold Boot Hard Reset Resets the mobile computer removes all added applications and restores all factory default settings Applications that are added to the Application and Platform folders are not removed when a cold boot is performed on the mobile computer Application and Platform folders are in flash memory c For information about booting the mobile computer see Resetting the Mobile Computer on page 2 62 2 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Using a Headset You can use a stereo headset to listen to mono audio playback To use a headset plug the headset Jac
454. y other ODI compatible protocol into something a NetWare client can understand and process Open System authentication is a null authentication algorithm Personal area network Using Bluetooth wireless technology PANs enable devices to communicate wirelessly Generally a wireless PAN consists of a dynamic group of less than 255 devices that communicate within about a 33 foot range Only devices within this limited area typically participate in the network A variable that can have different values assigned to it PC Card PCMCIA Percent Decode PING Print Contrast Signal PCS Programming Mode Quiet Zone QWERTY Radio Frequency Identification RAM Rapid Deployment GL 14 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG A plug in expansion card for laptop computers and other devices also called a PCMCIA card PC Cards are 85 6mm long x 54 mm wide and have a 68 pin connector There are several different kinds Type l 3 3 mm high use RAM or Flash RAM Type Il 5 mm high use modems LAN adaptors Type Ill 10 5 high use Hard Disks Personal Computer Memory Card Interface Association see PC Card The average probability that a single scan of a bar code would result in a successful decode In a well designed bar code scanning system that probability should approach near 10096 Packet Internet Groper An Internet utility used to determine whether a particular IP address is online
455. yo pp oa o 5 y Jj fs Lo p po y jg pm ee EI ee A NG le pm L1 HE jawa a oo pp pp j fa ap pp pp pp op AE EA Lo qp pe pm LOL LOL NO PAM LN See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 31 Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock Alpha Shift Alpha VK Code ASCII Value CN ET State mE See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys E 32 MC9000 G with Windows Mobile 2003 Software for Pocket PCs PRG Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift VK Code ASCII Value Decimal Decimal aaa CU CO PE le 160 69 Nul CT s Cannot be E MEN Dedicated to controlling volume level See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special function key values See Table 2 2 on page 2 10 for more information about F6 F7 keys Keypad Maps E 33 Table E 4 43 Key Keypad Mapping Continued Default Numlock ift VK Code ASCII Value Decimal Decimal ee Cannot be D uu Dedicated to controlling volume level o 1 1 35 iq qu S j l ll l Lo Lo A PO p Lo 1 m pw ATC pe pe LL ma CO AAA S a EE LA E O KAA ac we ISS AS ff um d 1 l m pe AI AAA A a ELE e E fl 1 fe See Table 2 7 on page 2 29 for special functi

MC9000-G Product Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents